Skip to main content

Full text of "The Princeton Theological Review"

See other formats


RAKt  Duuko 


Volume  XXVI  July,  1928  Number  3 

The  Prince 
Theological 
Review 


CONTENTS 

Christianity’s  Finality  and  New  Testament  Teaching  337 

Clarence  Bouma 

The  Origin  of  the  Regensburg  Book  355 

Hastings  Eells 

Wilhelm  Herrmann’s  Systematic  Theology  373 

Thos.  Cary  Johnson 

Does  the  Roman  Church  Teach  the  Doctrine  of 

Religious  Persecution?  394 

An  Ex  Catholic  Priest 

The  Rule  of  Faith  and  Life  423 

R.  D.  Wilson 

Reviews  of  Recent  Literature  451 

Survey  of  Periodical  Literature  475 


PRINCETON  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 
PRINCETON 

LONDON  : HUMPHREY  MILFORD 
OXFORD  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 
1928 


The  Princeton  Theological  Review 

EDITED  FOR 

THE  FACULTY  OF  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 

BY 

Oswald  T.  Allis 

Each  author  is  solely  responsible  for  the  views  expressed  in  his  article 
Notice  of  discontinuance  must  be  sent  to  the  Publishers ; otherwise  subscriptions  will  be  continued 
Subscription  rate.  Two  Dollars  a year,  single  copies  Sixty  Cents 
Entered  as  Second  Class  Mail  Matter  at  Princeton,  N.  J. 

BOOKS  REVIEWED 

Akmentrout,  J.  S.,  Administering  the  Vacation  Church  School.  ■■  ■ 469 

Baillie,  D.  M.,  Faith  in  God  and  its  Christian  Consummation....  464 

Battenhouse,  H.  M.,  The  Bible  Unlocked 455 

Billen,  A.  V.,  The  Old  Latin  Texts  of  the  Hexateuch 45i 

Bradford,  G.,  D.  L.  Moody,  A Worker  in  Souls 467 

Burroughs,  P.  E.,  Our  Lord  and  Ours 468 

Champion,  J.  B.,  More  Than  Atonement 466 

Keller,  A.,  and  Stewart,  G.,  Protestant  Europe  472 

Klotsche,  E.  H.,  An  Outline  of  the  History  of  Doctrines 456 

Kunneth,  W.,  Die  Lehre  von  der  Siinde 459 

Macartney,  C.  E.,  Of  Them  He  Chose  Twelve 469 

Macartney,  C.  E.,  Paul,  the  Man 471 

Purinton,  H.  R.,  The  Achievement  of  Israel 452 

Rade,  M.,  Glaubenslehre,  Vol.  III.  3,  “Vom  Geist” 457 

Smith,  G.  B.,  Current  Christian  Thinking  461 

Verkuyl,  G.,  Qualifying  Men  for  Church  Work 468 


Copyright  1918, by  Princeton  University  Press 


The  Princeton 
Theological  Review 

JULY,  1928 


CHRISTIANITY’S  FINALITY  AND  NEW 
TESTAMENT  TEACHING 

Every  intelligent  adherent  of  Christianity  sooner  or  later 
faces  the  question  as  to  the  truth,  the  uniqueness,  and  the 
finality  of  Christianity.  We,  Christians,  have  in  most  cases 
imbibed  Christian  ideas  and  followed  Christian  standards 
from  infancy.  Having  been  born  into  a Christian  environ- 
ment and  having  enjoyed  a Christian  training,  we  were  led 
to  accept  the  system  of  Christian  truth  and  to  adopt  the 
Christian  moral  norm  as  true,  final,  and  satisfying.  Conse- 
quently, Christianity  has  practically  from  infancy  been  our 
standard  of  truth  and  of  value. 

But  as  we  grow  in  intelligence  we  wish  to  know  the  reason 
why.  We  discover  that  Christianity  is  not  the  only  religion 
in  the  world.  We  challenge  ourselves  as  Christians.  Such 
questions  as  these  involuntarily  force  themselves  upon  us. 
If  I were  born  in  India  from  Hindu  parents,  would  I not  as 
resolutely  hold  that  Hinduism  is  the  only  true  and  satisfying 
religion?  Just  what  is  there  in  Christianity  that  gives  it  a 
claim  to  the  allegiance  of  man?  Is  there  really  anything 
fundamentally,  unique,  final,  absolute  about  Christianity? 
Granted  that  Christianity  is  true  and  has  value,  is  such 
truth  and  value  relative  or  absolute?  Are  not  perhaps  all 
religions  true  and  satisfying  in  a measure,  the  one  more,  the 
other  less  so,  the  only  difference  between  them  being  one  of 
degree  ? Does  not  possibly  each  racial  group  have  the  religion 
best  adapted  to  it  and  serving  its  needs  best,  so  that  the  ques- 
tion as  to  the  finality  of  any  religion  ought  not  to  be  raised? 
Is  Christianity  perhaps  the  highest  form  of  religious  de- 


338  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

velopment  so  far  attained  by  humanity  but  destined,  from 
the  nature  of  the  case,  to  be  superseded  by  higher  stages? 
Jf  all  religion  is  essentially  a matter  of  search  after  God, 
what  claim  can  any  one  religion  make  to  the  allegiance  of  all 
men? 

In  present-day  religious  thought,  which  has  been  so  deeply 
influenced  and  determined  by  the  historical  method,  this 
question  of  the  finality  of  Christianity  becomes  doubly 
cogent.  Since  the  days  of  the  Aufkldrung,  and  especially 
during  the  nineteenth  century,  the  conflict  between  the  his- 
torical study  of  religion  and  the  standpoint  which  maintains 
the  finality  of  Christianity  occupies  the  very  center  of  theo- 
logical interest.  Historical  research  ever  tends  in  the  direc- 
tion of  a certain  relativism.  The  historian  does  not  readily 
accept  any  phase  of  thought  or  practice  as  final.  To  him  all  is 
in  a constant  flux.  History  as  such  seems  to  have  no  norm. 
It  speaks  the  language  of  growth,  development,  creativity, 
not  of  finality  or  absoluteness. 

Until  the  nineteenth  century  the  historical  point  of  view 
did  not  come  to  prominence  in  theological  thought.  The  his- 
torical approach  was  until  that  time  quite  subordinated  to, 
if  not  entirely  suppressed  by,  the  dogmatic.  The  nineteenth 
century,  however,  became  the  age  of  historical  research. 
From  one  point  of  view  the  entire  change  which  has  come 
over  Christian  theology  in  the  previous  century  is  the  out- 
come of  the  general  application  of  the  canons  of  historical 
criticism  to  Christianity.  The  study  of  the  non-Christian 
religions  was  begun  in  the  eighteenth  and  came  to  full  de- 
velopment in  the  nineteenth  and  twentieth  centuries.  This 
study  was  greatly  stimulated  and  furthered  by  the  increase 
in  travel  and  intercourse  between  the  nations.  Countries  here- 
tofore closed  to  Western  influence  have  been  thrown  open. 
Also  the  missionary  enterprise  has  been  a powerful  factor 
in  promoting  this  movement. 

This  historical  standpoint  and  method  applied  to  theology 
and  the  scientific  study  of  religion  has  found  its  focal  point 
and  sphere  of  crystallization  especially  in  the  study  of  Com- 


NEW  TESTAMENT  TEACHING 


339 


parative  Religion.  Not  only  the  ethnic  religions  but  also  the 
religion  of  the  Old  Testament  and  Christianity  itself  were 
soon  studied  in  accordance  with  the  same  historical  method 
and  its  canons  of  criticism.  To  all  this  study  of  the  world’s 
religions,  of  which  the  religion  of  the  Old  Testament  is 
held  to  be  one  and  Christianity  another,  there  has,  moreover, 
been  applied  the  hypothesis  of  the  evolutionary  development 
of  all  human  life,  religion  included.  All  religions  on  the  basis 
of  this  hypothesis  are  held  to  represent  various  stages  in  the 
evolutionary  development  of  the  religious  instinct  of  the 
human  race. 

It  is  clear  that  this  genetico-historical  attitude  and  method, 
reinforced  by  the  evolutionary  hypothesis,  as  it  prevails  in 
theological  study  today,  forces  the  question  as  to  the 
uniqueness,  the  finality,  and  absoluteness  of  Christianity 
upon  us  as  intelligent  twentieth  century  Christians.  In  this 
way  there  arises  what  Ernst  Troeltsch  has  characterized  as 
the  “fundamental  conflict  between  the  spirit  of  critical 
skepticism  generated  by  the  ceaseless  flux  and  manifold  con- 
tradictions within  the  sphere  of  history  and  the  demand  of 
the  religious  consciousness  for  certainty,  for  unity,  and  for 
peace.”1  Can  any  historical  phase  of  religion  possess  finality? 
Can  history  offer  a norm,  a standard  of  religious  truth  and 
value?  Can  the  absolute  enter  into  history? 

How  deeply  this  question  cuts  into  our  Christian  faith  and 
practice  is  apparent.  If  we  accept  the  standpoint  that  Chris- 
tianity is  not  absolute,  is  not  the  final  religion,  but  is  to  be 
viewed  as  essentially  on  a par  with  all  other  religions  even 
though  considered  the  most  highly  developed  among  them, 
the  implications  are  far-reaching  both  for  theological  truth 
and  for  Christian  conduct.  If  Christianity  be  not  final,  Christ 
is  at  best  one  of  many  religious  prophets  who  have  emerged 
in  the  religious  evolution  of  the  race.  He  may  be  ever  so 
great  a religious  teacher,  He  is  not  the  divine  Saviour  as 
claimed  by  the  New  Testament.  Moreover,  if  Christianity 


1 Ernst  Troeltsch,  Christian  Thought,  London,  1923,  p.  8. 


340 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


be  not  absolute  and  final  as  the  true  and  saving  faith  re- 
vealed by  God,  the  nerve  of  the  motive  for  the  Christian  mis- 
sionary enterprise  is  cut.  According  to  the  Great  Commission 
Christianity  is  intended  to  supersede  all  other  religions 
because  it  is  the  only  true  and  saving  religion.  But  if  the  dif- 
ference between  Christianity  and  the  ethnic  faiths  is  only  a 
relative  one,  the  whole  missionary  enterprise  is  undermined 
or,  if  still  carried  on,  it  is  placed  on  a radically  different 
basis  and  inspired  by  an  entirely  new  motive.  The  only 
motive  left  in  that  case  for  the  Christianizing  of  the  ethnic 
peoples  is  the  desire  to  impart  a higher  stage  of  civilization 
to  less  developed  races.  It  is  not  surprising  that  those  non- 
Christian  races  who  enjoy  a relatively  high  and  possibly 
ancient  type  of  civilization  raise  the  challenging  question  to 
missionary  representatives  of  the  gospel  of  a liberalized 
Christianity,  why  these  should  seek  to  impose  their  civiliza- 
tion upon  them.  It  would  appear  that  the  cultured  pagans 
easily  have  the  better  of  the  argument  in  this  matter. , 

The  need  of  the  hour  to  set  forth  the  meaning  and  impli- 
cations of  the  finality  of  the  Christian  religion  and  -to  main- 
tain it  over  against  various  hostile  forces  both  within  and 
without  the  bounds  of  historic  Christianity  is  great  indeed. 
Here  is  a basic  apologetic  task  for  the  Christian  theologian. 
Professor  Mackenzie’s  words  written  fifteen  years  ago  are 
becoming  more  true  and  significant  every  day: 

No  need  of  the  hour  is  greater  than  that  many  attempts  should  be 
made  to  define  or  describe  the  Christian  Faith  as  it  confronts  the  great 
world  with  its  claims  and  promises,  its  sense  of  universal  authority,  its 
assertion  that  -in  and  through  its  own  nature  as  a historical  Fact  and 
its  own  message  as  a Divine  Fact,  the  will  of  God  is  dealing  with  the 
destiny  of  mankind.  For  the  sake  of  the  missionaries  abroad  and  the 
ministry  in  Christian  lands,  for  the  sake  of  all  who  are  called  upon  to 
support  and  promote  in  any  way  the  work  of  converting  the  world  to 
this  one  Faith,  these  attempts  are  of  essential  importance.  We  must  be 
sure  that  our  task  is  not  the  offspring  of  blind  prejudice  or  Western 
pride.  We  cannot  go  on  with  it  intelligently  and  earnestly  unless  we  are 
in  our  own  souls  assured,  not  that  Christianity  is  a better  religion  than 
any  other,  but  that  it  is  the  absolute  religion,  the  one  final  way  in  which 
God  himself  is  concerned  with  the  saving  and  perfecting  of  mankind.2 


2 W.  Douglas  Mackenzie,  The  Final  Faith,  New  York,  1912,  Preface. 


NEW  TESTAMENT  TEACHING 


341 


The  problem  of  the  finality  of  Christianity  raises  issues 
which  carry  us  to  the  very  foundations  of  our  philosophical 
and  theological  assumptions.  No  one,  for  instance,  can  ade- 
quately deal  with  this  problem  who  has  no  appreciation  of 
the  philosophical  problem  of  the  relation  between  historical 
fact  and  eternal,  timeless,  truth.  The  scope  of  the  present 
article,  however,  excludes  the  discussion  of  any  such  phase 
of  the  problem.  We  limit  ourselves  to  the  discussion  of  the 
teaching  of  the  New  Testament  on  the  subject.  In  view  of  the 
fact  that  it  is  becoming  increasingly  common  for  many 
Christian  writers  on  the  subject  to  interpret  various  New 
Testament  passages  as  supporting  a conception  of  Christian- 
ity which,  according  to  the  conviction  of  the  present  writer, 
does  violence  to  the  real  character  of  the  Christian  faith, 
the  task  of  interrogating  the  New  Testament  on  this 
question  of  the  finality  of  our  faith  is  anything  but  superflu- 
ous. The  import  and  vialue  of  this  phase  of  the  problem  must 
be  apparent  to  anyone  who  realizes  that  the  final  vindication 
of  Christianity  cannot  be  found  outside  of  Christianity 
itself— its  effects  in  history  and,  especially,  its  authoritative 
sources. 

Throughout  the  New  Testament  the  uniqueness,  the  Ein- 
maligkeit,  and  the  final  character  of  Christ,  His  incarnation 
and  atonement,  are  taught  implicitly  and  explicitly  both. 
This  uniqueness  and  Einmaligkeit  of  God’s  revelation  in 
Jesus  Christ  is  also  implied  in  the  fact  that  Christ  is  pre- 
sented as  the  goal  and  fulfilment  of  all  Old  Testament 
prophecy.  This  lends  the  religion  based  upon  the  New  Testa- 
ment a finality  such  as  the  Old  Testament  religion  did  not 
possess.  Because  of  its  anticipatory  character  the  Old  Testa- 
ment revelation  and  the  religion  based  upon  it,  though  unique 
and  exclusive  as  based  upon  special  supernatural  revelation, 
were  not  final. 

Both  Jesus  and  the  apostles  clearly  taught  the  unique  char- 
acter, the  Einmaligkeit,  the  absoluteness,  the  finality  of  the 
Christian  faith  because  based  upon  the  Christian  revelation. 

Three  crucial  passages  for  the  teaching  of  Christ  on  the 


342 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


subject  are  John  xiv.  6,  John  x.  30,  and  Matthew  xxviii. 
18-20.  In  the  first  passage  Christ  teaches  that  He  is  the  true 
and  only  living  way  to  the  Father.  “I  am  the  way,  and  the 
truth,  and  the  life : no  one  cometh  unto  the  Father  except 
through  me.”  Christ  not  only  has  the  true  knowledge  con- 
cerning the  way,  but  He  is  that  way.  Through  union  with 
Him,  one  is  in  the  way,  knows  the  truth,  and  has  the  life.  All 
this  implies  a unique  and  most  singular  relation  of  Christ  to 
God.  Though  the  prophets  had  spoken  of  the  way,  of  truth, 
and  of  life,  Jesus  is  the  way,  the  truth,  and  the  life. 

Brace  in  his  work,  The  Unknown  God,  tries  to  eviscerate 
this  saying  of  Jesus  in  a fashion  that  seems  to  be  popular  in 
certain  quarters.  He  proposes  that  the  passage,  “No  one 
cometh  unto  the  Father  except  through  me,”  be  interpreted 
to  mean : “No  one  can  come  into  union  with  God  except 
through  the  spirit  in  me,  through  self-sacrifice  and  love.”3 
But,  if  Jesus  meant  to  say  that  “the  way”  was  love,  moral 
character,  as  exemplified  in  Himself,  and  not  Himself  as  a 
unique  divine  being,  the  whole  passage  would  be  an  utterance 
of  the  most  intolerable  kind  of  conceit,  boastfulness,  and 
egotism.  The  use  of  eyed  and  epov  and  their  emphatic  position 
in  the  text  show  what  great  emphasis  Jesus  is  placing  in  this 
passage  on  Himself.  The  following  verses  strengthen  this 
emphasis  upon  the  uniqueness  of  Christ  as  a divine  person. 
As  a unique,  divine  person,  one  with  the  Father,  He  is  the 
only  way  by  which  true  life  may  be  had. 

That  this  oneness  with  the  Father  implies  Jesus’  deity  is 
also  clear  from  another  Johannine  passage.  In  x.  30  Jesus 
says:  “I  and  the  Father  are  one.”  Can  this  apply  to  mere 
spiritual  affinity?  The  meaning  of  the  statement  is  exhibited 
in  the  following  verses.  The  Jews  accuse  him  of  blasphemy, 
claiming  that  with  the  above  words  He  has  made  Himself 
God  (x.  33).  It  should  be  noted  that  Jesus  not  only  does 
not  repudiate  the  inference  made  by  His  enemies  from  His 
words  but  clearly  accepts  the  inference  and  defends  it. 

Another  important  passage  for  the  teaching  of  Jesus  on 

3,C.  Loring  Brace,  The  Unknown  God,  London,  1890,  p.  302,  Note  2. 


NEW  TESTAMENT  TEACHING 


343 


the  subject  of  the  uniqueness  of  the  Christian  revelation  for 
man’s  salvation  is  found  in  Matthew  xxviii.  18-20.  This 
great  final  commission  of  Christ  to  His  disciples  derives  its 
entire  meaning,  force,  and  thrust  from  the  universally  valid 
and  exclusively  saving  efficacy  of  the  gospel  of  Christ.  That 
this  is  the  underlying  assumption  of  the  commission,  so  much 
so  that  it  would  lose  all  its  meaning  apart  from  this  assump- 
tion, is  apparent  upon  a careful  interpretation  of  the 
passage  and  its  context.  It  teaches  that  the  basis  for  this 
commission  is  the  universality  of  Christ’s  dominion.  He  has 
all  authority  in  heaven  and  on  earth.  The  content  of  the 
commission  itself  is  also  shot  through  with  the  assumption 
of  the  universality  of  Christ.  They  must  disciple  all  nations. 
The  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ  is  by  its  very  nature  designed  to 
supersede  all  other  faiths.  Again,  note  the  strain  of  univer- 
sality in  the  guarantee  of  divine  aid  in  the  fulfilment  of  this 
commission.  “I  am  with  you  all  the  days  unto  the  consum- 
mation of  the  age.”  Their  task  to  bring  the  gospel  has  a 
universal  scope,  universal  in  space  (all  nations)  and  in  time 
(all  the  days).  The  universal  significance,  the  universal 
validity,  and  the  universal  need  of  the  gospel  of  salvation  is 
woven  into  the  very  fabric  of  this  last  commission  of  Christ 
to  His  disciples.  Whoever  would  take  Christ  seriously,  mu$t 
take  this  claim  to  universality  seriously. 

Just  as  the  unique  and  final  character  of  the  gospel  of 
Christ  is  presupposed  and  affirmed  in  the  great  commission 
of  Christ  to  His  disciples,  so  it  is  repeatedly  affirmed  in  the 
early  apostolic  preaching.  This  affirmation  is  the  real  point 
of  Peter's  pentecostal  sermon  recorded  in  Acts  ii.  14-36.  The 
same  is  true  of  Peter’s  address  in  Acts  iii.  12-26,  and  like- 
wise of  his  discourse  before  the  sanhedrin  as  recorded  in 
Acts  iv.  8-12. 

A very  strong  and  solemn  declaration  as  to  the  absolute 
uniqueness  and  exclusiveness  of  Christ  as  the  way  of  salva- 
tion is  found  in  the  last-named  discourse.  It  is  Acts  iv.  12: 
“And  in  none  other  is  there  salvation:  for  neither  is  there 
any  other  name  under  heaven,  that  is  given  among  men, 


344 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


wherein  we  must  be  saved.”  One  is  impressed  by  the  strong 
negations  and  the  solemn  emphasis  of  exclusion  throughout 
the  passage.  The  only  God-designed  way  of  salvation  is 
Jesus  Christ. 

Another  significant  utterance  of  Peter  is  that  addressed 
to  Cornelius,  the  Roman,  as  recorded  in  Acts  x.  34-35.  Such 
a passage  as  this  might  on  the  surface  be  taken  to  militate 
against  the  claim  of  absolute  uniqueness  and  finality  for  the 
Christian  gospel.  Peter  is  there  reported  as  making  the  state- 
ment to  Cornelius  that  God  is  no  respecter  of  persons  but 
that  “in  every  nation  he  that  feareth  him,  and  worketh  right- 
eousness, is  acceptable  to  him.”  This  phrase  is  often  super- 
ficially quoted  as  meaning  that  anyone  who,  guided  by  the 
light  of  general  revelation,  is  religious  and  moral,  is  accept- 
able, pleasing  to  God,  just  as  well  as  others  are  who,  guided 
by  the  greater  light  of  special  revelation,  have  the  full  gospel 
of  Christ. 

This  interpretation,  however,  is  a distortion  of  the  mean- 
ing of  the  passage.  What  is  meant  by  “acceptable”  ( SeKTo'9) 
unto  God?  In  every  nation  those  who  fear  God  and  work 
righteousness  are  acceptable  un/to  God  in  what  sense?  A 
careful  exegesis  makes  clear  that  the  acceptability  of  these 
people  refers  to  them  as  candidates  for  the  reception  of  the 
gospel  of  Jesus  Christ.  Peter  is  here  militating  not  against 
the  exclusiveness  of  the  gospel,  he  is  precisely  asserting  the 
exclusiveness  and  absolute  uniqueness  of  that  gospel  by  mili- 
tating against  the  exclusiveness  of  the  Jewish  Christians 
who  held  that  only  Jews  were  entitled  to  the  privileges  of  the 
gospel  of  Jesus.  This  claim  to  exclusiveness  of  the  Jews  had 
to  be  broken  down.  The  great  lesson  that  the  early  apostles 
themselves  had  to  learn  as  they  preached  the  gospel  was  that 
all  special  privileges  of  the  Jews  had  been  cancelled.  The 
Old  Testament  teaching  was  that  outside  of  the  chosen  nation 
there  was  no  salvation,  but  the  gospel  of  Christ  is  not  to  be 
restricted  to  any  one  nation.  It  is  universal  in  its  scope.  It 
must  be  preached  to  all  nations  in  accordance  with  Christ’s 
final  commission.  The  question  in  the  mind  of  the  early 


NEW  TESTAMENT  TEACHING 


345 


Jewish  Christians  was  whether  the  gospel  should  not  be  re- 
stricted to  the  Jews  only. 

Now  what  Peter  asserts  in  the  passage  before  us  must  be 
understood  against  that  background.  He  states  that  the  gos- 
pel is  not  for  the  Jews  only  but  for  all  nations.  This  truth 
was  the  point  of  the  teaching  imparted  to  Peter  by  the  vision 
at  Joppa,  which  vision  immediately  preceded  his  coming  to 
Caesarea  and  is  closely  connected  with  it.  What  God  has 
cleansed,  Peter  should  not  call  unclean  (x.  9-16).  Peter’s 
going  to  Caesarea  is  the  putting  into  practice  of  the  lesson 
learned  from  this  vision.  The  narrative  clearly  links  up  these 
two  events.  Peter  so  explains  the  meaning  of  the  vision  both 
at  Cornelius’  house  (vs.  28)  and  at  Jerusalem  when  later 
he  is  called  to  account  for  what  he  has  done  (xi.  1-18). 

When  Peter  hence  makes  the  statement  that  there  are 
among  the  gentiles  those  that  are  acceptable  to  God,  he  means 
that  they  are  acceptable  candidates  for  the  Christian  church 
to  whom  the  gospel  should  be  preached  as  well  as  to  the 
Jews.  But  what  is  the  meaning  and  purpose  of  the  reference 
to  such  persons  as  fearing  God  and  working  righteousness? 
This  does  not  designate  an  acceptable  ground  for  salvation 
alongside  of  Christ  and  His  redemption,  but  the  fear  of  God 
and  the  working  of  righteousness  are  recognized  as  psycho- 
logically suitable  soil  into  which  the  seed  of  the  gospel  may 
be  cast.  People  who  are  in  earnest  about  their  belief  in  God 
and  who  strive  to  live  a life  acceptable  to  Him,  are  psycho- 
logically especially  fit  to  understand  and  appreciate  the  gospel 
of  Jesus  Christ.  Special  redemptive  revelation  does  not  de- 
stroy  general  revelation  but  is  throughout  based  upon  it. 
The  thought  of  declaring  men  acceptable  to  God  by  reason 
of  their  fear  of  God  and  their  good  works,  just  as  others  are 
acceptable  to  God  by  reason  of  their  faith  in  Jesus  Christ, 
is  hence  foreign  to  this  passage  as  it  is  foreign  to  the  mind 
of  the  apostle  Peter  and  to  the  whole  genius  of  the  New 
Testament. 

That  this  acceptability  to  God  is  simply  acceptability  as 
possible  believers  or  as  candidates  for  the  acceptance  of  the 


346  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

gospel,  is  conclusively  proved  by  the  fact  that  Peter,  after 
having  made  this  statement,  proceeds  to  preach  the  gospel 
of  salvation  in  Christ  to  the  very  people  of  whom  he  has 
made  this  asseveration.  Jesus’  death,  resurrection,  and  great 
commission  constitute  the  content  of  his  message  (x.  36- 
43).  He  baptizes  them  not  because  they  believed  in  God  and 
did  righteousness,  but  because  they  believed  the  gospel  mes- 
sage and  receive  the  Holy  Ghost  (x.  44-48).  The  angel 
told  Cornelius  that  Peter  would  speak  unto  him  “words, 
whereby  thou  shalt  be  saved’’  (xi.  14).  The  company  in  Cor- 
nelius’ house  received  the  Holy  Ghost  as  the  disciples  them- 
selves did  “when  we  believed  on  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ” 
(xi.  17).  And  the  judgment  of  the  conference  at  Jerusalem 
on  this  whole  problem  was : “Then  to  the  Gentiles  also  hath 
God  granted  repentence  unto  life”  (xi.  18).  All  these  state- 
ments clearly  show  how  foreign  to  the  whole  narrative  is 
the  idea  that  the  religious  and  moral  sense  of  the  best  among 
the  non-Christian  nations  can  ever  render  them  acceptable 
to  God  as  such  apart  from  the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ. 

Most  of  the  passages  discussed  so  far  assert  the  uniqueness 
and  finality  of  the  gospel  of  Christ  from  the  standpoint  of 
the  gospel  itself.  There  are  also  a number  of  instructive  New 
Testament  passages  which  approach  the  question  from  the 
angle  of  the  significance  and  the  value  of  the  ethnic  religions 
with  which  early  Christianity  came  into  contact.  A number 
of  Pauline  passages  deal  more  especially  with  this  angle  of 
the  problem,  such  as:  Acts  xiv.  15-17;  Acts  xvii.  22-31; 
Rom.  i.  18-25;  Rom.  ii.  14-15;  Eph.  ii.  11-12.  From  the 
fact  that  these  passages  are  written  from  the  point  of  view 
of  the  appreciation  of  the  ethnic  religions  it  is  not  to  be  con- 
cluded that  Paul  in  any  way  stresses  the  uniqueness  and  final- 
ity of  the  gospel  of  Christ  less  than,  say,  Peter  does,  and 
dwells  rather  on  the  positive  value  of  the  ethnic  faiths  in 
distinction  from  him.  This  is  far  from  being  the  case.  The 
fact  that  Paul  does  at  times  speak  of  the  ethnic  religions 
and  that  in  terms  of  relative  appreciation  is  readily  ac- 
counted for  by  the  fact  that  he,  in  distinction  from  Peter, 


NEW  TESTAMENT  TEACHING 


347 


was  the  great  missionary  to  the  gentiles  and  consequently 
came  into  daily  contact  with  ethnic  religions.  For  the  rest,  the 
evaluation  of  the  ethnic  religions  in  a somewhat  favorable 
light  as  found  in  the  Pauline  passages  in  Acts  is  in  perfect 
harmony  with  the  position  maintained  throughout  the  New 
Testament,  Paul’s  writings  and  statements  included,  as  to 
the  uniqueness  and  absoluteness  of  the  gospel  of  Christ. 

Acts  xiv.  15-17  is  one  of  the  New  Testament  passages  in 
which  we  have  a significant  positive  evaluation  of  the 
heathen  religions  as  given  by  Paul,  the  first  great  missionary 
of  our  faith.  A careful  analysis  of  the  passage  shows  it  to 
contain  the  following  teaching  on  the  subject.  (1)  There  is 
a revelation  of  God's  goodness  to  all  nations.  “He  left  not 
himself  without  witness,  doing  good.”  (2)  This  revelation 
imparts  natural  good,  such  as  rains,  fertility,  food,  and  glad- 
ness. (3)  There  is  another,  a more  restricted  or  special,  reve- 
lation, which  until  the  coming  of  Christ  was  not  offered  to 
these  nations.  God  “in  the  generations  gone  by  suffered  all 
the  nations  to  walk  in  their  own  ways.”  (4)  The  content  of 
this  special  revelation  apparently  is  the  gospel  of  Christ 
which  demands  repentence.  “We  bring  you  good  tidings  that 
you  should  turn  from  these  vain  things.”  (5)  This  special 
revelation  and  its  demand  is  apparently  the  thing  that  mat- 
ters in  the  estimation  of  Paul,  whereas  the  truth  of  the 
general  revelation  of  God  to  all  men  in  nature  is  stated  only 
as  a concession  and  is  made  to  serve  merely  as  a connecting 
link  for  his  gospel  message. 

Though  God  has  remarkably  revealed  Himself  to  all  na- 
tions in  nature,  the  passage  by  no  means  implies  that  these 
nations  therein  have  a true  and  adequate  knowledge  of  God. 
On  the  contrary,  it  is  clearly  stated  that  these  heathen,  who 
enjoyed  God's  revelation  in  nature,  were  idolaters  and 
needed  to  “turn  from  these  vain  things  to  the  living  God.” 
That  in  this  passage  Paul  says  more  of  God’s  general  revela- 
tion than  of  the  special  is  readily  accounted  for  from  the  situ- 
ation . In  speaking  to  these  heathen  he  takes  his  point  of 
departure  in  natural  religion,  proceeding  pedagogically  from 


348  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

the  known  to  the  unknown.  Further,  it  should  be  noted  that 
the  immediate  occasion  for  these  words  was  not  found  in  his 
desire  to  preach  the  gospel  but  in  his  effort  to  restrain  these 
heathen  from  making  sacrifices  to  him  and  Barnabas,  his 
companion.  One  should  also  observe  that  verses  21-23 
the  same  chapter  imply  that  after  this  discourse  based 
chiefly  upon  principles  of  natural  theology  they  gave  these 
Lycaonians  further  information  concerning  the  revealed 
gospel  of  Jesus  Christ. 

Paul’s  address  delivered  to  the  Athenians  on  Mars’  Hill 
is  valuable  for  the  subject  under  consideration  by  reason  of 
its  outspoken  appreciation  of  features  of  Greek  religion. 
The  entire  passage  (Acts  xvii.  22-31)  is  deserving  of  close 
study  for  a true  understanding  of  the  New  Testament  evalu- 
ation of  ethnic  religion. 

The  great  apostle  in  this  address  appreciates  and  takes 
his  point  of  departure  in  the  general  religious  sense  of  the 
Athenians.  It  is  worthy  of  note  that  his  approach  to  the 
pagan  Greek  mind  is  not  first  of  all  one  of  condemnation 
but  one  of  adaptation  and  relative  appreciation.  Though  he 
had  been  provoked  by  their  idolatry  (vs.  16),  he  does  not 
begin  by  denouncing  but  by  appreciating  their  religious  sense. 
The  address  throughout  is  marked  by  caution,  moderation, 
tact.  He  quotes  one  of  their  poets  (vs.  28).  He  takes  his 
point  of  departure  in  the  altar  dedicated  to  the  unknown 
god.  His  terminology  throughout  is  such  as  would  appeal 
to  the  Greek  mind.  He  speaks  well  of  their  religious  sense 
and  links  his  message  to  this  phenomenon  in  the  words : 
“What  therefore  you  unwittingly  worship,  this  I set  forth 
unto  you.”  The  word  for  worship  ( evo-efieire  ) designates 
worship  not  in  malam  but  in  bonam  partem.  Significant  in 
this  connection  is  the  expression : “Men  of  Athens,  I per- 
ceive that  in  all  things  you  are  A?  8eim8cup.ov  earepovs.” 
This  phrase  is  not  to  be  translated  “rather  superstititous,” 
but  “very  religious.”  The  word  means  “divinity-fearing,” 
and  may  be  used  with  a more  favorable  or  a more 
unfavorable  connotation,  as  the  case  may  be.  In  the  favor- 


NEW  TESTAMENT  TEACHING 


349 


able  sense  it  would  be  translated  “religious,”  “god-fearing" ; 
in  the  unfavorable  sense,  “superstitious.”  Paul  would 
hardly  use  the  word  here  with  the  latter  connotation.  It 
would  not  fit  into  the  situation  nor  would  it  be  in  keeping 
with  the  spirit  of  the  rest  of  the  discourse.  Some  hold  that 
by  using  BeiaL8aL/j.ovea-Tepov<;  he  used  a word  with  a neutral 
meaning,  wishing  neither  to  offend  nor  to  compliment  the 
Athenians.  This  is  possible,  but  also  in  that  case  the  trans- 
lation “religious”  would  be  closer  to  the  sense  than  that  of 
“superstitious.”  The  particle  may  be  taken  as  a comparative, 
and  in  that  case  Paul  says  that  he  perceives  they  are  “more 
religious”  (i.e.,  than  the  other  Greeks,  since  Athens  had 
many  temples).  But  also  with  this  rendering  the  translation 
“religious”  would  seem  to  stand. 

The  apostle  teaches  further  in  this  passage  either  by  ex- 
plicit statement  or  by  implication  that  this  religious  sense 
is  rooted  in  the  fact  that  man  is  created  in  the  image  of  God 
and  is  by  virtue  of  this  creation  akin  to  God.  Man  is  the 
“offspring”  of  God,  bearing  the  divine  image.  God  has  made 
man  in  order  that  he  might  seek  after,  worship,  and  glorify 
his  Maker.  Man  is  hence  a being  with  an  ineradicable  reli- 
gious instinct.  There  is  in  him  an  urge  to  seek  after  God, 
“if  haply  they  might  feel  after  him  and  find  him.”  The 
apostle  characterizes  the  relationship  between  God  and  man 
in  which  this  religious  sense  is  rooted  as  one  both  of  trans- 
cendence and  of  immanence.  Paul  had  encountered  two 
distinct  philosophico-religious  groups  in  Athens  (vs.  18),  the 
Epicureans  and  the  Stoics.  The  former  held  to  a distorted 
transcendence  and  the  latter  to  a one-sided  immanence.  Over 
against  this  Paul  sets  forth  the  Biblical  and  theistic  view  of 
God’s  relation  to  His  creatures  as  one  that  is  both  transcen- 
dent and  immanent.  God  is  the  great  Creator,  who  made  the 
world  (vs.  24a).  He  is  Lord  of  heaven  and  earth  (vs.  24b). 
He  is  the  self-sufficient  (vs.  25).  That  same  God,  however, 
is  not  far  from  us.  In  fact,  we  live,  move,  and  exist  in  Him 
(vss.  27b,  28).  The  world  is  accordingly  not  a product  of 
chance  (Epicureans)  nor  of  blind  necessity  (Stoics),  but  of 


350 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


divine  providence  and  design  (vs.  26).  In  this  twofold  rela- 
tionship of  immanence  as  well  as  transcendence  is  rooted 
man’s  religious  sense,  his  search  for  God. 

This  general  religious  sense,  however,  is  also  presented  as 
perverted,  darkened,  and  hence  incapable  of  yielding  true 
and  saving  knowledge  of  God.  Though  these  heathen,  as 
Paul  recognizes,  have  a certain  religious  sense,  this  does  not 
mean  that  they  have  an  adequate  knowledge  of  God.  He 
practically  tells  them  so  in  the  expression,  “what  ye  un- 
wittingly worship”  (vs.  23).  Moreover  he  shows  up  the 
poverty  of  their  image  worship  (vs.  29)  and  points  out 
the  true  nature  of  God  (vss.  24,  25,  29).  Though  Paul  here 
links  his  message  to  the  religious  sense,  the  general  knowl- 
edge of  God,  as  found  in  the  heathen  mind,  the  conception 
of  God  which  he  sets  forth  is  far  above  and  beyond  any- 
thing found  in  the  pagan  mind  (vss.  24-26).  He  does  not 
accept  their  view  of  God  but  corrects  it.  It  would  accord- 
ingly be  a great  mistake  to  suppose  that  by  virtue  of  general 
revelation  the  Greek  pagans  had  the  same  belief  about  God 
that  Paul  had  and  that  they  only  needed  to  have  the  specific 
soteric  teaching  about  Christ  and  His  redemption  brought  to 
them  in  addition.  Not  only  the  true  understanding  of  Christ 
and  the  way  of  salvation,  but  also  the  true  understanding 
of  God  is  had  in  the  light  of  the  New  Testament  revelation 
alone.  The  knowledge  of  God  left  in  the  heathen  mind  after 
the  fall,  though  true  insofar  as  it  witnesses  to  the  existence 
of  God  and  to  certain  of  His  attributes,  is  an  extremely  per- 
verted and  distorted  knowledge,  full  of  error.  That  Paul 
recognizes  an  immanential  relation  subsisting  also  after  the 
fall  between  God  and  man,  does  not  at  all  imply  that  man 
in  his  present  state,  apart  from  supernatural  revelation  and 
regeneration,  could  have  true  and  adequate  knowledge  of 
God.  This  is  also  suggested  by  the  verb  ^njXacpt^aeiav y “grope 
in  the  dark,”  “feel  after,”  indicating  that,  though  God  be  not 
far  from  His  creatures,  yet  they  grope  after  Him  in  their 
attempt  to  find  Him.  The  heathen  are  blinded. 

One  more  important  truth  which  the  apostle  presents  in 


NEW  TESTAMENT  TEACHING 


351 


this  famous  address  on  Areopagus  forms  the  capstone  of  his 
teaching  on  the  relation  of  the  Christian  gospel  to  the  ethnic 
religions.  He  maintains  that  the  only  adequate  and  the 
necessary  revelation  of  Himself  God  has  now  offered  in 
Jesus  Christ.  God  has  clearly  revealed  Himself  apart  from 
His  revelation  in  nature.  This  revelation  is  a message  that  is 
brought  by  men  commissioned  for  that  special  purpose 
cnrcvy/eWei  (vs.  30).  This  revelation  deals  with  sin  and  re- 
pentance (vs.  30).  It  is  a revelation  unto  judgment,  a 
judgment  that  is  coming  and  in  which  Jesus  Christ,  the  same 
Jesus  who  is  risen  from  the  dead,  will  be  the  central  figure. 
The  basis  for  man’s  faith  in  this  coming  messianic  judgment 
lies  in  the  historical  fact  of  Christ’s  resurrection  (vs.  31c). 
ttlcttlv  7 rapaa^cov  nracnv  avacnr)cra<;  avTov  e/e  i >eicp<hv  is  to  be 
translated:  “(God)  having  offered  a guarantee  (of  this  com- 
ing judgment)  (i.e.,  as  an  objective  basis  for  faith  in  this 
coming  judgment)  to  all  by  raising  him  (i.e.,  the  messianic 
judge,  Christ)  from  the  dead.”  From  all  these  elements  it 
appears  that  Paul  speaks  of  a supernatural,  historical  revela- 
tion, not  in  any  sense  to  be  identified  with  God’s  general  rev- 
elation in  nature  and  man.  And  this  is  the  revelation  that  is 
all-important.  It  must  be  brought  to  all  men  everywhere 
(vs.  30). 

The  question  naturally  suggests  itself  why  the  content  of 
Paul’s  message  in  this  passage  is  so  predominantly  of  the 
natural  theology  type  and  contains  so  little  that  is  explicit 
concerning  Christ,  His  incarnation,  death,  and  resurrection, 
and  concerning  sin,  repentance,  and  salvation.  Apart  from 
the  consideration  mentioned  above,  that  Paul  adapts  himself 
to  his  audience,  it  will  materially  aid  us  in  answering  this 
question  to  remember  that  in  this  address  of  Paul  on  Mars’ 
Hill  we  have  undoubtedly  only  the  first  part  of  his  proposed 
message  to  the  Athenians.  Apparently  his  address  was  cut 
short.  He  was  interrupted.  Verse  32  informs  us  that  when  he 
mentioned  the  subject  of  the  resurrection  from  the  dead, 
some  scoffed,  and  others  said  that  they  would  hear  him  again. 
This  can  mean  nothing  else  but  that  Paul  never  completed 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


his  proposed  address.  Having  already  spoken  of  the  truths 
of  general  revelation  and  having  come  to  the  messianic 
judgment,  he  was  ready  to  take  up  the  more  specific  positive 
elements  of  the  New  Testament  gospel.  But  apparently  he 
did  not  get  beyond  the  messianic  judgment.  It  seems  to  be 
contrary  to  sound  interpretation  of  this  passage  to  suppose 
that  what  we  have  in  the  verses  22-31  gives  the  complete 
message  (or  even  a complete  synopsis  of  the  message)  that 
Paul  would  have  delivered  had  he  been  allowed  the  oppor- 
tunity to  complete  his  address. 

After  this  discussion  of  the  Pauline  teaching  as  found  in 
the  book  of  Acts  on  the  subject  of  Christianity’s  finality 
and  uniqueness,  we  can  dismiss  the  discussion  of  the  Pauline 
epistles  on  the  subject  briefly.  The  entire  structure  of  the 
Pauline  type  of  New  Testament  teaching  rests  upon  the  great 
assumption  of  the  absolute  finality  of  the  gospel  of  Christ. 
In  1 Cor.  xv.  the  force  of  the  whole  argument  establishing 
the  certainty  of  the  (future)  resurrection  of  the  believers 
from  the  indiibitability  of  the  fact  of  the  (past)  resurrection 
of  Jesus  Christ,  rests  upon  the  absolute  uniqueness  and  the 
universal  significance  and  efficacy  of  this  great  redemptive 
event : Christ’s  resurrection.  This  is  also  the  presupposition 
of  the  cosmical  significance  of  Christ  as  set  forth  in  Colos- 
sians  and  Ephesians.  For  it  should  be  remembered  that  this 
cosmical  Christ  in  Paul’s  epistles  is  never  viewed  apart  from 
the  redeeming,  the  soteric  Christ. 

Especially  the  opening  chapters  of  Romans  offer  us  a 
definite  conception  of  the  finality  of  Christianity  as  con- 
tained in  the  Pauline  epistles.  The  teaching  there  may  be 
briefly  summarized  in  the  following  statements.  There  is  a 
revelation  of  God  to  all  mankind  (i.  19,  20,  21a).  This  gen- 
eral revelation  is  expressed  both  in  nature  (i.e.,  the  physical 
world)  and  in  man’s  moral  consciousness  (i.  19-20;  ii.  14- 
15).  As  such  it  exhibits  God  in  His  divine  power  and  in  His 
holiness,  the  power  to  be  adored  by  man,  the  divine  holy 
will  to  be  obeyed.  This  general  revelation  man,  by  reason  of 
his  corruption,  not  only  cannot  read  properly,  but  he  per- 


NEW  TESTAMENT  TEACHING 


353 


verts  it  (i.  21-23,  25a,  18c).  Mankind  under  this  general 
revelation,  though  morally  accountable  (“without  excuse”), 
is  miserable  and  without  hope.  The  divine  displeasure  rests 
upon  him.  Man’s  moral  deterioration  is  the  result  of  this 
(i.  20c,  18a,  24-27;  cf.  Eph.  ii.  11-12).  This  condition  ren- 
ders another  and  more  adequate  revelation  necessary,  which 
revelation  is  found  in  Jesus  Christ  (i.  16-17 ; ii.  4;  iii.  21-26). 
In  the  pre-Christian  era  the  Jew  enjoyed  God’s  special  re- 
demptive revelation  (iii.  1-2). 

From  the  discussion  of  these  New  Testament  passages 
there  emerges  a dear  and  definite  teaching  concerning  the 
finality  of  the  Christian  revelation  and  the  relative  truth 
and  value  contained  in  the  ethnic  religions.  Let  us  summar- 
ize this  teaching  in  the  following  propositions : 

All  races  and  all  men  are  religious. 

All  religions  are  the  outcome  of  and  are  based  upon  divine 
revelation,  but  not  all  in  the  same  sense  nor  in  the  same 
degree. 

There  is  a general  revelation,  rooted  in  the  divine-human 
relationship  of  creation,  which  all  human  beings  as  bearers 
of  the  divine  image  share,  and  which  underlies  all  religions. 

This  general  revelation  has  become  impaired  and  distorted 
owing  to  man’s  fall  into  sin,  so  that  his  conception  of  God, 
of  divine  things,  and  of  human  duty  and  happiness,  though 
not  lost,  has  become  impaired,  distorted,  full  of  error,  and 
in  its  practical  religious  and  moral  expression  mingled  with 
sin. 

The  ethnic  (or,  non-Christian)  religions  are  based  upon 
this  impaired  and  distorted  general  revelation,  and  as  a con- 
sequence, though  man’s  innate  search  for  God  comes  to  ex- 
pression in  them,  and  though  they  may  contain  elements  of 
relative  truth  and  goodness,  they  are  fundamentally  neither 
true  nor  satisfying  (i.e.,  saving)  but  false. 

Apart  from  these  ethnic  religions,  essentially  false,  there  is 
today  and  there  ever  has  been  the  true  religion,  based  upon 
that  special  supernatural,  divine  revelation  which  super- 
vened upon  the  general  revelation  distorted  and  impaired  by 
man’s  fall  into  sin. 


354 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


By  reason  of  the  aibnormalcy  of  man’s  present  state  (in 
consequence  of  the  fall)  this  special  revelation  bears  neces- 
sarily a restorative  and  redemptive  character. 

This  special,  redemptive,  supernatural  revelation  has 
passed  through  a progressive  historical  development  in  the 
Old  Testament  dispensation,  a development  having  its  goal 
and  culmination  in  the  incarnation  and  the  atonement  of 
Christ ; the  Old  Testament  phase  of  this  history  of  revelation 
bears  hence  in  relation  to  Christ  and  Christianity  a prelimi- 
nary, preparatory,  anticipatory,  and  provisional  character. 

The  revelation  of  God  in  the  person  and  the  work  of 
Jesus  Christ  was  necessarily  unique,  einmalig,  and  final, 
by  reason  of  the  fact  that  in  Jesus  Christ  we  have  God  be- 
come man  for  the  supernatural  redemption  of  the  race.  His 
person  and  His  work,  His  teaching,  His  life,  His  death, 
and  His  resurrection — these,  by  reason  of  His  deity  and 
His  perfect  humanity,  accomplished  completely,  finally,  and 
once  for  all  the  redemption  of  man  according  to  the  divine 
purpose  and  promise. 

Whenever  this  special,  supernatural,  redemptive  revela- 
tion, objectively  realized  in  Jesus  Christ,  His  person  and  His 
work,  is  through  faith  subjectively  appropriated  by  anyone, 
he  enjoys  the  divine  forgiveness  of  his  sins  and  is  restored 
to  true  knowledge  of  and  fellowship  with  God  through  one- 
ness with  Christ;  all  of  which  is  contingent  upon  the  divine 
supernatural  act  of  regeneration.  Such  a one  is  a believer,  a 
true  Christian.  The  company  of  such  believers  constitutes 
the  Christian  Church,  and  their  Christ-centered  religion  is 
Christianity. 

Christianity  then  is  the  one  true,  final,  and  absolute  reli- 
gion because  it  is  rooted  in,  derives  its  meaning  from,  and  is 
inspired  by  the  unique,  supernatural,  einmalig,  redemptive 
revelation  of  God  in  Jesus  Christ,  His  person  and  His  work, 
His  incarnation,  atonement,  and  resurrection.  The  unique- 
ness, Einmalig keit,  finality,  and  absoluteness  of  Jesus  Christ 
and  His  redemption  impart  to  Christianity  its  unique,  ein- 
malig, final,  and  absolute  character. 

Grand  Rapids,  Mich.  Clarence  Bouma. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  REGENSBURG  BOOK 

The  Regensburg  Book,  so-called  because  it  was  first  made 
public  at  the  Diet  of  Regensburg,  1541,  is  one  of  the  most 
important  compromises  in  the  history  of  the  Christian 
Church  and  yet  its  origin  has  always  been  clouded  in  mystery. 
This  mystery  is  no  longer  necessary,  for  within  recent  years 
original  documents  have  been  published  which  make  it  quite 
clear  by  whom  the  book  was  written,  and  under  what  circum- 
stances. 

In  order  to  understand  the  importance  of  the  Regensburg 
Book,  it  is  necessary  to  review  briefly  the  background  of  the 
German  Reformation  out  of  which  it  came.  When  the  new 
emperor,  Charles  V,  came  to  the  throne  in  1520,  he  faced  a 
revolt  in  the  church  so  formidable  that  it  could  not  be  ignored 
like  most  of  the  religious  revolts  of  the  preceding  centuries. 
Something  had  to  be  done.  Religious  dissension  was  threaten- 
ing the  political  unity  of  Germany.  France,  the  Turks,  and 
other  enemies  were  advancing  and  Charles  needed  all  the 
help  which  a united  empire  might  afford  him  to  resist  them. 
Consequently,  he  resorted  to  drastic  means  to  suppress  the 
Lutheran  revolt.  First,  he  tried  the  method  of  force  at  the 
Diet  of  Worms,  1521 ; but  force  failed.  The  central  authority 
was  too  weak,  the  Lutherans  were  too  strong,  and  the  en- 
emies of  the  emperor  kept  him  too  busy  outside  the  empire. 
When  the  second  opportunity  to  deal  with  the  problem  came 
at  the  Diet  of  Augsburg,  1530,  Charles  added  to  force 
another  solution;  conviction.  He  commanded  the  Protestants 
to  draw  up  a statement  of  their  beliefs,  and  then  had  it  offi- 
cially refuted.  But  the  rebels  refused  to  be  convinced.  Al- 
though threats  were  added  to  arguments,  they  became  more 
determined  than  ever,  and  Germany  was  divided  and  weak- 
ened by  civil  strife. 

By  1538  the  situation  for  Charles  and  the  Catholics  had 
become  desperate.  The  Protestants,  increasing  rapidly  in 
numbers,  had  organized  the  powerful  Smalkald  League.  In 
1534  they  had  reconquered  the  duchy  of  Wiirttemberg,  and 


356  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

restored  it  to  Ulrich,  a rapacious  noble,  who  robbed  the 
church  under  the  cloak  of  religious  reform.  Duke  George  of 
Saxony  could  not  live  many  weeks  longer,  and  was  sure  to  be 
followed  by  his  Protestant  brother  Henry.  The  Turks  were 
threatening  another  invasion.  Further  attempts  at  force, 
therefore,  would  mean  war,  and  worse  than  that,  war  against 
a superior  foe.  The  Lutherans  had  developed  a well- 
established  theology  which  they  refused  to  desert.  Conse- 
quently there  remained  only  one  solution  for  the  emperor, 
compromise;  and  this  solution  he  decided  to  employ,  still 
planning,  however,  to  resort  to  force  after  he  had  weakened 
the  Smalkald  League  by  compromise  and  trickery. 

Several  reasons  made  it  a good  time  for  compromise,  in  ad- 
dition to  the  fact  that  Charles  was  too  weak  to  do  anything 
else.  The  nationalists  wanted  peace,  for  only  peace  would 
keep  Germany  united  and  enable  her  to  achieve  nationalistic 
power.  The  nobles  and  the  merchants  had  all  kinds  of  selfish 
interests  which  made  them  quite  ready  to  welcome  a cheaper 
means  than  war  of  retaining  their  religious  preferences. 
Among  the  clergy  on  both  sides  there  was  a numerous  body 
of  moderates  who  did  not  sympathize  with  the  extremists 
and  were  willing  to  make  peace  by  half-way  measures.  To 
these  moderates  peace  was  an  end  desirable  in  itself,  for  it 
meant  a legal  security  under  cover  of  which  gains  already 
made  might  be  consolidated.  Many  Protestant  clergymen  saw 
that  progress  must  be  gradual,  and  the  reformers  should 
be  content  with  half  the  pie  rather  than  lose  it  by  insisting 
upon  having  the  whole.  Moreover,  there  were  two  sides  to 
this  question  of  reform,  and  much  injury  had  been  wrought 
by  going  too  fast  and  too  far,  as,  for  instance,  in  the  matter 
of  the  confiscation  of  ecclesiastical  property.  Consequently, 
they  welcomed  peaceful  overtures  from  the  emperor,  even 
though  they  did  not  fully  trust  him. 

The  first  efforts  at  compromise  were  made  not  by  Charles, 
but  by  the  moderates  in  the  Catholic  party.  Duke  George  of 
Saxony,  feeling  the  hand  of  death  laid  upon  him,  sought,  by 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  REGENSBURG  BOOK 


357 


this  means  to  mitigate  the  loss  to  his  side  which  would  come 
when  his  Protestant  brother  Henry  would  inherit  the  ducal 
throne.  Througlh  his  chancellor  George  von  Carlowitz  he 
proposed  a conference  at  Leipzig,  where,  on  January  2,  1539, 
he  met  Melanchthon  and  Briick  from  electoral  Saxony,  Bucer 
of  Strasbourg  and  Feige  from  Hesse,  and  laid  before  them  a 
drastic  program  by  which  Catholics  and  Protestants  might 
lay  aside  their  differences.  No  agreement  was  reached,  but 
the  olive  branch  was  waved,  thus  opening  a new  period  in  the 
German  Reformation  when  a series  of  religious  colloquies 
attempted  the  daring,  but  impossible  feat  of  reuniting  Pro- 
testants and  Catholics.1  These  colloquies  were  not  insignifi- 
cant failures,  as  often  pictured  by  historians,  but  vitally  im- 
portant to  the  future  of  Germany,  for  by  demonstrating  the 
impossibility  of  peace,  by  failing  to  achieve  a compromise, 
they  decided  that  the  next  century  of  German  history  was  to 
be  a century  of  strife,  not  of  nationalistic  growth.  When 
there  seemed  to  be  so  many  reasons  why  they  should  succeed, 
when  the  possibility  of  heaiing  the  schism  was  brightest, 
these  colloquies  marked  both  the  high  water  mark  of  con- 
ciliation and  also  its  end. 

The  conference  at  Leipzig  was  followed  by  another  and 
larger  one  in  the  spring  of  1539  at  Frankfort.  There  the 
Protestants  suffered  a serious  diplomatic  defeat,  but  secured 
the  promise  of  another  colloquy.®  This  took  place  by  the  call 

1 On  these  special  features  of  the  Leipzig  Conference  see  the  follow- 
ing authorities : M.  Lenz,  Bricfwechsel  Landgraf  Philipps  des  Gross- 
miithigen  von  Hessen  mil  Bucer,  I,  53,  et  ah;  Corpus  Ref  or  mat  0 rum, 
III,  621-622,  624,  628;  E.  L.  Enders,  Dr.  Martin  Luther’s  Bricfwechsel, 
XIII,  269,  note;  M.  Bucer,  Wider  Auff richtigung  der  Messen,  preface; 
M.  Bucer,  Ein  Christlich  Bedenken. 

2 O.  Meinardus,  “Die  Verhandlungen  des  Schmalkaldischen  Bundes 
Frankfurt  1539,”  F orschungen  zur  dcutschcn  Geschichte,  1882,  XXII, 
607;  “Thesaurus  Baumianus,”  (a  manuscript  collection  in  the  Biblio- 
tlieque  universitaire  et  regionale  de  Strasbourg ),  XII,  23,  32,  45;  A. 
Blatter,  Die  Thdtigkeit  M elanchthons  bei  den  Unionsversuchen,  1539- 
1541-  Bern,  1899,  P-  9;  Enders,  XII,  114,  134-137;  Corpus  Refomnatorum, 
III,  650,  688-691,  698;  T.  Schiess,  Bricfwechsel  der  Briider  Ambrosius 
und  Thomas  Blaurer  1309-1568,  Freiburg  i.  Br.,  1908,  1909,  1912,  II,  22, 


358 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


of  the  emperor  at  Hagenau  in  June  and  July,  1540.  A dead- 
lock occurred  even  before  the  colloquy  was  opened,  but  the 
recess  with  which  it  closed  called  for  yet  another  meeting  of 
the  same  kind  at  Worms  on  October  28,  1540.3 

The  colloquy  of  Worms  was  a dismal  failure  so  far  as 
achieving  a religious  compromise  was  concerned.  On  Novem- 
ber 25,  the  imperial  minister  Granvelle  opened  it  with  a 
speech  in  which  he  called  the  Protestants  seditious.4  On  the 
next  day  the  presidents  submitted  the  mode  of  procedure,3 
but  with  this  progress  ceased,  and  for  week  after  week  the 
papal  legate  caused  delay  after  delay.6  It  was  at  this  juncture, 
when  all  hope  of  a compromise  through  official  action  was 
fast  fading  away;  when  something  drastic  had  to  be  done, 
that  the  Regensburg  Book  had  its  birth.  It  arose  chiefly  out 
of  the  efforts  of  two  leaders  of  the  moderate  party:  John 
Gropper,  the  representative  of  Elector-Archbishop  Hermann 
von  Wied  of  Cologne,  and  Martin  Bucer,  the  representative 
of  the  imperial  city  of  Strasbourg. 

Bucer  and  Gropper  had  first  met  at  Hagenau  in  the  pre- 
ceding July,  and  had  exchanged  opinions  on  theology.7  At 
Worms  they  continued  their  discussions  on  how  concord  and 
a reformation  of  the  entire  church  might  best  be  obtained. 
When  the  official  colloquy  had  dragged  on  for  weeks  without 
even  opening  a discussion  of  theology,  Gropper  and  the  im- 
perial secretary  Gerhard  Veltwyck  suggested  to  Granvelle 
that  the  deadlock  was  unbreakable  and  the  only  way  to  ac- 
complish anything  was  a private  colloquy  between  themselves 
representing  the  Catholics,  and  Bucer  and  Capito,  represent- 

24;  F.  Hortleder,  Von  den  Ursachen  des  Teutschen  Kriegs,  1546-1547, 
I,  cap.  XXXII;  M.  Bucer,  Vom  tag  su  Hagenaw,  1540. 

3 M.  Bucer,  Von  den  einigen  rechten  wege,  1545,  p.  38;  M.  Bucer, 
Vom  tag  su  Hagenaw,  Liij ; E.  Doumergue,  Calvin,  II,  605;  Lenz,  I,  222. 

4 Lenz,  I,  244.  The  whole  speech  is  printed  in  LePlat,  Monumentorum 
ad  Historiam  Concilii  Tridcntini  . . . Collectio,  II,  683. 

5 J.  G.  Walch,  Dr.  Martin  Luther’s  Samnitliche  Schriften,  igoi,  XVII, 
417. 

6 Kurtz,  A History  of  the  Christian  Church,  II,  89. 

7 M.  Bucer,  Von  den  einigen,  56-62. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  REGENSBURG  BOOK 


359 


ing  the  Protestants.8  On  Monday,  December  13,  Granvelle 
summoned  Bucer  and  his  colleague  Capito  from  Strasbourg 
to  an  interview,9  and  on  the  next  day  he  officially  proposed 
that  Bucer,  Capito,  Gropper  and  Veltwyck  should  engage  in 
a secret  colloquy  to  attain  the  religious  agreement  which  it 
was  evident  the  public  colloquy  would  not.  Granvelle  himself 
wanted  it  secret  because  many  of  the  papists  were  so  intent 
upon  war  that  they  would  leave  if  they  knew  peaceful  nego- 
tiations were  carried  on  which  might  be  successful.10  The 
whole  proposition  was  a complete  surprise  to  Bucer  and 
Capito.  They  hesitated  to  consent,  for  a successful  secret  col- 
loquy would  make  the  public  colloquy  a mere  farce,  and  they 
were  unwilling  to  assume  so  much  authority.  Before  giving 
any  decision,  they  secured  a solemn  promise  from  Granvelle 
that  the  secret  colloquy  would  in  no  way  interfere  with  the 
public  colloquy,  or  undermine  its  authority,  and  that  their  par- 
ticipation would  be  kept  absolutely  secret.11  Next  the  two  re- 


8 M.  Bucer,  Von  den  einigen,  65;  M.  Bucer,  De  Concilio  et  legitime, 
1545,  p.  2. 

9 Lenz,  I,  269. 

10  Ibid.,  I,  274. 

11  M.  Bucer,  Von  den  einigen,  66;  M.  Bucer,  De  Concilio  et  legitime,  2. 
As  a result  of  an  attempt  by  Bucer  to  lead  a reformation  of  the  diocese 
of  Cologne  in  1542-1543,  he  and  Gropper  became  enemies  and  engaged  in 
a polemic  in  which  Gropper  accused  Bucer  of  having  proposed  the  secret 
colloquy  at  Worms.  Bucer  replied  that  he  and  Capito  were  invited  to  it 
by  Gropper  and  Veltwyck  (M.  Bucer,  De  Concilio  et  legitime,  2;  H. 
Schaefer,  De  Libri  Ratisbonensis  Origine,  1870,  p.  25.  This  rare  disserta- 
tion by  Schaefer  is  in  the  possession  of  Princeton  Theological  Seminary 
Library).  Gulick’s  assertion  that  there  is  not  enough  evidence  to  tell 
which  was  right  is  unreliable,  for  Gulick  has  made  no  use  of  the  most 
important  evidence  in  the  case,  the  letters  published  by  Lenz  (W.  v. 
Gulick,  Johannes  Gropper,  1906,  70-73;  Lenz,  1,269,  ff.).  Bucer’s  polemics, 
written  for  the  public  years  afterward  in  the  heat  of  controversy  might 
lie  open  to  the  charge  of  partiality,  but  his  letters,  written  before  there 
was  any  thought  of  strife,  and  to  the  landgrave,  whom  he  had  no  desire 
to  deceive,  are  the  most  reliable  evidence  available.  These  letters  show 
plainly  that  the  invitation  was  issued  by  Granvelle  and  Veltwyck  at 
Gropper’s  instigation,  and  that  Bucer  was  heartily  in  sympathy  with  the 
idea.  Three  considerations  make  Bucer’s  explanation  of  the  origin  of  the 
colloquy  the  only  possible  correct  one.  First,  the  secret  colloquy  was 


360 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


formers  consulted  with  Chancellor  Feige  of  Hesse,  and 
James  Sturm,  the  magisterial  representative  of  Strasbourg.12 
The  statesmen  were  not  favorably  impressed,  for,  in  spite  of 
Granvelle’s  assurances,  they  believed  that  the  success  of  such 
a secret  colloquy  would  mean  the  failure  of  the  public  one. 
Bucer  and  Capito,  they  thought,  had  no  right  to  take  into 
their  own  hands  the  formulation  of  a theological  agreement, 
and  for  that  reason  afone  it  would  be  unacceptable  to  the 
Protestants.  Whatever  its  contents,  they  would  be  so  insulted 
by  such  a procedure  that  they  would  oppose  it.  Bucer  was  dis- 
pleased by  their  attitude,  for  the  proposal  was  an  exceedingly 
attractive  one  to  him.  He  hated  delays  and  felt  perfectly  equal 
to  the  task.  Justifiably  confident  that  the  public  colloquy 
would  not  amount  to  anything,  and  conscientiously  convinced 
that  he  would  be  rendering  a service  to  the  cause  of  the  Ref- 
ormation, he  decided  to  consent.13 

Early  the  next  morning,  at  six  o’clock,  Bucer  went  to 
Granvelle.  The  wily  minister  repeated  the  threats  of  war  with 
which  the  emperor  had  gained  so  much  ever  since  his  corona- 
tion, and  promised  again  that  he  would  not  let  the  secret 
colloquy  be  an  injury  in  any  way  either  to  the  public  colloquy, 
or  to  the  Protestant  states,  or  to  Bucer  and  Capito  personally. 

opposed  to  his  policy  of  a public  colloquy.  Second,  it  is  doubtful  if  any 
suggestion  offered  by  Bucer  to  Granvelle  would  have  been  favorably 
received  ( cf . T.  Wiedemann,  Dr.  Johann  Eck,  1865,  p.  312).  Hergen- 
rother  states  erroneously  that  the  secret  colloquy  was  arranged  by  the 
landgrave,  as  will  be  shown  below  (Hergenrother,  Handbuch  der  allge- 
meine  Kirchengeschichte,  III,  438).  Third,  in  every  case,  where  there  is 
no  doubt  as  to  what  happened  during  the  negotiations,  the  Catholics  took 
the  initiative. 

12  M.  Bucer,  Von  den  einigen,  65;  M.  Bucer,  De  Concilio  et  legitime,  2. 
Gropper  joined  in  the  secret  colloquy  because  his  lord,  the  Archbishop 
of  Cologne  had  already  begun  a reformation  of  his  diocese  in  which 
Gropper  was  the  leader.  Neither  of  them  wanted  this  enterprise  to  go  so 
far  as  a break  with  the  church,  and  so  they  resorted  to  the  plan  of  a 
compromise.  If  they  could  gain  such  a compromise,  sanctioned  by  the 
diet,  then  they  could  retain  the  reforms  already  instituted  and  yet  occupy 
a legal  position.  Otherwise  they  would  have  to  retrench  or  else  separate 
from  the  Roman  Catholic  Church  (Schaefer,  40,  ff.). 

13  Lenz,  I,  274;  cf.  ibid.,  I,  244,  256,  517;  Blatter,  68. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  REGENSBURG  BOOK  361 

Bucer  in  reply  assured  him  that  the  Protestants  did  not  seek 
strife  but  only  a reformation.  Though  they  would  make  no 
concessions  on  the  chief  doctrines,  they  would  satisfactorily 
justify  them,  not  only  according  to  the  Bible,  but  also  ac- 
cording to  the  teaching  of  the  Apostolic  Church  and  the 
Fathers.  He  explained  his  attitude  on  ecclesiastical  property, 
and  suggested,  since  the  Protestants  insisted  on  a reforma- 
tion and  the  pope  absolutely  refused  it,  that  the  emperor 
should  take  the  lead.  Though  manifestly  impossible,  it  was 
not  such  a foolish  suggestion  as  it  appeared,  for  why  should 
the  emperor  desire  a secret  colloquy  to  formulate  a doctrinal 
compromise  unless  he  wished  to  conduct  a reformation.  The 
pope  refused  to  undertake  it,  the  Protestants  threatened  to 
do  it  by  revolution,  and  the  only  other  peaceful  method  was 
by  imperial  leadership.  The  difficulty,  as  Granvelle  pointed 
out,  was  that  in  conducting  a reformation  Charles  would 
arouse  the  antagonism  of  the  Catholic  princes,  and  bring 
upon  the  movement  the  suspicion  of  dynastic  ambitions. 
Though  the  emperor  could  not  lead  a reformation  publicly, 
something  could  be  done  privately,  and  for  this  reason,  Gran- 
velle said,  a secret  colloquy  was  desired.  Bucer  was  thor- 
oughly aware  that  the  emperor  and  minister  were  only  seek- 
ing to  establish  their  power,  but  in  order  to  gain  religious 
unity  it  was  worth  while  to  run  the  risk,  and  he  consented  to 
join  in  the  colloquy.14 

The  same  day  a trial  conference  was  held,  and  a partial 
agreement  reached.  The  public  colloquy,  on  the  other  hand, 
went  from  bad  to  worse.  The  desirable  Frankfort  mode  of 
procedure,  demanded  by  the  majority,  was  blocked  by  a 
minority  of  reactionaries.  The  latter  group  was  so  bitter  and 
disagreeable  that  even  Roman  Catholics  complained.  An  at- 
tempt to  have  the  Protestant  preachers  dismissed  was  only 
thwarted  by  Granvelle’s  refusal  to  permit  it.  News  of  a per- 
secution, not  of  common  people,  but  of  noblemen,  in  Besan- 
qon,  gave  a touch  of  reality  to  the  rumors  of  war.  It  was  not 


14  Lenz,  I,  275-276. 


362 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


strange,  under  these  circumstances,  that  Bucer  and  Capito 
were  convinced  that  the  public  colloquy  was  hopeless.  When 
further  secret  conferences  increased  the  hopes  engendered 
by  the  first  one,  Bucer  was  forced  to  admit  that  this  was  ap- 
parently the  only  available  way  of  reaching  a peaceful  re- 
ligious agreement.  Yet  he  was  not  satisfied  to  continue  the 
secret  colloquy  on  his  own  authority,  for  he  had  no  right 
to  represent  the  Protestant  states  in  such  an  important  way. 
From  the  unreliable  Veltwyck  he  exacted  the  most  solemn 
assurances  that  this  was  the  only  way  in  which  the  emperor 
knew  how  to  avoid  war,  that  he  would  give  a written  promise 
of  secrecy  with  the  emperor’s  seal,  and  that  the  negotiations 
should  be  revealed  only  to  the  Landgrave  of  Hesse.  Because 
Bucer  placed  no  reliance  on  these  promises,  he  sought  to 
protect  himself  by  a similarly  dishonorable  method.  He  re- 
quested the  landgrave  to  write  him  a letter,  dated  about,  or 
before,  December  10,  1540,  authorizing  him  to  enter  into 
such  negotiations  for  the  promotion  of  a Christian  colloquy, 
provided  he  did  nothing  contrary  to  the  decisions  adopted  at 
Hagenau,  or  disadvantageous  to  the  Protestant  states.  This 
letter  he  planned  to  show  only  to  Feige  and  James  Sturm, 
but  to  use  it  as  a protection  for  himself  in  case  the  secret 
colloquy  was  discovered. 

Though  the  landgrave  was  pleased  with  the  secret  colloquy 
and  agreed  that  the  public  colloquy  was  in  a hopeless  state, 
he  was  just  as  unwilling  as  Bucer  to  assume  the  responsibility 
for  the  negotiations.  He  sent  the  commission  which  Bucer 
requested,  but  sought  to  throw  the  responsibility  upon  the 
Catholics  by  requiring  Granvelle  to  send  him  a letter  request- 
ing the  document.  In  a pessimistic  way  he  reminded  Bucer 
of  the  Scylla  and  C'harybdis,  Luther  and  the  pope,  between 
which  any  religious  agreement  must  pass.  In  other  words,  it 
would  be  useless  for  the  little  group  at  Worms  to  formulate  a 
compromise,  however  perfect,  that  the  pope  would  not  ap- 
prove, for  then  no  Catholic  would  accept  it.  Likewise  with- 
out Luther’s  sanction  such  an  agreement  would  be  a mere 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  REGENSBURG  BOOK  363 

scrap  of  paper.  There  were  only  two  solutions  of  this  diffi- 
culty, he  thought,  one,  to  formulate  an  agreement  attractive 
to  so  large  a majority  of  influential  persons  that  the  approval 
of  Luther  or  the  pope,  or  both,  could  be  disregarded.  The 
other  alternative  was  to  gain  the  election  of  a “reforming” 
pope,  relieved  of  all  powers  except  those  of  an  ordinary 
bishop.  The  first  Bucer  adopted,  the  latter,  equally  impossible 
policy,  was  advocated  by  the  landgrave.  He  cautioned  Bucer 
that  in  the  secret  colloquy  he  could  speak  only  as  an  indi- 
vidual and  not  as  a representative  of  the  Protestant  party. 
Moreover,  that  it  would  be  useless  to  make  a compromise  on 
ecclesiastical  property  that  would  not  be  acceptable  to  the 
rapacious  Duke  Ulrich  of  Wurttemberg.16 

The  sessions  of  the  secret  colloquy  were  held  in  Groper’s 
lodgings  at  convenient  hours.  In  addition  to  an  assurance  of 
strict  secrecy  it  was  agreed  that  each  one  should  present  his 
own  belief,  and  then  state  how  he  thought  an  agreement  could 
be  reached  on  it,  but  should  not  be  bound  by  any  such  con- 
ciliatory statements.17  Gropper  proved  to  be  the  leader  in 
conciliation,  for  he  apparently  accepted  the  dogma  of  justifi- 
cation by  faith,  granted  the  necessity  of  worthy,  faithful 
pastors,  and  recognized  that  the  liturgy  of  the  church  needed 
purification  to  adapt  it  to  the  needs  of  the  people.18  Bucer 
and  Capito  demanded,  in  addition  to  these  things,  the  true 
dispensation  of  the  sacraments  and  the  establishment  of 
schools;  and,  for  their  part,  conceded  that  the  German 
churches  could  reach  a settlement  only  if  these  things  were 
granted  and  established  by  a council.19 

The  continuation  of  the  secret  colloquy  revealed  a possi- 
bility of  agreement  on  many  of  the  chief  doctrines  where  no 
agreement  had  been  reached  before.  It  also  showed  the  irre- 
concilable attitude  of  the  two  parties  on  matters  of  practice, 

15  Lenz,  I,  276-279. 

16  Ibid.,  I,  280-283. 

17  M.  Bucer,  Von  den  einigen,  65-66. 

1R  M.  Bucer,  De  Concilio  et  legitime,  2-3. 

10  Ibid.,  3. 


364 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


for  the  papists  demanded  the  permission  of  public  masses,  and 
masses  without  communicants.  Though  Bucer  was  forced  to 
admit  that  his  opponents  acted  at  times  as  if  they  seriously 
desired  a reformation,  his  common  sense  told  him  that  they 
really  desired  aid  against  the  Turks,  and  that  to  gain  it  they 
did  not  scruple  to  raise  false  anticipations  in  the  hearts  of  the 
Protestants.20 

Finally,  during  the  last  week  of  December,  1540,  Gropper 
composed  articles  on  justification,  the  sacraments,  and  eccle- 
siastical organization  representing  as  nearly  as  possible  the 
doctrine  to  which  both  sides  would  agree.21  In  addition  the 
papists  added  a statement  of  four  points  on  which  they  would 
make  no  concession.  First,  they  demanded  intercession  of  the 
saints,  which  they  said  was  practised  by  the  Apostolic  Church 
and  was  not  contrary  to  Scripture.22  Second,  they  insisted 
upon  prayers  for  the  dead,  because  it  was  such  an  ancient 
usage.  Third,  auricular  confession  should  be  practised  at 
least  once  a year,  yet  it  need  not  be  a minute  narration  nor 
made  to  a priest  of  unsuitable  youth.  Fourth,  transsubstan- 
tiation and  the  reservation  of  the  host  ought  to  be  allowed.23 

On  the  other  hand,  Bucer  and  Capito  put  into  writing,  at 
the  request  of  their  opponents,  the  methods  which  they  ad- 
vocated to  gain  the  support  of  both  parties  to  the  articles : 
namely,  to  send  copies  to  the  landgrave  and  the  Elector  of 
Brandenburg;  to  submit  them  to  the  emperor;  at  the  coming 
Diet  to  have  the  Elector  of  Brandenburg  lay  them  before  the 
Elector  of  the  Palatinate  and  the  ecclesiastical  electors;  to 

20  Lcnz,  I,  286-287. 

21  M.  Bucer,  Von  den  einigcn,  84. 

22  Gropper’s  account  of  the  secret  colloquy  was  published  in  his 
IVahrhafftige  Antwort,  1545. 

23  Lenz,  I,  288-290,  532-533;  Corpus  Rcformatorum,  IV,  94.  These 
articles  thus  displaced  the  Leipzig  Articles  as  the  proposed  formula  for 
concord,  but  a comparison  of  the  two  shows  that  Bucer  followed  in  gen- 
eral the  same  program.  While  the  two  formulas  differ  in  arrangement 
they  agree  in  details  and  the  most  important  differences  are  explained  by 
the  fact  that  in  one  case  Bucer  was  dealing  with  Witzel,  and  in  the  other 
with  Gropper  (L.  Cardauns,  Zur  Geschichte  der  Kirchlichen  Unions- 
und  Reformbestrebungen  von  1538  bis  1542,  Rome,  1910,  pp.  16-23). 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  REGENSBURG  BOOK  365 

discuss  with  pious  people  the  four  disputed  points;  to  seek  the 
appointment  of  favorable  representatives  to  the  next  Diet; 
and  to  demand  an  agreement  on  doctrine  and  organization 
before  a settlement  on  ceremonies  and  usages.24  There  was 
no  discussion  of  ecclesiastical  property,25  the  one  question 
which  was  a greater  obstacle  to  a compromise  than  any  other. 

The  secret  colloquy  having  achieved  the  formulation  of  a 
compromise,  the  next  step  was  to  gain  for  it  sufficient  back- 
ing to  make  it  worth  presenting  publicly.  This  effort  Bucer 
began  by  seeking  the  approval  of  his  patron,  Landgrave 
Philip  of  Hesse.  At  first,  he  planned  to  send  the  articles  to 
the  prince,  with  the  request  that  he  show  them  to  his  three 
trusted  theologians,  Melchior  Adam,  Pistorius  and  Lening, 
in  order  to  secure  their  assent.26  But,  on  December  31,  1540, 
Veltwyck  advised  him  to  go  and  gain  the  landgrave’s  ap- 
proval personally.  Although,  as  Bucer  told  him,  Philip  could 
only  give  his  individual  assent,  still  he  was  an  important 
person,  and  without  such  an  agreement,  an  understanding 
between  the  emperor  and  the  prince  would  be  impossible  be- 
cause of  the  pope’s  objections.  Again  the  imperial  secretary 
threatened  that  the  emperor  could  not  resist  those  who  ad- 
vised him  to  resort  to  war,  unless  some  compromise  was 
effected,  and  the  landgrave’s  approval  was  the  next  step. 
Bucer,  consequently  consulted  with  Feige,  planning  that  his 
approval  should  appear  like  a call  from  the  landgrave;  and 
then  Sturm’s  assent  could  be  gained  without  giving  any 
reasons.  Feige  opposed  the  proposition.  Bucer’s  absence 
would  look  suspicious,  he  said,  and  besides,  what  was  the 
use  of  gaining  the  landgrave’s  approval  when  the  other  side 
would  probably  reject  the  negotiations.  James  Sturm  agreed 
that  Bucer  should  not  leave  Worms,  especially  because  Gran- 
velle  had  just  proposed  a more  favorable  mode  of  procedure 
to  the  presidents  of  the  colloquy,  and  it  was  important  for 


24  Lenz,  I,  290. 

25  Tbid.,  I,  292. 

26  Ibid.,  I,  291. 


366  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

Bucer  to  be  present  when  the  decision  was  rendered.  At  a 
conference  with  Granvelle  on  the  next  day,  Bucer  explained 
the  matter  and  persuaded  him  to  write  to  Philip.  But  Velt- 
wyck  insisted  so  strongly  that  Bucer  must  see  the  landgrave 
personally,  that  the  reformer  finally  consented  to  make  a hur- 
ried trip  for  that  purpose.  It  was  neither  the  desire  to  avoid 
war,  nor  to  please  the  pope  which  made  Veltwyck  and  Gran- 
velle seek  the  landgrave’s  approval  so  ardently.  They  knew 
that  the  French  were  seeking  an  alliance  with  him,  and  in 
order  to  make  Philip  favor  an  alliance  with  the  emperor  in- 
stead, they  offered  this  promise  of  a religious  agreement. 
Naturally  it  made  a strong  appeal  to  the  landgrave,  for,  if 
such  an  ecclesiastical  compromise  were  effected,  then  an 
understanding  with  the  emperor  to  protect  his  recent  big- 
amy would  not  be  an  injury  to  the  Reformation.  In  order  to 
make  the  most  of  this  opportunity,  Veltwyck  assured  Bucer 
that  the  emperor  was  coming  soon,  and  there  was  no  time  to 
waste.27  Bucer  understood  their  motives,  but  sought  the 
landgrave’s  approval,  because  he  hoped  the  compromise 
would  make  further  alliances  relatively  unimportant. 

When  Bucer  informed  Philip  by  letter  of  these  negotia- 
tions, the  latter  invited  him  to  a conference  at  Rosbach,  and 
instructed  Feige  to  aid  him  to  make  the  journey.28  On  Wed- 
nesday, January  5,  1541,  Bucer  left  Worms,  first  sending 
ahead  a message  to  the  landgrave  to  meet  him  at  Giessen, 
several  miles  nearer,  in  order  that  he  might  return  to  Worms 
on  Sunday  in  time  for  the  opening  of  the  public  colloquy  on 
Monday  morning.29  On  Friday  they  met  at  Giessen,  and  after 
Bucer  had  explained  the  articles  to  Philip  in  German,  the 
prince  gave  him  a written  statement  that  he  was  “not  dis- 
pleased” with  them.  As  for  Granvelle’s  other  request,  that  he 
promise  to  come  to  the  Diet  to  meet  soon  in  Regensburg,  he 
gave  no  definite  assurances,  for  his  presence  there  was  a com- 

2,7  Lenz,  I,  297-300. 

28  Ibid.,  I,  304-305. 

28  Ibid.,  I,  308;  Corpus  Reformatorum,  IV,  14. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  REGENSBURG  BOOK  367 

modity  that  he  was  determined  to  sell  at  the  highest  passible 
price.30  On  the  other  hand,  the  emperor  knew  that  Philip  was 
desperately  in  need  of  protection  and  he  used  this  exigency 
to  gain  his  approval  of  a religious  agreement,  by  which  at 
the  next  Diet  the  Protestants  might  be  decoyed  into  un- 
watchfulness  and  persuaded  to  give  help  against  the  Turks. 

Bucer  returned  to  Worms  at  io  o’clock  Sunday  morning, 
January  9,  1541.  That  evening  he  had  a conference  with 
Granvelle,  who  was  pleased  with  everything  except  a sug- 
gestion by  Philip  that  the  emperor  make  some  concessions 
to  Gulich  to  win  the  elector’s  favor.  This  plan  he  rejected 
completely.  Again  he  insisted  that  Philip  come  to  the  Diet.31 

The  next  prince  to  be  approached  was  Elector  Joachim  of 
Brandenburg.  On  January  1 1,  1541,  Bucer  sent  to  him  a copy 
of  the  articles,  adding  the  misleading,  though  not  strictly 
untruthful,  explanation  that  the  public  colloquy  was  hope- 
lessly monopolized  by  reactionary  papists,  and  that  the  em- 
peror perceived  that  the  unity  of  Germany  was  impossible 
without  ecclesiastical  peace.  This,  he  pointed  out,  was  op- 
posed by  the  pope.  Consequently,  certain  princes  and  electors 
had  commissioned  their  scholars  to  compose  a statement  of 
the  articles  in  dispute,  which  had  been  confidentially  shown 
to  Bucer  and  Capito  at  Worms.  They  had  agreed  that  it 
would  be  a good  plan  to  submit  this  tentative  compromise  to 
an  assembly  of  scholars  who  should  revise  it  until  it  was 
generally  acceptable.  But  before  that  was  done  it  was  neces- 
sary to  gain  the  support  of  influential  princes  and  electors 
for  the  plan,  in  order  that  the  pope’s  inevitable  opposition 
might  be  overcome.  As  in  his  earlier  attempt  at  concord  be- 
tween the  Protestants  on  the  Lord’s  Supper,  Bucer  asserted 
that  there  were  many  misunderstandings  which  concealed  the 
fact  that  both  sides  were  nearer  together  than  they  thought. 
He  requested  Elector  Joachim  to  inspect  the  articles  and  then 
send  them  to  Luther  for  his  secret  investigation  and  judg- 


30  Lenz,  I,  309. 

31  Ibid.,  I,  310. 


368  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

ment,  explaining  to  him  that  it  offered  a compromise  by 
which  many  of  the  papists  might  be  won  to  an  agreement  on 
the  chief  matters,  and  a means  of  persuading  the  princes  to 
undertake  a colloquy.  He  directed  that  Luther’s  opinion  and 
the  articles  should  be  sent  back  to  the  Elector  Joachim,  and 
then  by  the  latter  to  the  landgrave,  who  would  return  them  to 
Bucer.  “This  is  the  only  way,”  he  declared,  “by  which  the 
favor  of  the  lords  and  people  may  be  won  to  help  in  a 
Christian  agreement  and  reformation  of  the  German  nation 
at  this  time.”32  For  Bucer  the  Worms  Articles  were  a last 
resort,  not  an  ideal. 

Bucer ’s  letter  to  Elector  Joachim,  enclosing  a copy  of  the 
Worms  Articles  in  Latin,  was  sent  first  to  the  landgrave 
about  January  18,  with  the  request  that  they  be  copied  and 
then  forwarded  to  the  elector.33  On  February  4,  1541, 
Joachim  sent  them  to  Luther  with  a letter  copied  almost  word 
for  word  from  Bucer’s.34  Luther  and  Melanchthon  returned 
them  with  an  unfavorable  opinion  and  then  Joachim  sent 
them  to  the  emperor  with  the  information  that  there  was 
great  hope  they  would  settle  the  controversy.  Granvelle  then 
laid  them  before  Gropper,  Contarini,  Eck,  and  other  Catholic 
theologians,  who  added  various  emendations  and  returned 
them  to  the  emperor.35  On  the  way  back  from  Worms  Bucer 
partially  translated  the  Articles  from  Latin  into  German,  as 
the  landgrave  had  requested.36  But  he  did  not  complete  the 
task,  and  when  he  arrived  in  Strasbourg  so  many  other 
things  had  to  be  done  that  he  laid  the  Articles  aside.37 

The  Diet  of  Regensburg  was  opened  by  the  emperor  on 
April  5,  1541,  with  the  statement  that  its  primary  purpose 
was  to  attain  religious  unity,  and,  after  that,  to  render  aid 
against  the  Turks.  As  a means  for  attaining  the  first  aim 

32  Lenz,  I,  529-536,  311;  Blatter,  58. 

33  Ibid.,  I,  312. 

3i  Enders,  XIII,  257;  cf.  Lenz,  I,  535,  II,  21. 

33  Schaefer,  50,  ff. ; Blatter,  58,  ff. 

36  Lenz,  I,  312;  cf.  ibid.,  305,  309. 

37  Ibid.,  II,  7. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  REGENSBURG  BOOK 


369 


he  suggested  a secret  colloquy  between  three  theologians 
from  each  side,  who  he  nominated.  The  men  he  chose  were 
Melanchthon,  Bucer  and  Pistorius  from  the  Protestants  and 
Pflug,  Eck  and  Gropper  from  the  Catholics.38  At  their  first 
discussion,  on  Wednesday,  April  27,  1541,  the  emperor  laid 
before  the  collocutors  as  a guide  for  their  deliberations  a set 
of  articles  which  became  known  as  the  “Regensburg  Book,’’ 
or  “Regensburg  Interim.”39  This  was  a bolt  out  of  a clear  sky ; 
a surprise  to  all  except  the  few  who  were  on  the  inside.  Me- 
lanchthon was  not  only  surprised  but  also  offended,  and  gave 
his  consent  to  use  the  formula  only  after  all  the  others  had.40 

There  was  much  speculation  as  to  the  origin  and  author- 
ship of  the  pamphlet,  although  the  emperor  announced  that 
it  had  been  composed  by  certain  pious  men  as  a formula  of 
concord,41  and  Granvelle  declared  that  it  had  been  composed 
by  certain  Belgian  scholars  who  had  died  two  years  before.42 
This  pretence  deceived  no  one,  for  nearly  everybody  attrib- 
uted it  either  to  Gropper  or  Bucer.43  Morone  wrote  to  Rome 
that  Gropper  was  generally  regarded  as  the  author,44  and  Eck 
wrote  to  Nausea,  “Granvelle  and  Count  von  Mandersc'hied 
have  seen  to  it  that  Gropper  wrote  that  book.”45  Later  he 

38  Corpus  Reformatorum,  Calvini  Opera,  XI,  195;  LePlat,  III,  8;  M. 
Bucer,  Alle  Handlungen  und  Schrifften,  1541,  Bi,  12,  16;  K.  T.  Hergang, 
Das  Religionsgesprach  zu  Regensburg,  1858,  p.  10.  ff. ; Corpus  Reforma- 
torum, IV,  156-163;  178-179;  Walch,  XVII,  578;  Lenz,  III,  18-19. 

39  M.  Bucer,  Alle  Handlungen,  30b;  T.  Brieger,  De  Formulae  Con- 
cordiae  Ratisbonensis  origine  atque  indole,  1870,  p.  15.  The  text  is 
printed  in  a number  of  places,  among  them  the  following;  M.  Bucer, 
Alle  Handlungen,  31,  ff.,  and  its  Latin  edition,  Acta  colloquii  in  comitiis 
imperii  Ratisponae  habiti,  1541,  Bi ; C.  W.  Hering,  Geschichte  der 
kirchlichen  Reunionsversuche,  1836,  p.  50,  ff . ; Walch,  XVII,  587;  LePlat, 
III,  10;  Blatter,  96. 

40  Corpus  Reformatorum,  IV,  253,  547;  P.  Vetter,  Die  Religionsver- 
handlungen  auf  dem  Reichstage  zu  Regensburg  1541,  1889,  p.  1. 

41  M.  Bucer,  Alle  Handlungen,  30b. 

42  Schaefer,  12;  J.  Eck,  Apologia,  1542,  I,  ii.  Gulich  falsely  attributes 
this  statement  to  the  emperor  (Gulich,  79). 

43  Gulich,  79-82. 

44  F.  Dittrich,  Regesten  und  Brief e des  Cardinals  Gasparo  Contarini, 
1881,  p.  178. 

45  Schaefer,  14. 


370 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


asserted  publicly  that  he  knew  the  author  was  one  of  the 
collocutors  because  one  of  them  steadfastly  defended  the 
book.40  The  fact  that  Eck  did  not  at  the  same  time  name  him 
shows  that  he  had  in  mind  Gropper,  not  Bucer,  for  he  would 
have  been  only  too  g^lad  to  have  cast  the  blame  upon  Bucer,  but 
at  that  time  he  was  defending  Gropper  and  so  he  mentioned 
no  names. 

That  Bucer  at  least  had  a part  in  the  composition  of  the 
book  was  believed  by  Eck,  Cochlaeus,  Joachim,  and  others.47 
Melanchthon  happened  to  see  several  pages  in  Bucer’s  hand, 
which  he  afterwards  found  corresponded  with  parts  of  the 
book,  and  suspected  that  his  colleague  was  the  author.  His 
suspicions  were  increased  when  he  learned  that  Bucer  had 
given  Musculus  of  Augsburg  a manuscript  to  copy  which  also 
corresponded  to  sections  of  the  book.  On  this  basis  he  spread 
the  report  that  Bucer  was  the  author.  As  soon  as  the  latter 
heard  it,  he  at  once  remonstrated  with  Melanchthon,  telling 
him  that  he  was  not  the  author  of  the  book,  but  he  had  known 
about  the  plan  and  discussed  it  with  Gropper  with  good  in- 
tentions. The  real  authors,  he  said,  were  Gropper  and  Velt- 
wyck.  When  the  book  was  finished  they  had  shown  it  to  him 
and  Capito,  and  when  they  were  not  opposed  to  it,  Granvelle 
had  sent  it  to  the  landgrave  and  Joachim,  with  Bucer’s  com- 
mendation.48 Melanchthon,  who  was  sincerely  sorry  that  he 
had  brought  undeserved  reproach  upon  Bucer,  tried  to  re- 
trieve his  error.  In  the  preface  to  his  Acta  in  Conventu 
Ratisbonae  he  wrote  a few  months  later,  “Who  may  be  the 
author  of  the  book,  I surely  do  not  know,”49  Luther  con- 
demned the  colloquy  as  hopeless  almost  before  it  had  begun,50 
and  though  he  made  no  statement  as  to  the  author  of  the 

46  T.  Eck,  Apologia,  I,  ii. 

47  Schaefer,  17;  J.  Eck,  Apologia,  I,  ii. 

48  Corpus  Reformatorum,  IV,  578-579;  cf.  ibid.,  475 ; Blatter,  59,  n.  1. 

49  Ibid.,  190,  note;  Schiess,  II,  86.  Yet  on  April  8,  1543,  he  wrote 
privately  to  the  elector  that  “Gropper  made  the  Regensburg  Book’’ 
( Corpus  Reformatorum,  V,  88),  and  in  many  other  places  indicated  the 
same  opinion  (Schaefer,  16). 

r,°  deWette,  Luther’s  Brief e,  V,  353. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  REGENSBURG  BOOK 


371 


Regensburg  Book,  he  called  it  the  most  harmful  writing  ever 
composed.51 

As  a matter  of  fact  the  Regensburg  Book  was  nothing 
more  nor  less  than  the  Worms  Articles,  drawn  up  during  the 
secret  colloquy  of  Worms  by  Gropper  with  Bucer’s  sugges- 
tions, and  emended  by  the  landgrave  and  various  scholars. 
But  the  secret  of  its  origin  was  carefully  guarded,  and  as  yet 
the  full  story  has  never  been  told.  Hergang  ascertained  the 
correct  author  about  the  middle  of  the  nineteenth  century,52 
but  Schaefer  was  the  first  to  prove  the  authorship  of  the 
Regensburg  Book  by  contemporary  testimony  and  then  to 
show  its  identity  with  the  Worms  Articles  by  the  similarity 
in  contents  and  the  history  of  the  articles.53  Lenz  made  a 
careful  study  of  the  text  and  its  genealogy54  and  published 
Bucer’s  correspondence  with  the  landgrave  telling  the  story 
of  the  secret  colloquy  of  Worms.  In  addition  to  their  conclu- 
sive arguments  with  regard  to  the  authorship  of  the  book,  it 
should  be  noted  that  the  differences  between  the  Leipzig  and 
the  Worms  Articles  is  the  difference  between  Witzel’s  and 
Gropper’s  beliefs,  thus  indicating  Gropper  as  the  author  of 
the  latter.55  Bucer  wrote  to  Ambrose  Blaurer  in  October, 
“Nor  am  I the  author  of  the  book,  and  I wonder  greatly  why 
some  still  assert  it,  since  Philip  both  in  person  and  in  letters, 
after  he  had  inflicted  this  wound  without  cause,  sought  zeal- 
ously to  heal  it.56 

The  Regensburg  Book  was  a failure.  Although  the  col- 
locutors discussed  it  with  great  energy  and  the  two  sides 
came  nearer  an  agreement  than  ever  before  or  since,  only  a 
small  part  of  it  was  accepted.  Its  importance  lies  not  in  its 
contents  nor  in  what  it  accomplished  but  in  what  it  failed  to 
accomplish.  When  it  appeared  in  1541  there  was  a possibility 

si  Ibid.,  V,  388. 

52  Hergang,  49,  ff. 

53  Schaefer,  op.  cit.,  see  especially  pp.  7,  ff.,  27,  ff.,  50. 

34  Lenz,  III,  31,  ff.,  1 17;  cf.  Corpus  Reformatortim,  IV,  190. 

55  Cf.  Cardauns,  18,  ff. 

56  ScHIess,  II,  86. 


372 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


that  the  Reformation  might  merely  be  another  temporary 
dispute  like  the  papal  schism.  The  failure  of  the  Regensburg 
Book  showed  that  this  hope  was  vain,  at  least  so  far  as 
Germany  was  concerned,  and  that  agreement  was  impossible. 

Delaware,  Ohio.  Hastings  Eells. 


WILHELM  HERRMANN’S  SYSTEMATIC 
THEOLOGY  * 


Herrmann  tells  us  that  a systematic  theology  which  aims 
at  making  explicit  for  the  Christian  what  is  given  him  in 
his  faith,  has  two  tasks : that  it  has  to  show  ( I ) How  a 
man  is  inwardly  renewed  through  the  experience  he  may 
have  of  the  power  of  the  Person  of  Jesus;  (2)  How  the 
faith— grounded  in  this  experience  and  determined  by  it  as 
to  content — expresses  itself.  He  deals  with  these  two  tasks 
in  order. 

Under  the  second  head  he  expounds  according  to  his 
claim  “the  ideas  which  are  the  expression  of  the  faith  which 
knows  itself  sustained  by  the  power  of  the  personal  life  of 
Jesus.”  He  informs  us,  however,  that,  following  this  path, 
we  shall  never  obtain  “a  closed  and  entirely  consistent  sys- 
tem of  ideas;  for  faith  itself  grows,  it  changes  daily,  if  it  is 
really  alive  (Rom.  xii.2),  and  is  continually  producing  ideas 
which  are  in  a state  of  mutual  tension.” 

With  our  Lord’s  adage,  “By  their  fruits  ye  shall  know 
them,”  in  mind,  we  shall  consider  first  the  fruits  of  Herr- 
mann’s faith. 

I.  Theology  Proper 

Herrmann’s  theology  proper  is  not  adequately  grounded. 
As  to  the  evidences  for  believing  in  the  existence,  personal- 
ity, and  the  attributes  of  God,  he  represents  the  evidences 
from  the  adaptation  and  order  pervading  the  universe  as 
unworthy  of  consideration,  because,  “we  do  not  know  the 
totality  of  things,”  and  because,  “we  do  not  by  any  means 
always  find  in  the  world,  as  we  know  it,  a purposeful  order,” 
but  “are  often  oppressed  with  a sense  of  the  meaningless 
events”;  and  because  moreover,  “if  this  argument  were 
sound,  it  would  prove  the  existence  not  of  God : i.e.,  a Being 
of  absolute  wisdom  and  power,1  but  only  a Being  of  wisdom 

* Systematic  Theology  by  Wilhelm  Herrmann.  English  translation  by 
Michlem  and  Saunders. 

1 P.  71. 


374 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


and  power  higher  than  our  own.”  He  represents  the  cosmo- 
logical evidences  for  the  being  of  God,  as,  of  rational  evi- 
dences, “alone  worthy  of  serious  refutation”;  he  says  of  it: 

The  cosmological  proof  starts  from  the  fact  that  everything  to  which 
we  can  point  is  conditioned  by  other  things.  Had  we,  however,  to  imagine 
all  things  as  thus  conditioned,  we  should  be  unable  in  the  end  to  ascribe 
existence  in  the  full  sense  to  anything  whatsoever.  We  must  therefore 
conceive  the  notion  of  a Reality  distinct  from  this  world,  a Reality  self- 
existent  or  absolute,  on  which  all  finite  things  depend,  and  from  which 
they  derive  their  share  of  reality.  . . . Now  it  is  perfectly  true  that 
science  can  only  securely  grasp  the  reality  of  things  in  time  and  space 
when  they  can  be  conceived  in  relation  to  an  eternal  Being.  But  in  the 
work  of  science  the  eternal  ground  of  all  being  is,  as  a matter  of  fact, 
never  expressed  in  terms  of  God,  but  always  in  conceptions  of  law.  In 
the  attempt  to  substantiate  the  reality  of  a thing,  the  way  of  science  is 
always  to  seek  to  make  good  the  proposition  that  this  thing  is  bound  up 
with  all  other  things  in  one  uniform  nature.  The  idea  underlying  the 
hypothesis — that  of  an  all  embracing  law — is  that  which  for  science  ex- 
presses the  eternal  ground  of  all  that  is  in  time  and  space.2 

After  disposing,  in  this  easy  way,  of  the  evidences  for 
the  existence  of  God,  and  after  passing  more  or  less  just 
criticism  on  the  efforts  of  Eucken,  Kaftan,  Kant,  and 
Schleiermacher  to  reach  validly  the  truth  of  God’s  exist- 
ence, Herrmann  gives  us  his  views  of  how  it  may  be  had — 
namely,  through  experience.  He  says : 

The  experience  out  of  which  religion  may  arise,  then,  is  the  realization 
on  the  part  of  any  religious  man  that  he  has  encountered  a spiritual  power 
in  contact  with  which  he  has  felt  utterly  humbled,  yet  at  the  same  time 
uplifted  to  a real  independent  inner  life.  This  is  met  with  in  ordinary 
life,  when  in  the  society  of  our  fellows  we  experience  in  ourselves  the 
awakening  of  reverence  and  trust. 

If  we  have  experienced  the  working  of  this  power,  through  contact 
with  which  a life,  which  is  life  in  truth,  a real  human  life,  arises  in  us, 
then  we  are  in  a position  to  settle  the  question  whether  God  is  a reality 
to  us.  It  simply  depends  on  whether  we  remain  loyal  to  the  truth,  that  is, 
whether  we  are  prepared  to  treat  the  fact  of  such  a power  as  what  it 
really  is  for  us.  The  moment  we  desire  dependence  upon  it,  and  submit 
ourselves  to  it  in  reverence  and  trust,  this  spiritual  power  is  really  our 
soul’s  Lord.  We  can  never  again  entirely  forget  the  fact  that  we  have 
met  with  a power  which  had  not  only  an  eternal  sway  over  us,  but  sub- 
dued our  hearts.3 


2 See  pp.  22  and  23. 

3 P.  36. 


HERRMANN  S SYSTEMATIC  THEOLOGY 


375 


( i ) So  far,  we  have  been  restating  in  a compendious 
way  the  method  by  which  Herrmann  supposes  some  men 
become  possessed  of  the  truth  that  God  is  a reality  to  them. 
“The  method’’  seems  to  be  by  feeling,  the  cause  of  the  feel- 
ing being  “utterly  humbling”  and  “utterly  uplifting.”  The 
cause  of  the  humbling  and  uplifting  feeling  is  most  vaguely 
grasped,  apparently.  It  is  described  as  putting  us  in  a posi- 
tion “to  settle  the  question  whether  God  is  a reality  to  us.” 
There  is  no  guarding  here  against  the  view  that  this  “Re- 
ality to  us,”  may  be  only  subjective ; and  that  corresponding 
to  this  Reality  to  us,  there  may  be  no  substantially  existing 
person  or  being.  According  to  this  view,  only  they  who  have 
this  marvelous  experience  can  possess  the  truth,  “that  God 
is  a Reality  to  them.”  This  contradicts  the  history  of  the 
human  race  and  the  views  of  men  who'  teach  in  a manner 
far  more  convincing  than  Professor  Herrmann.  According 
to  a great  number  of  reliable  historians  there  has  been  a 
widely  prevailing  belief  amongst  all  nations  in  the  existence 
of  a supreme  Deity,  and  among  vast  numbers  in  these  na- 
tions who  have  in  effect  disclaimed  any  such  experience  as 
that  described  by  Herrmann  as  conditioning  the  ability  of 
a man  “to  settle  the  question  as  to  whether  God  is  a reality 
to  him.”  Thousands  and  perhaps  millions  of  men,  who  would 
disclaim  any  such  phenomenal  experience  as  Herrmann  makes 
necessary  to  settle  the  question  whether  God  is  a reality  to 
one,  have  believed  in  the  existence  of  a Lord  absolute  of 
the  universe.  Paul  teaches,  in  Rom.  i.  19-20:  “Because  that 
which  may  be  known  of  God  is  manifest  in  them:  for  God 
hath  showed  it  unto  them.  For  the  invisible  things  of  Him, 
from  the  creation  of  the  world  are  clearly  seen,  being  under- 
stood by  the  things  that  are  made,  even  His  eternal  power 
and  Godhead;  so  that  they  are  without  excuse.”  These 
words  of  Paul  for  saneness  of  thought  and  for  philosophic 
insight,  are  weightier  than  Herrmann’s  and  they  show 
amongst  other  things  that  men  who  have  not  religion,  and 
are  not  even  “religiously  minded”  ought  to  see  that  God 
exists  and  that  He  is  of  “eternal  power  and  Godhead.”  In 


376 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


discussing  the  existence  of  God,  Herrmann  treats  both  the 
Bible  and  the  history  of  thought  with  scant  respect. 

(2)  When  about  to  cast  away  the  cosmological  argument 
for  the  existence  of  God,  Herrmann  states  it  in  no  very 
strong  form — rather  he  misstates  it — and  then  in  order  to 
break  its  force  indulges  in  some  curiously  inept  remarks  as 
follows,  “Now  it  is  perfectly  true  that  science  can  only  se- 
curely grasp  the  reality  of  things  in  time  and  space  when 
they  can  be  conceived  in  relation  to  an  eternal  being.  But 
in  the  work  of  science  the  eternal  ground  of  all  being  is, 
as  a matter  of  fact,  never  expressed  in  terms  of  God,  but 
always  in  the  conception  of  law.” 

One  must  ask,  “The  law  of  what?”  “Law”  and  “ground” 
are  heterogeneous  categories.  “Law”  properly  expresses  the 
mode  in  which  a cause  acts,  or,  if  the  cause  be  moral,  the 
way  in  which  it  should  act;  whereas  ground  is  but  another 
name  for  cause,  efficient  cause.  If  science  seeks  the  efficient 
cause  of  the  universe  regarded  (as  it  properly  is  regarded) 
as  a begun  thing  it  must  seek  a somewhat  in  the  category 
of  force  and  ultimately  in  the  category  of  Being.  The  phi- 
losopher having  refuted  pantheism,  and  the  doctrine  that 
the  present  world  is  “the  product  of  an  infinite  series  of 
events,”  and  having  stated  the  cosmological  argument  cor- 
rectly, may  draw  a conclusion  of  vast  weight  notwithstand- 
ing the  cavil  of  Kant  which  that  great  thinker  made  because 
of  his  misapprehension  or  misstatement  of  the  law  of  caus- 
ality. The  argument  never  has  been  successfully  overthrown. 
Herrmann  should  recognize  the  fact. 

(3)  The  teleological  proof  is  of  force  notwithstanding 
Herrmann’s  assertion  that  it  is  “scientifically  a quite  inde- 
fensible attempt  to  find  a basis  upon  which  to  prove  the 
existence  of  God.”  He  is  following  a widespread  modern 
tradition  in  this  assertion  but  a tradition  itself  “quite  inde- 
fensible.” Let  the  argument  be  stated : Every  phenomena 
must  have  an  adequate  cause;  Adaptation  and  order  pervade 
the  universe;  Therefore  the  cause  of  this  ordered  world,  of 
this  ordered  begun  thing,  must  be  a thing  of  intelligence  and 


Herrmann's  systematic  theology  377 

power  of  choice.  Herrmann  would  object,  indeed,  that  w? 
do  not  know  that  order  pervades  the  universe.  But  he  win 
not  deny  that  every  advance  in  science  as  far  as  it  teaches 
anything,  shows  that  adaptation  and  order  prevail  in  the 
heavens  above  and  in  the  elements  of  the  earth.  Order  is 
manifest  to  the  naked  eye,  more  widely  manifest  when  tele- 
scope, or  microscope  is  used.  With  every  advance  of  science 
purpose  becomes  more  manifest.  We  do  not  always  know 
what  the  purpose  in  some  creation  is.  The  purpose  of  the 
spleen  is  not  yet  fully  understood;  but  the  man  of  science 
shows  that  he  believes  it  has  a purpose.  If  he  did  not,  he 
would  not  labor  to  understand  it.  Granted  that  some  events 
are  meaningless  to  us,  men  of  science  think  that  meaning- 
lessness to  us  is  due  to  the  imperfection  of  our  insight. 
Professor  Herrmann  says,  “Even  if  this  teleological  argu- 
ment were  sound,  it  would  prove  the  existence  not  of  God, 
i.e.,  of  a being  of  absolute  wisdom  and  power,  but  only  of 
a being  of  wisdom  and  power  higher  than  our  own.”  Surely, 
however,  this  conclusion  is  unworthy.  The  being  competent 
to  bring  about  the  order  and  adaptation  displayed  in  this 
universe  possesses  wisdom  and  power  not  merely  higher 
than  Professor  Herrmann  and  his  followers  possess,  but 
indefinitely  higher.  He  who  contrived  the  order  disclosed  in 
the  movement  of  the  heavenly  bodies,  and  in  the  combina- 
tions of  the  ultimate  chemical  elements,  the  adaptations  ob- 
servable in  the  eye,  the  ear,  the  hand,  shows  himself  pos- 
sessed of  a wisdom  and  power  so  vast  that  no  man  who  is 
not  a supreme  egotist  dares  to  say  that  God’s  wisdom  may 
not  be  infinite.  And,  if  on  other  solid  grounds  absolute  wis- 
dom and  power  may  be  affirmed  of  the  Creator  of  the  uni- 
verse, the  adaptations  and  the  order  which  pervade  the 
universe,  fall  in  with  and  support  that  truth  in  no  mean 
way. 

(4)  A miraculously  given  revelation,  and  in  particular, 
Jesus  of  Nazareth,  the  Christ,  the  Son  of  the  living  God 
settles  the  fact  of  the  absolute  wisdom  and  power  of  God. 

The  plausibilities  of  certain  schools  of  false  philosophy 


3/8  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

and  of  rationalistic  criticism  had  been  adopted  by  not  a 
few  of  the  occupants  of  theological  chairs  in  Germany, 
whence  once  the  truth  had  been  taught.  Their  teachings 
had  occasioned  confusion,  dismay  and  rout;  and,  after  a 
little,  enthusiastic  hostility  to  Bible  truths  on  the  part  of 
many  of  their  students.  The  Ritschlians,  for  whom  Herr- 
mann speaks  had  suffered  the  stampede,  had  retreated  with 
the  rout,  but  later  made  a stand.  They  found  a much  less 
tenable  position,  however,  than  that  from  which  they  were 
stampeded. 

Herrmann's  treatment  of  the  attributes  of  God  is  meagre 
and  unsatisfactory.  He  feels  obliged  to  derive  the  knowledge 
of  His  attributes  from  the  inexplicably  produced  Faith, 
which  comes  into  being  without  a warrant.  But  according  to 
Herrmann  himself  this  faith  is  a most  imperfect  guide  into 
the  truth.  Hear  him, 

But  as  trust  in  God  produces  in  us  the  concept  of  His  omnipotence, 
our  idea  of  God’s  personality  necessarily  grows  dim ; for  an  almighty 
Being  cannot  possess  either  the  knowledge  or  the  will  by  which  we  recog- 
nize personal  life.  An  omnipotent  power  is  for  us  quite  an  inconceivable 
mystery.  . . . Although  the  idea  of  omnipotence  cannot  be  reconciled 
with  our  conception  of  personal  life,  we  still  see  that  the  absolute  confi- 
dence created  in  us  implies  both  those  ideas.  It  is  when  we  consider  the 
wonderful  fact  of  that  real  life  created  and  stirring  in  us  that  God 
Almighty  is  revealed  to  us  as  personal  Spirit.4 

To  a man  of  common  sense,  a kind  of  sense  by  no  means 
to  be  despised,  it  is  clear  that  Herrmann  needs  to  revise  his 
view  of  the  relation  of  omnipotence  to  knowledge,  his  view 
of  the  relation  of  personality  to  power,  and  needs  to  recon- 
sider the  historical  grounds  for  believing  that  God  exists 
and  has  certain  attributes,  instead  of  throwing  himself  on 
the  “faith”  about  which  he  is  probably  self-deceived.  Possi- 
bly, probably,  he  blindly  calls  on  faith,  as  he  defines  it,  to  do 
more  than  it  can  do. 

Amongst  the  divine  attributes  Herrmann  gives  little,  if 
any,  specific  place  to  Justice.  Hence  we  may  look  ultimately 
for  a more  or  less  vicious  ethical  system  following  this 
school. 


Pp.  97-98. 


Herrmann’s  systematic  theology  379 

Herrmann’s  scheme  is  anti-trinitarian.  He  holds  to  the 
uni-personality  of  the  Godhead.  He  says : 

It  is  involved  in  the  relationship  to  which  our  faith  consciously  owes 
its  life,  that  we  can  perfectly  picture  to  ourselves  the  God  who  redeems 
us  in  only  these  aspects.  He  is  to  us  the  Father  to  whom  we  may  appeal 
with  confidence  of  being  heard.  He  is  similarly  Jesus’  spiritual  power 
working  upon  us.  But  He  is  also  to  us  the  Spirit  who  overcomes  the 
overwhelming  might  of  nature  both  in  ourselves  and  in  the  fellowship 
of  believers.  The  doctrine  of  the  Trinity  must  always  start  from  the  fact 
that  God  reveals  to  us  His  single  nature  in  this  three-fold  way  (Eco- 
nomical Trinity).5 

The  Holy  Spirit  is  simply  the  uni-personal  God  working 
in  the  life  of  the  redeemed.6  In  other  words  the  Holy  Spirit 
is  merely  the  name  for  God  as  He  presents  Himself  in  the 
life  of  redeemed  humanity.  Christ  also  is  divine  in  that  in 
Him  no  less  than  in  the  Father  is  the  one  personal  Spirit 
who  is  God  alone. 

It  may  be  a little  difficult  for  the  reader  who  has  not  read 
Herrmann  to  gather  his  view  on  the  Father,  Son,  and  Holy 
Spirit  from  what  we  have  stated,  though  his  own  language 
has  been  freely  used  to  set  that  view  forth.  His  doctrine  is 
that  God  is  a uni-personal  Spirit  whose  power  works  in 
Jesus  Christ  in  a wonderful  way,  and  who  because  He  hears 
prayer,  may  with  eminent  propriety  be  called  Father,  and 
who  as  dwelling  in  the  hearts  of  His  people  may  be  called 
the  Holy  Spirit. 

Herrmann  openly  repudiates  the  Chalcedonian  Christol- 
ogy:  “The  only  Redeemer  of  God’s  elect  is  the  Lord  Jesus 
Christ,  who  being  the  eternal  Son  of  God  became  man  and 
so  was  and  continueth  to  be  God  and  man  in  two  distinct 
natures  and  one  person  forever.”  According  to  Herrmann, 
satisfaction  could  be  felt  with  this  Chalcedonian  conception 

5 P.  15.1.  Cf.  the  statement  on  p.  148 : 

“The  briefest  expression  for  the  nature  of  the  Holy  Spirit  is  this : 
God  in  us  and  Christ  in  us.  The  question  therefore  whether  the  Holy 
Spirit  is  to  be  thought  of  as  personally  living  or  as  impersonal  force 
indicates  a complete  failure  to  understand  these  conceptions  of  faith. 
The  Holy  Spirit  is  simply  the  living  God  present  and  working  in  us.” 

6 Pp.  140  and  145. 


380  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

only  because  of  “the  vague  idea  of  redemption  which,  as 
early  as  Irenaeus,  had  driven  off  the  field  the  Pauline  Jo- 
hannine  recognition  of  the  manner  of  our  redemption 
through  Christ.”  He  says:  “It  had  been  forgotten  therefore 
that  Christian  faith,  if  it  treats  Christ  as  God,  must  have 
before  its  eyes,  without  being  able  to  comprehend  it,  a 
wonderful  fact  which  it  recognizes  as  the  source  and  foun- 
dation of  its  own  life.”  7 

We  are  not  concerned  to  vindicate  the  views  of  Irenaeus; 
but  Herrmann’s  own  view  of  the  Pauline  and  Johannine 
view  of  the  manner  of  our  redemption  through  Christ  is 
sadly  defective.  But,  of  that  a word,  later. 

He  makes  much  of  the  incomprehensibility  of  the  doc- 
trine of  the  Trinity;  and  yet  he  bases  his  whole  doctrine  on 
a faith  incomprehensibly  produced  in  the  heart  of  the  re- 
ligiously minded  person,  and  which  in  an  incomprehensible 
manner  determines  everything  else  man  is  to  believe.  He 
also  talks  at  times  as  if  he  had  a most  inadequate  idea  of 
the  orthodox  conception  of  the  Trinity,  or  as  if  he  were 
careless  to  a degree  in  presenting  views  which  he  wishes  to 
overthrow.  For  instance,  he  talks  as  if  “person”  in  the 
Godhead  were  in  the  thought  of  the  orthodox,  the  precise 
analogue  of  person  in  the  human  sphere;  whereas  the  in- 
telligent orthodox  think  of  the  term  “person”  as  applied  to 
the  subsistences  in  the  Godhead  because  they  are  more 
nearly  like  personalities  in  the  human  sphere  than  any  other 
modes  of  subsistences  with  which  we  can  compare  them. 
Our  author  is  rather  gifted  in  caricature.  When  he  refers 
to  Scripture  for  confirmation  of  his  views,  he  has  a faculty 
for  selecting  texts  which  superficially  viewed  seem  to  an- 
swer his  purpose,  and  conveniently  passes  by  masses  of 
Scripture  which  run  counter  to  the  current  of  his  teaching. 
On  the  whole  he  seems  to  flee  Scripture  unless  it  approves 
itself  to  his  subjectivity.  So  much  for  Herrmann’s  theology 
proper. 


7 P.  142. 


Herrmann’s  systematic  theology 


38i 


II.  Anthropology 

Herrmann’s  anthropology  is  very  imperfectly  developed. 
He  teaches  by  implication  that  only  the  Christian  has  any 
right  to  claim  that  he  is  at  all  akin  to  God.  He  says : 

Our  consciousness  that  we  are  akin  to  Him  is  therefore,  always  at  the 
same  time  a consciousness  that  a transcendent  life  has  begun  in  us.8 

He  also  says : 

The  idea  that  man  possesses  a life  akin  to  the  divine  is  not  derived 
from  such  a source  by  the  piety  of  the  Old  Testament.  This  difference 
between  the  Old  Testament  and  the  New  is  linked  with  another.  In 
Genesis  the  image  of  God  is  clearly  understood  as  shown  in  the  powers 
which  man  received  at  the  creation.  This  idea  persists  in  prejChristian 
religion.  On  the  other  hand  the  saying  of  Jesus  in  Matt,  v.45  shows 
that,  in  His  view,  what  connects  man  with  God  is  not  a power  inherent 
in  man’s  nature  but  a task  which  is  set  before  him.  According  to  this 
saying  man  is  to  become  God’s  child  by  the  exercise  of  that  pure  charity 
which  identifies  itself  with  its  object  and  is  thus  creative  life.9 

Herrmann  also  says : 

The  anthropological  ideas  which  are  to  be  found  elsewhere  in  the 
Bible  can  play  no  part  in  Protestant  dogmatics ; for  we  are  at  a loss 
to  see  how  their  appearance  in  us  should  be  the  outcome  of  the  faith 
created  in  us  by  the  power  of  the  person  of  Jesus.10 

He  holds  that  the  human  will  is  free.  He  says : 

Necessarily,  therefore,  the  consciousness  of  our  free  will  arises  in 
faith  not  from  logical  deductions,  but  from  actual  surrender  to  God’s 
universal  life-creating  activity.11 

That  is,  it  arises  in  an  experience. 

With  reference  to  man’s  immortality,  he  says  : 

The  idea  that  after  the  death  of  the  body  the  soul  lives  on  as  an  in- 
trinsically immortal  entity,  is  not  Biblical  but  Platonic,  and  it  stands 
in  opposition  to  the  fact  that  the  inner  phenomena  of  consciousness,  are 
in  a manner  beyond  our  ken,  conditioned  by  the  changes  in  the  bodily 
organisms.12 

As  to  the  goal  of  man,  he  says : 

If  we  become  conscious  of  the  reality  of  God  through  the  awakening 

8 P.  89. 

9 P.  00. 

10  P.  91. 

11  P.  92. 

12  P-  94- 


382  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

in  us  of  pure  confidence,  that  carries  with  it,  too,  a knowledge  of  the 
goal  to  which  God  would  lead  us.  God  will  one  day  bring  mankind  to  a 
perfect  fellowship  in  which  each  individual  will  find  inexhaustible  tasks 
and  infinite  increase  of  personal  life.13 

If  a man’s  anthropology  is  to  be  limited  to  truths  deriv- 
able from  and  ratified  by  the  trust  wrought  in  regeneration 
and  conversion— in  regeneration  even  of  a Biblical  and 
not  merely  a Herrmann  type — it  must  necessarily  be  inade- 
quate. A regenerate  mind  is  an  illumined  mind,  but  one  in 
need  of  further  light  from  without.  It  is  absurd  to  limit 
the  materials  to  be  used  in  constructing  anthropology  in  any 
such  way.  Certainly  man  has  been  conscious,  indubitably 
conscious,  of  other  experiences  than  conversion,  and  the 
appearance  of  trust  in  God.  From  these  other  experiences 
he  ought  to  be  able  to  learn  somewhat  of  anthropology. 
There  is  a very  respectable  book,  too,  the  Holy  Scriptures, 
on  which  the  author  should  have  drawn.  There  is  a con- 
sistency between  the  anthropology  of  the  Old  Testament 
and  that  of  the  New  Testament.  Herrmann  seems  to  have 
only  a superficial  view  of  the  Scriptures,  and  thinks  that 
the  anthropological  ideas  of  the  Old  Testament  can  play 
“no  part  in  Protestant  dogmatics.”  Moreover,  he  appears 
to  be  unaware  of  the  sonship  of  man  as  he  comes  from  the 
hand  of  his  Creator  and,  in  distinction  from  that,  the 
adoptive  sonship  of  him  who  has  believed  on  the  Lord 
Jesus  Christ.  Bearing  the  distinction  between  these  two 
kinds  of  sonship  in  mind  and  the  difference  between  un- 
fallen and  fallen  man,  he  will  find  little  difficulty  in  seeing  the 
propriety  of  the  Old  Testament  representing  the  image  of  God 
as  a part  of  man’s  original  endowment,  and  the  New  Tes- 
tament representing  the  image  as  restored  in  regeneration 
and  sanctification. 

His  discussion  of  freedom  is  inadequate  and  faulty.  He 
confuses  the  freedom  of  man  as  a moral  agent  with  his 
ability  for  the  good.  He  says  that  consciousness  of  freewill 
arises  in  faith  from  actual  surrender  to  God’s  “life-creating 


13  P.  96. 


HERRMANN  S SYSTEMATIC  THEOLOGY 


383 


activity.”  What  God  gives  in  this  life-creating  activity  is 
ability  for  the  good — for  the  choice  of  His  service.  Free- 
dom which  is  essential  to  responsibility  is  never  lost.  The 
man  of  the  world  has  it,  as  really  as  the  saint  of  God. 

He  belittles  the  doctrine  of  the  immortality  of  the  soul, 
as  held  in  the  Old  Testament  as  the  unsophisticated  students 
of  the  Old  Testament  have  seen  since  the  time  of  Christ, 
and  as  Christ  saw,  according  to  the  record,  Matt.  xxii.  31-32  ; 
and  he  only  feebly  presents  the  New  Testament  evidence. 
An  American  professor  of  theology  has  written : whatever 
the  Scriptures  may  be  worth, 

they  unhesitatingly  teach  the  immortality  of  man.  This  they  do  in  four 
signal  ways:  (1)  By  fundamental  assumption;  the  Bible  is  delivered 
to  the  world  and  issues  all  its  instructions  and  warnings  to  man  upon 
the  idea  that  human  life  and  history  do  not  end  with  the  grave ; adopt 
for  one  moment  the  doctrine  that  death  is  final  and  how  meaningless 
and  silly  the  whole  Bible  becomes.  (2)  The  Bible  teaches  the  immor- 
tality of  man  by  pictures,  such  as  the  translation  of  Enoch,  the  trans- 
figuration on  the  mount,  the  parable  of  the  rich  man  and  Lazarus,  the 
vision  of  Stephen,  and  the  apocalyptic  visions  of  the  seer  on  Patmos ; 
in  these  pictures  the  veil  of  the  invisible  world  is  drawn  aside  and  we 
are  allowed  to  look  in  upon  some  who  died  on  earth,  and  behold  them 
alive  forever  more.  (3)  The  Bible  teaches  the  immortality  of  man  by 
dogmatic  assertions,  as  in  such  declarations  as  ‘This  mortal  must  put 
on  immortality.’  (4)  Finally  the  story  of  Christ,  if  it  has  a shred  of 
truth  in  it,  demonstrates  the  hope  of  immortality.14 

These  words  give  a much  fairer  representation  of  the  char- 
acter of  Biblical  teaching  on  the  subject  of  immortality 
than  do  the  words  of  Professor  Herrmann. 

As  to  what  he  says  of  man’s  goal,  the  goal  to  which  God 
is  moving  him,  Herrmann  is  vague  and  unconvincing.  His 
teaching  can  not  validly  come  out  of  his  mere  confidence  in 
God,  unless  he  has  taken  the  measure  of  the  Infinite  in  mind 
and  heart.  He  also  leaves  much  to  be  said.  Compare  intima- 
tions about  the  goal  of  a part  of  our  sinful  race  intimated 
in  John  iii.36  and  other  such  passages. 

Herrmann  is  singularly  unconvincing  in  his  attempt  to 
develop  his  doctrine  out  of  his  “faith,”  or  “confidence,”  in 
God. 


14  See  The  Christian’s  Hope  by  Robert  Alexander  Webb,  pp.  35-36. 


384  the  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

III.  Sin  and  Its  Consequences 

This  head  comes  logically  to  be  considered  under  the  gen- 
eral head  of  anthropology;  but  for  convenience  it  is  given 
a separate  consideration. 

Herrmann  says,  of  the  initial  form  of  sin: 

To  comprehend  the  origin  of  sin  is  impossible  to  us;  yet  we  can  and 
must  make  clear  to  ourselves  the  primary  form  of  sin.  The  spiritual 
attitude  in  which  unbelief  and  selfishness  are  as  yet  only  implicit,  but 
which  is  already  in  every  case  an  indication  of  insincerity,  is  devotion 
to  the  pleasures  of  sense,  or  sloth.  Under  the  rule  of  God  there  should 
be  formed  in  us  God’s  image,  that  is,  the  power  of  a love  which  through 
self-denial  creates  something  new.  This  work  of  God  is  checked  in  us  by 
slothful  devotion  to  pleasures  of  sense.15 

Herrmann  makes  the  slothful  devotion  to  the  pleasures 
of  sense  to  have  been  the  incipient  form  of  sin.  This  indi- 
cates that  he  has  looked  in  the  right  direction  at  this  point. 
“The  fall  of  man  occurred,  apparently  through  a sin  of 
omission,  through  man’s  failure  to  be  everlastingly  on  the 
alert  to  do  duty.  Created  with  a duplex  end,  of  doing  duty, 
and  being  happy,  and  living  in  surroundings  where  every 
prospect  pleased  it  was  easy  for  man  to  find  delight  in  sen- 
suous impressions  and  to  slide  into  slothful  devotion  to  the 
pleasures  of  sense.”  It  should  be  noted  that  Herrmann  gives, 
in  the  latter  part  of  the  passage  just  quoted,  a picture  of 
the  first  man  which  is  unhistorical.  He  pictures  man  as  not 
originally  created  in  the  image  of  God,  but  as  being  in  duty 
bound  to  work  out  in  himself  that  image.  In  thus  picturing 
man,  he  involves  himself  in  a fanciful  and  false  psycho- 
logical view  of  “God’s  image.”  Like  certain  evolutionists 
he  makes  a thing  evolve  certain  other  things,  the  very  poten- 
tial bases  of  which  are  not  found  in  that  “which  evolves 
them” — a claim  that  is  self-contradictory.  If  man  were  not 
given,  in  his  very  constitution  the  image  of  God  he  could 
never  evolve  it.  What  is  more,  he  runs  counter  to  the  word 
of  God  in  Gen.  i.  26-27,  et  simil,  which,  rationalistic  critics 
to  the  contrary  notwithstanding,  is  the  testimony  of  a wit- 
ness present  and  of  absolute  trustworthiness. 


15  P.  102. 


Herrmann’s  systematic  theology  385 

Herrmann  teaches  also,  that  the  term  guilt  is  sometimes 
used  of  the  sinner’s  relation  to  the  power  whom  he  has 
wronged  in  the  civil  sphere,  which  relation  may  be  swept 
away  by  punishment;  but  he  asserts  that  the  “situation  is 
entirely  different  when  a man  recognizes  his  actions  as  a 
transgression  of  the  moral  law,  or  of  God’s  command- 
ment.” The  moral  consciousness  which  thus  confirms  the 
truth  of  the  moral  law  carries  within  itself  the  inevitable 
necessity  of  self-condemnation,  and  thus  forestalls  the  need 
of  any  external  judgment.  This  sense  of  guilt  felt  by  the 
moral  consciousness  is,  however,  still  more  intensified  when 
we  realize  that  our  sin  has  caused  an  inward  separation 
between  us  and  those  who  are  dear  to  us.  This  applies  with 
special  force  to  the  relations  between  the  religious  man  and 
his  God.16 

Through  our  sins,  we  all  help  to  make  the  fellowship  and  organization 
of  society  sinful.  All  the  members  of  society  are  responsible  for  the  sin 
which  thus  arises.  It  is  therefore  corporate  sin.  . . . From  the  corpo- 
rate sin  of  human  society  there  issues  also  its  inevitable  inheritance. 
Every  man  is  influenced  by  the  corporate  sins  of  earlier  generations 
without  the  possibility  of  defense  against  it.  For  it  is  only  through  being 
brought  up  in  human  society  that  we  become  men.  Now  all  education 
begins  with  a child’s  accepting  the  ideas  and  the  behavior  of  the  adult 
persons,  but  if  these  spiritual  instruments  of  education  have  been  spoiled 
by  sin,  we  imbibe  sin  in  the  course  of  our  education.17 

These  considerations  bring  home  to  the  modern  man  the  inevitable 
necessity  of  the  inheritance  of  sin  more  forcibly  than  did  the  idea  which 
has  dominated  the  church  since  Augustine,  though  it  is  incapable  of 
demonstration  that  sin  is  inherited  by  the  mere  fact  of  physical  descent 
from  parents.18 

Every  individual  is  inevitably  bound  to  be  sinful  from  the  beginning 
of  his  conscious  life,  and  is  equally  bound  to  condemn  himself  for  his 
sin  as  soon  as  his  knowledge  of  the  moral  law  creates  in  him  the  con- 
sciousness of  freedom.  The  incomprehensible  thing  in  all  this,  however, 
is  not  the  fact  of  the  inheritance  of  corruption,  but  the  freewill  which, 
in  spite  of  man’s  dependence  upon  sinful  humanity,  assumes  responsi- 
bility for  his  disharmony  with  the  moral  law.19 

The  judgement  or  punishment  of  sin  is  executed  in  the  earthly  life  of 


16  P.  105. 

17  Pp.  106-107. 

18  P.  106. 

19  Pp.  io8f. 


386  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

the  sinner:  (1)  In  the  inward  compulsion  to  condemn  himself.  (2)  In 
the  knowledge  that  it  is  impossible  for  him  to  deliver  himself  from  sin 
through  his  own  efforts.  (3)  In  the  way  in  which  it  reacts  to  his  lot  in 
life.  The  completed  punishment  of  sin  is  fundamentally  sin  in  its  com- 
pletion. Namely,  a life  actually  lived  for  itself  alone,  or  a life  in  utter 
isolation.  Herein  the  tendency  to  selfishness,  or  to  lovelessness  arrives  at 
its  inevitable  goal.20 

In  this  group  of  quotations  the  position  seems  to  be  taken 
that  the  sinner’s  self-condemnation  forestalls  the  need  of 
any  external  punishment,  but  this  position  is  no  necessary 
inference  from  our  own  inner  self-condemnation.  If  the 
sinner’s  conscience  works  correctly  his  self-condemnation 
for  an  evil  act — if  it  recognizes  that  the  act  was  wrong, 
and  if  it  brings  regret— this  self-condemnation  and  regret 
by  no  means  vindicate  the  law  adequately.  The  law  had  a 
penalty.  That  penalty  is  not  paid  by  the  sinner’s  saying: 
“I  have  sinned.”  Suppose  the  sinner  has  murdered  his 
brother,  or  has  seduced  his  sister,  or  looted  a bank,  or  be- 
trayed a trust,  his  condemnation  of  himself  for  his  sin  is 
not  a satisfaction  for  it.  True,  self-condemnation  and  con- 
fession were  in  order,  but  to  confess  is  not  to  bring  to  life 
the  slain  brother  or  to  restore  to  purity  his  sister,  or  to 
make  good  the  injury  inflicted  by  the  stolen  property.  To 
condemn  oneself  is  not  to  undo  the  dishonor  done  to  God 
in  the  breaking  of  His  moral  law.  If  aught  of  punishment 
be  involved  in  the  sinner’s  self-condemnation,  it  is  by  no 
means  the  whole  of  that  punishment.  It  is  indeed  a small 
part  of  it.  Sin  dishonors  God.  The  sin  of  unbelief  dis- 
honors Him.  “He  that  obeyeth  not  the  Son  shall  not  see 
life  but  the  wrath  of  God  abideth  on  him.”  Here  is  some- 
thing outside  the  sinner,  the  wrath  of  God  which  must 
needs  have  expression.  If  Herrmann  has  respect  for  the 
Bible,  the  Bible  shows  that  God’s  external  wrath  comes 
upon  transgressors  or  on  their  substitute.  It  came  on  Cain, 
came  on  the  antediluvians,  came  on  the  cities  of  the  plain, 
came  on  Egypt,  came  on  apostatizing  Israel,  over  and  over 
again.  It  is  to  come  on  all  who  have  not  been  covered  by 


20  Pp.  iogi. 


Herrmann’s  systematic  theology  387 

the  blood  of  the  substitute.  “The  soul  that  sinneth  it  shall 
die.”  Death  comes  as  judgment.  God  sends  it  now  permis- 
sively  now  efficaciously.  If  He  is  immanent  in,  He  is  also 
transcendant  to,  man.  If  God  be  just  He  must  see  to  it  that 
some  of  His  rational  creatures  shall  be  punished.  Some  are 
very  wicked  and  repent  not.  Our  argument  is  from  Scrip- 
ture, which  Herrmann  professes  to  have  a measure  of  re- 
spect for. 

There  is  also  a good  deal  said  about  “inherited  sin,”  but 
the  discussion  is  all  about  sin,  induced  on  occasion  of  birth, 
into  sinful  families,  by  education,  so  that  we  find  ourselves 
in  company  with  an  author  out  of  sympathy  with  Calvin, 
Augustine,  Paul,  John,  and  Christ — in  company  with  one 
who  has  not  a little  in  common  with  Pelagians,  Unitarians 
et  id  omne  genus. 

In  others  of  these  quotations,  Herrmann  would  substi- 
tute for  the  old  distinction  between  potential  guilt  and  actual 
guilt,  that  is,  between  ill  desert  for  a wicked  state  or  act,  and 
doomedness  to  punishment  by  the  ruler  for  that  act — would 
substitute  for  this  distinction  the  following:  the  guilt 
“which  is  the  responsibility  of  a man  for  his  wicked  estate 
or  act”  and  “the  guilt  which  is  the  relation  of  the  sinner 
to  the  power  which  he  has  wronged,  which,  if  punished,  is 
to  be  considered  as  removed.”  He  seems  to  teach,  as  we  have 
seen,  that  God  never  in  any  way  punishes  externally  breaches 
of  the  moral  law. 

To  hold  any  such  views  he  must  have  cast  away  as  un- 
worthy large  portions  of  Old  and  New  Testament  history 
and  prophecy.  He  should  read  Isaiah,  the  fifty-first  psalm, 
and  the  whole  Old  and  the  whole  New  Testament.  True 
the  most  aAvful  punishment  of  sin  is  the  natural  fruit  of 
sin.  God  as  ruler  of  the  universe  ought  to  punish  sin.  He 
provided  in  the  very  constitution  of  the  human  being  and 
the  world  that  the  sinner  shall  reap  as  he  sows. 

Herrmann  takes  no  note  of  God’s  laying  all  the  guilt  of 
sins  of  the  Christian  on  Jesus  Christ,  of  Christ’s  paying  our 
penal  indebtedness,  thus,  bearing  away  our  doomedness  to 
penalty. 


388 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


On  the  whole  his  treatment  of  sin  is  inadequate  and  feeble 
and  unscriptural. 

IV.  SOTERIOLOGY 

In  the  earlier  pages  in  his  chapter  on  “The  redemption 
through  Jesus  Christ,”  Professor  Herrmann  reviews  briefly, 
and  with  more  or  less  error,  earlier  efforts  to  set  forth  the 
doctrine  of  redemption,  including  Ritschl’s  which  on  the 
whole  seems  to  please  him  most ; and  on  Ritschl’s  effort  he 
attempts  what  he  regards  as  an  improvement. 

He  teaches  that  Jesus  Christ  has  the  power  to  redeem  us 
by  personally  convincing  us  that  God  will  accept  us.  If  He 
become  our  redeemer,  Herrmann  says  : 

We  must  have  discovered  in  Him  that  one  thing  which  awakens  pure 
love  and  pure  fear  in  us,  or  which  can  have  complete  sway  over  our  soul. 
But  our  redemption  by  this  experience  of  the  power  of  Jesus  always  de- 
pends upon  whether  we  ourselves  desire  deliverance  from  sin;  for  we 
remain  in  the  power  of  sin,  if  we  do  not  completely  submit  ourselves 
to  the  power  that  is  manifested  in  Jesus,  but  try  to  withdraw  ourselves 
from  it.  We  recognize  it  to  be  the  inevitable  consequence  of  the  sense 
of  guilt  that  the  sinner  avoids  all  that  brings  God  near  him — God  whose 
judgement  he  fears,  hence  the  question  arises  how,  in  spite  of  this  cir- 
cumstance, it  is  possible  for  the  power  which  touches  us  in  the  person 
of  Jesus  to  unite  us  to  God,  or  how  we  receive  through  Him  the  npocr- 
aywyrjv  irpos  rov  Oeov  (the  access  to  God)  to  which  Paul  testifies  (Rom. 
v.  2,  Eph.  ii.18,  iii.12).21 

It  is  the  quiet  power  of  His  person  which  produces  in 
certain  sinners  “profound  penitence  and  therewith  the  cour- 
age to  trust  Him.”  22 

It  is  to  be  noticed  that  our  redemption  is,  according  to 
this  teacher,  “by  an  experience  of  the  poiver  of  Jesus  ” by 
having  “discovered  in  Him  that  one  thing  which  awakens 
pure  love  and  pure  fear  in  us,  or  which  has  complete  sway 
over  our  souls.”  It  is  to  be  noticed  that  “our  redemption  by 
this  experience  . . . always  depends  upon  whether  we  our- 
selves desire  deliverance  from  sin.” 

From  these  words  it  appears  that  in  Herrmann’s  view 
salvation  is  synergistic,  that  God  and  man  must  work  it 


21  Pp.  ii5if. 

22  Pp.  ii7f. 


Herrmann’s  systematic  theology  389 

out  together  even  in  its  initial  stages.  If  he  be  correct,  then 
the  natural  man  cannot  be  spiritually  dead,  and  Paul’s  talk 
of  man’s  being  dead  in  trespasses  and  in  sins  is  an  exag- 
geration; and  Christ’s  teaching  about  the  necessity  of  being 
born  again,  must  be  incorrect. 

From  these  words  it  appears  also  that,  in  Herrmann’s 
view,  if  the  natural  man  needs  regeneration,  that  regenera- 
tion must  be  by  moral  suasion.  The  Biblical  view  is  that 
regeneration  is  by  recreation.  Once  more  it  is  clear  from 
these  words  that  Herrmann  needs  to  make  clear  for  him- 
self the  Biblical  distinctions  between  regeneration,  justifica- 
tion, and  sanctification  and  between  these  graces  and  their 
fruits. 

The  confusion  into  which  he  frequently  falls  is  almost 
inevitable  unless  he  make  and  keep  clearly  before  him  these 
distinctions.  That  he  cannot  reach  these  distinctions  merely 
by  the  use  of  his  experience  of  the  power  of  the  person 
Jesus  Christ  is  proof  that  he  has  endeavored  the  impracti- 
cable in  trying  to  deduce  the  doctrines  of  the  Christian  re- 
ligion out  of  this  “experience  of  the  power  of  the  person 
Jesus.” 

Herrmann  teaches  that  the  forgiveness  of  sins  may  be 
obtained  through  the  power  of  the  person  of  Jesus;  not  by 
His  satisfying  divine  justice  but  simply  by  His  showing 
the  infinitely  loving  character  of  God.  He  points  to  2 Cor. 
v.18,  “And  all  things  are  of  God,  Who  hath  reconciled  us 
to  himself  by  Jesus  Christ,”  and  asserts  that  the  “work  of 
Jesus  is  not  to  reconcile  God,  but  the  result  of  God’s  own 
working  in  order  to  reconcile  sinners,”  that,  in  the  second 
place,  “it  is  a fundamental  conception  of  Biblical  piety  that 
God’s  goodness  comes  to  meet  every  sinner  who  would  re- 
turn to  Him.  . . . For  Jesus  Himself  it  must  have  been 
inconceivable  that  His  work  was  necessary  to  effect  a change 
in  God’s  attitude  to  sinners.” 

Dr.  Charles  Hodge  takes  a much  more  tenable  view  of 
2 Cor.  v.18. 


To  reconcile  is  to  remove  enmity  between  parties  at  variance  with  each 


390 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


other.  In  this  case  God  is  the  reconciler.  Man  never  makes  reconciliation. 
It  is  what  he  experiences  or  embraces,  not  what  he  does.  The  enmity 
between  God  and  man,  the  barrier  which  separated  them  is  removed  by 
the  act  of  God.  This  is  plain  (i)  Because  it  is  said  to  be  effected  by 
Jesus  Christ,  that  is,  by  His  death.  The  death  of  Christ,  however,  is 
always  represented  as  reconciling  us  to  God  as  a sacrifice;  the  design 
and  nature  of  sacrifice  are  to  propitiate  and  not  to  reform.  (2)  In  the 
parallel  passage,  Romans  v.  9-10,  “Being  reconciled  by  the  death  of  His 
son,”  is  interchanged  as  equivalent  with  “being  justified  by  His  blood,” 
which  proves  that  the  reconciliation  intended  consists  in  the  satisfaction 
of  the  divine  justice  by  the  sacrifice  of  Christ.  In  this  case  our  reconcilia- 
tion to  God  is  made  the  source  and  cause  of  our  new  creation,  i.e.,  of 
our  regeneration  and  holiness.  God’s  reconciliation  to  us  must  precede 
our  reconciliation  to  Him.  This  is  the  great  Bible  doctrine.23 

According  to  Herrmann  the  willing  surrender  of  His 
life  to  death  by  powers  of  evil  was  the  means  required  by 
God  of  Jesus  that  He  might  bring  help  to  sinful  man,  and 
the  love  of  God  displayed  in  this  infinitely  tender  way 
brings  at  least  some  persons  to  Jesus  in  deep  penitence.  But 
unless  the  suffering  of  Jesus  can  be  explained  as  demanded  in 
justice  of  Him  as  the  sinner’s  substitute,  then  God  appears  to 
be  an  unjust  God. 

Herrmann  teaches  in  a sort  of  hazy  fashion  that  “the 
power  of  the  person  of  Jesus  Christ”  in  working  faith  in 
us  also  works  belief  in  Christ’s  resurrection  from  the  dead 
and  in  His  present  exalted  Lordship;  both  which  teachings 
he  holds  are  confirmed  by  the  apostolic  traditions.  Here 
again  he  surrenders  a strong  historical  position;  he  cannot 
logically  establish  the  position  he  has  chosen. 

Herrmann  has  in  his  book  a caption : “The  Eternal  Elec- 
tion of  the  Faithful.”  He  says  “that  the  believer  knows 
himself  to  be  eternally  elected  as  indicated  by  Paul”  (Rom. 
viii.  28-30).  He  follows  this  pertinent  citation  with  remarks 
that  weaken — though  intended  to  strengthen  the  position. 
He  guards  against  his  being  misunderstood  by  saying,  “On 
the  other  hand,  the  doctrine  of  a double  predestination 
which,  following  Rom.  ix-xi,  Luther  and  Calvin  developed 
even  more  crudely  than  Augustine,  has  no  basis  in  faith, 


23  Charles  Hodge,  Commentary  on  II  Corinthians,  in  loco. 


HERRMANN  S SYSTEMATIC  THEOLOGY 


391 


but  is  an  attempt  to  solve  a problem  which  does  not  arise 
from  faith  and  for  which  faith  has  no  solution.”  24 

This  is  serious  reflection  on  the  Word  of  God  as  well  as 
on  three  great  uninspired  thinkers.  It  is  followed  by  a para- 
graph of  confusion  and  assumption  as  to  what  Scripture 
is,  and  as  to  his  ability  to  interpret  it : 

But  the  fact  that  the  Bible  contains  such  a development  of  thought 
as  we  find  preeminently  in  Romans  ix.  20-23  should  also  subserve  our  sal- 
vation, if  it  brings  us  to  the  question  whether  we  are  prepared  to  follow 
Scripture  even  in  that  which  we  can  not  understand  to  be  a notion  rooted 
in  our  faith.  If  we  decide  to  do  this,  we  are  treating  the  Bible  as  a law 
book  which  requires  from  us  external  obedience.  This  is  what  the  Roman 
church  does.  This  is  its  loyalty  to  Scripture.  But  in  reality  this  marks 
a falling  away  from  the  fundamental  idea  of  Scripture ; for  a faith  that 
repudiates  such  a law  is  thereby  denied  to  be  faith.  There  could  be  no 
grosser  misuse  of  Scripture  than  this,  for  Scripture  was  given  us  for 
the  awakening  of  faith,  and  so  only  is  it  a means  to  our  salvation.25 

Surely  there  is  a great  want  of  clarity  of  thought  here. 
“Are  we  prepared  to  follow  Scripture  even  in  that  which 
we  cannot  understand  to  be  a notion  rooted  in  our  faith?” 
he  asks.  He  leaves  us  to  suppose  that  he  means  by  faith, 
confidence  or  trust  in  God  produced  in  us  by  the  power  of 
the  person  of  Jesus.  Certainly  John  Smith  may  not  be  able 
to  see  that  trust  in  God  would  alone  insure  our  belief  in  the 
vital  union  of  believers  and  Christ,  and  that  God  may  yet 
through  inspired  men  teach  us  that  such  a union  is  possible. 

We  suppose  Professor  Herrmann  would  say,  that  there 
is  no  infallible  teaching  unless  it  be  in  his  school!  He  has 
no  warrant  for  most  of  his  teaching  save  his  subjective 
view.  The  Bible  has  a certain  value,  but  a very  limited 
value  to  him.  He  can  not  frame  a convincing  argument  be- 
cause his  premises  are  too  exclusively  subjective. 

If  he  wanted  to  make  a stand  for  Christianity,  he  should 
have  given  himself  to  a vindication  of  the  historical  trust- 
worthiness of  the  Bible,  or  a part  of  it.  Instead  he  has  built 
a fabric  of  dreams. 

False  philosophies,  hostile  to  the  supernatural,  turned 


24  P.  134. 

25  P.  134- 


392 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


rational  critics  into  rationalistic,  destructive  critics.  The 
destructive  critics  have  terrorized  schools  of  Christians  here 
and  there  who  would  hold  “Christianity”  with  the  heart 
whether,  or  not,  they  could  hold  it  with  the  head.  One  such 
school  is  that  of  the  Ritschlians.  For  this  school  Herrmann 
has  spoken.  Necessarily  he  has  shown  but  little  of  the  real 
content  of  Christianity.  Instead  of  this  poor  defense  of 
“Christianity”  or  stand  for  what  the  Ritschlian  thought  he 
could  hold,  he  should  have  gone  back  to  the  root  of  the 
matter,  overthrown  the  false  philosophy,  trampled  down  the 
false  higher  criticism  (there  is,  of  course,  a perfectly  legiti- 
mate higher  criticism),  vindicated  a historically  trustworthy 
supernatural  revelation  of  truth;  and  drawn  the  truth  re- 
vealed in  our  Holy  Scriptures  forth  into  a system.  A system 
so  constructed,  would  probably  be  very  like  that  drawn  out 
by  the  great  reformers;  but  notwithstanding  its  lack  of 
amazing  novelty,  would  have  blessed  the  world  as  Rit- 
schlianism  never  can. 

Herrmann’s  Theology  cannot  be  much  in  the  way  of  the- 
ology. It  has  too  little  materials  with  which  to  build  a the- 
ology— only  what  faith,  confidence  in  God,  gives.  He  may 
give  the  Scriptures  of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments  nominal 
places  as  quarries  for  materials,  but  before  his  subjective 
view  the  Scriptures  are  clipped  away,  or  are  metamorphosed 
until  their  authors  would  not  recognize  them.  He  rejects 
the  doctrine  of  the  Trinity  found  alike  in  the  Romish, 
Greek  Orthodox,  and  Protestant  churches  and  in  the  Scrip- 
tures. He  claims  to  hold  an  economic  Trinity.  He  knows 
nothing  of  three  personalities  of  the  Godhead  existing  con- 
temporaneously. God,  he  thinks,  can  function  in  three  dif- 
ferent ways  and  so  functioning  can  be  described  as  three- 
fold. He  holds  that  the  preexistence  of  Christ  taught  by 
John,  by  Paul,  and  by  the  writer  of  the  Epistle  to  the  He- 
brews is  merely  the  subjective  conception  of  those  worthies. 
He  never  seems  to  reflect  that  what  they  teach  about  those 
religious  concepts  which  he  shares  with  them  may  be  merely 
subjective.  He  seems  to  have  held  with  Ritschl,  his  master, 


Herrmann’s  systematic  theology  393 

that  the  only  real  preexistence  of  Christ  was  in  the  fore- 
knowledge and  predestination  of  God.  He  teaches  that  man 
comes  into  existence  without  sin,  that  he  becomes  univer- 
sally sinful  owing  to  teaching  and  example;  that  he  can 
justify  himself  by  enrolling  in  the  body  of  Christ,  subjec- 
tively; but  that  what  God  is,  what  Christ,  what  the  resur- 
rection is,  are  of  small  importance;  that  Christianity  is  true 
if  it  corresponds  to  the  needs  of  men  and  they  believe  it; 
that  the  feeling  of  personal  worth  demands  that  the  world 
be  worthy  of  it,  etc.,  etc. 

Is  this  Christianity  or  is  it,  even  if  ingenious,  nevertheless 
a beggar’s  basket  of  dreams,  perversions  of  Scripture,  and 
empty  assertions? 

Richmond,  Va. 


Thos.  Cary  Johnson 


DOES  THE  ROMAN  CHURCH  TEACH  THE 
DOCTRINE  OF  RELIGIOUS 
PERSECUTION  ?* 

There  are  three  sources  of  authoritative  teaching  in  the 
Roman  communion,  the  pope,  the  bishops  in  a general 
council  lawfully  assembled,  the  bishops  (and  priests)  in 
their  character  of  theologians  dispersed  throughout  the 
world.  It  is  not  absolutely  necessary,  therefore,  that  one 
should  be  able  to  produce  a papal  encyclical  or  canon  or  de- 
cree of  a general  council  confirmed  by  the  pope  in  order  to 
prove  that  the  Roman  Church  officially  teaches  the  doctrine 
of  religious  persecution;  it  is  only  necessary  to  show  that 
popes  have  issued  persecuting  bulls  and  that  Roman  theo- 
logians have  taught  the  doctrine  with  more  or  less  moral 
unanimity  for  centuries  and  have  almost  always  put  it  in 
practice  wherever  they  have  had  political  power  to  do  so. 
And  as  there  is  nothing  of  which  Rome  makes  such  capital  as 
the  continuity  and  permanency  of  her  own  doctrine,  there 
can  be  no  doubt  of  the  permanency  and  official  character  of  a 
doctrine  which,  prevailing  in  the  days  of  Saints  Augustine 
and  Jerome,  has  continued  in  undiminished  theoretical  force 
and  approval,  down  to  our  own  time,  in  spite  of  the  fact  that 
under  stress  of  particular  circumstances  some  few  Catholic 
priests  and  Catholic  laymen  have  boldly  repudiated  every 
kind  of  persecution  in  the  name  of  religion  and  conscience. 
Numbers  of  saints  worshipped  by  the  faithful  in  special 
masses  dedicated  to  their  honor  by  papal  authority  have 
taught  the  doctrine  of  religious  persecution.  Religious  perse- 
cution is  enshrined  in  the  Summa  of  St.  Thomas  Aquinas 
and  has  not  been  eliminated  from  the  English  translation  of 
that  work  made  expressly  for  Protestants  and  lay-Catholics 
by  the  spiritual  sons  of  St.  Dominic.  This  fact  is  particularly 
arresting,  namely,  that  the  doctrine  of  religious  persecution 
has  been  literally  transferred  from  the  Latin  text  of  St. 

* This  article  is  by  the  same  author  as  the  one  on  “The  Roman 
Doctrine  of  the  Sacrament  of  Penance”  which  appeared  in  the  last  issue 
of  this  Review. 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION  395 

Thomas  to  an  English  equivalent,  when  we  remember  that 
Roman  apologists  try  to  empty  the  terms  persequar  and  im- 
pugnabo1  found  in  the  oath  taken  by  every  Roman  bishop 
at  his  consecration,  of  their  persecuting  content,  assigning 
to  them  as  they  stand  in  the  oath,  only  those  meanings  which 
fall  short  of  physical  punishments.  We  find,  however,  that 
persequar  not  only  expresses  the  persecuting  doctrine  but  is 
adopted  from  the  persecuting  Psalms  and  is  inserted  in  the 
prayers  of  the  Missal  in  the  literal  sense  of  inflicting  physical 
suffering  and  even  death.  We  find  persequar  in  the  Introit  of 
the  Mass  in  honor  of  St.  Stephen,  the  proto-martyr,  and  in  the 
Introit  of  the  Mass  of  FeriaSexta  following  Passion  Sunday, 
and  in  the  title  or  heading  of  the  Post  Communion  Prayer, 
in  the  Introit  of  the  Mass  of  Feria  Sexta  following  Passion 
Sunday,  and  in  the  title  or  heading  of  the  Post  Prayer, 
Quaesumus,  for  Feria  Quinta  of  the  same  week,  and  in  the 
prayer  against  the  persecutors  of  the  Church  for  the  second 
Sunday  after  Epiphany,  and  also  in  other  places.  One  cannot 
accept  that  kind  of  apology  in  emptying  a word  of  its  pri- 
mary meaning  w'hen  we  remember  that  the  term  has  come 
down  to  us  in  the  episcopal  oath  from  the  time  when  their 
lordships  were  veritable  persecutors  and  therefore  in  the 
sense  that  it  then  had. 

Incontestable  historical  evidence  warns  Protestants,  not  to 
accept  by  preference,  much  as  charity  would  commend  it  to 
them,  the  milder  meanings  which  Latin  dictionaries  also  give 
to  these  terms.  The  law  of  self-preservation  demands  that 
Protestants  never  forget  that  eternal  vigilance  is  the  price 
which  they  must  pay  for  liberty.  Heretics,  schismatics,  and 
rebels  to  the  pope,  and  to  his  successors,  are  to  be  followed 
up,  assailed,  attacked,  and  hunted  down,  as  far  as  possible 
not  merely  by  argument,  logic  and  sweet  reasonableness, 
and  the  truthful  facts  of  history,  but  moreover,  whenever 
and  wherever  it  can  be  done  consistently  with  the  salvation 
of  the  state,  the  bishops  must  also  use  force.  This  is  the  only 
sane,  wise,  and  rational  interpretation  to  be  placed  upon  the 


1 1 am  quoting  the  terms  of  the  oath. 


396  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

oath,  for  an  ounce  of  fact  is  worth  more  than  a mountain 
of  assertion,  or  a volume  of  logic.  We  have  only  to  look  into 
the  Theologica  Dogmatica  et  Moralis  used  as  a text-book 
in  sixty-seven  theological  seminaries  in  France,  to  be  con- 
vinced of  the  unwisdom  of  accepting  a mild  interpretation 
for  the  bishops’  oath.  From  that  text-book  was  read  in 
the  Parliament  of  France  to  the  amazement  of  its  mem- 
bers the  following:  “The  Church  has  received  from  God 
the  power  to  force  or  repress  those  who  wander  from  the 
truth  not  only  by  spiritual  penalties  but  also,  by  temporal 
ones.  . . . These  are  prison,  flagellation,  torture,  mutilation, 
death.”  Again:  “If  in  a country  the  unity  of  Catholic  faith 
reigns,  the  state  must  not  neglect  anything  to  drive  away 
novelties  of  doctrines  and  sophistries.  In  such  a state  heresy 
is  a public  crime  because  everything  which  is  done  against 
the  divine  religion  touches  all  the  members  of  society.”2 
“Toleration,”  said  Froude,  “is  the  genius  of  Protestantism,” 
and  Father  Tom  Burke  answered  him  by  saying:  “I  am  not 
only  a Catholic  but  a priest,  not  only  a priest  but  a monk,  not 
only  a monk  but  a Dominican  monk,  and  from  out  of  the  depths 
of  my  soul,  I repel  and  repudiate  the  principles  of  religious 
persecution  for  any  cause  in  any  land.”  Father  Burke  did  not 
live  to  see  the  public  libraries  of  America  containing  on 
their  shelves  in  an  English  text  for  the  consumption  of 
American  Protestants  the  persecuting  doctrines  of  his  mas- 
ter, St.  Thomas  of  Aquin,  and  the  same  developed  at  con- 
siderable length  by  a host  of  Roman  professors,  theologians, 
canonists  and  philosophers,  and  writers  of  tracts  for  Catho- 
lic Truth  Societies,  of  whom  the  Knights  of  Columbus  are 
the  main  support. 

One  might  be  impressed  by  the  teaching  on  the  supreme 
independent  authority  of  church  and  state  in  the  encyclical 
letters  of  Pope  Leo  XIII,  were  it  not  that  when  we  look  into 
Rome’s  approved  text-books  on  theology,  philosophy,  and 
canon  law,  we  find  it  there  taught  that  the  state  ought  to  con- 
demn in  doctrine  and  morals  whatever  the  Roman  Church 


Bracqu,  France  Under  the  Republic. 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION 


397 


condemns  and  approve  only  what  the  Church  approves.  We 
find  it  there  taught  that  all  teaching  not  in  harmony  with 
the  teaching  of  the  Roman  Church,  is  an  evil  in  itself,  which 
the  state  can  tolerate  only  to  avoid  greater  evils.  Wherever 
and  whenever  the  state  can  conveniently  prohibit  such  teach- 
ing it  is  bound  to  do  so.  We  find  it  there  taught  that  the 
gravest  duty  rests  upon  the  state  to  make  the  Roman  Catholic 
religion  to  be  observed  externally  at  least  by  all  its  citizens 
when  doing  so  will  not  menace  the  welfare  of  the  state 
itself.  We  find  it  there  taught  that  liberty  of  conscience 
founded  on  the  individual  reason  and  judgment  is  an  impious 
principle,  self-contradictory,  resting  on  political  atheism,  and 
is  especially  destructive  to  society.  It  is  there  taught  that  for 
Catholics  to  teach  liberty  of  worship  or  liberty  of  conscience 
is  both  absurd  and  impious.  It  is  there  taught  that  the 
Church  has  the  right  of  applying  force.  It  is  there  taught  that 
the  Church  enjoys  temporal  as  distinct  from  spiritual  power. 
It  is  there  taught  that  the  Church  has  external  jurisdiction 
to  inflict  temporal  punishment,  because  not  the  souls  only, 
but  also  the  bodies  of  the  faithful,  are  under  the  jurisdiction 
of  the  Church,  and  because  spiritual  punishment  alone  is  not 
sufficient  to  bring  the  unruly  into  obedience  to  her  will.  It  is 
there  taught  that  temporal  punishment  embraces  fines, 
scourgings,  tortures,  imprisonment,  and  even  death.  It  is 
there  taught  that  the  authority  enjoyed  by  the  Church  in 
the  Middle  Ages  and  expressly  or  tacitly  conceded  by  civil 
rulers  is  not  revocable  at  the  will  of  the  civil  power.  And 
finally  it  is  taught  that  all  persons  validly  baptized,  whenso- 
ever, and  by  whomsoever,  even  by  a Jew  or  pagan  acting  in 
that  capacity  even  unconsciously  and  unintentionally  as  min- 
isters of  the  Roman  Church,  are  thus  made  subjects  of  the 
pope,  amenable  both  to  his  temporal  and  spiritual  authority. 

This  doctrine  universally  taught  all  over  the  Roman  com- 
munion essentially  involves  not  only  the  spirit  of  persecution 
but  persecution  itself,  in  its  worst  forms,  wherever  the  same 
is  practicable.  In  the  face  of  it,  it  is  impossible  for  Protes- 
tants not  to  doubt  whether  the  official  Roman  Church  rec- 


398  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

ognizes  any  such  thing  as  liberty  of  conscience  in  the  best 
and  most  orthodox  sense.  Persecuted  heretics  were  people 
who,  obeying  the  counsels  of  the  apostle,  were  persuaded 
in  their  own  minds  of  the  truth  of  the  doctrines  which  they 
held.  They  lived  up  to  the  light  that  was  in  them,  were  always 
prepared  to  embrace  a higher  and  clearer  light  when  that 
gift  should  be  vouchsafed  them,  and  died,  loving  God  above 
all  things,  under  the  combined  force  of  church  and  state. 
Who  is  there  that  does  not  know  that  Rome’s  theoretical 
doctrine  of  the  supremacy  of  conscience  has  always  been 
reduced  to  a nullity  in  practice  so  long  as  she  has  had  politi- 
cal power.  There  is  nothing  to  be  gained  by  retorting  this 
argument  against  the  Protestant  world,  for  the  Protestant 
world  (of  sectism)  has  never  laid  claim  to  any  of  the  exclu- 
sive attributes  of  the  Roman  Church,  such  as  being  the  ex- 
clusive Kingdom  of  Christ,  having  exclusive  authority  as 
supreme  and  infallible  teacher,  having  the  exclusive  treas- 
ury of  all  Christ’s  graces,  exclusive  administration  of  the 
same,  exclusive  rights  to  the  guardianship  and  interpreta- 
tion of  the  Bible,  and  so  on. 

Protestants  remembering  all  these  claims  and  examining 
them  in  the  light  of  the  history  of  the  Roman  communion  in 
every  country  through  the  centuries,  fail  to  find  anywhere 
made  manifest  in  the  lives  of  Catholics,  either  in  the  past  or 
present,  the  superiority  of  the  Catholic  over  the  Protestant 
religion.  All  history  witnesses  to  the  fact  that  the  Catholic 
clergy  of  all  grades  were  the  real  authors  of  all  the  persecu- 
tions which  sullied  the  reigns  of  the  wisest  and  best,  as  well  as 
the  worst  of  Catholic  rulers.  The  history  of  the  papacy  itself, 
i.e.,  of  the  Court  of  Rome  from  the  ninth  to  the  eighteenth 
century  inclusive,  constitutes  some  of  the  most  painful  read- 
ing in  all  history.  Decree  after  decree  of  intolerance  and  per- 
secution issued  from  the  Chair  of  Peter  during  that  period 
which  drenched  the  earth  with  the  blood  of  martyrs.  Buckle 
tells  us  that  for  one  intolerant  passage  in  Protestant  theology 
it  would  be  easy  to  point  out  twenty  in  Catholic  theology.3 


3 Buckle,  History  of  Civilization,  p.  314. 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION  399 

If  that  was  true  when  Buckle  wrote,  it  is  still  more  true 
today.  There  are  now  no  writers  in  the  Protestant  churches 
corresponding,  in  their  teaching  on  intolerance  to  heretics, 
to  those  in  the  Roman  communion  of  recent  date,  such  as 
Vincent  and  Perrone  and  Lepicier  and  Palma,  and  de  Luca 
and  Baudillart  and  Schraedar  and  Schneeman  and  Zigliara 
and  Ryan  and  Knox.  I am  naming  only  a few  and  these 
men  in  the  highest  repute  in  their  respective  religious  orders 
where  the  real  spirit  of  Romanism  is  to  be  found,  all  of 
whom  have  written  in  our  time  and  make  known  to  us,  with 
startling  and  amazing  boldness,  the  intolerant  and  persecut- 
ing doctrines  of  their  church.  And  let  the  reader  not  forget 
that  the  works  in  which  these  doctrines  are  taught  are  used 
as  text-books  in  almost  all  seminaries  where  men  are  edu- 
cated for  the  Roman  priesthood.  Their  influence  is  seen  even 
upon  the  minds  of  such  Catholic  lay-writers  as  O’Rahilly  in 
Ireland,  Hilaire  Belloc  and  G.  Elliot  Anstruther  in  England, 
not  to  go  to  Europe,  where  there  is  an  army  of  them.  Pro- 
fessor O’Rahilly  defends  assassination  in  Ireland  by  appeal- 
ing to  the  theological  teaching  of  the  Middle  Ages.  Hilaire 
Belloc4  tells  us  with  extreme  nonchalance  that  all  the  evils 
of  the  present  industrial  system  will  “slowly  indeed  but 
effectually”  disappear  as  soon  as  society  will  adopt  the  Ro- 
man system  of  doctrine  and  government  “with  its  full  con- 
sequences, conscious  and  sub-conscious,  upon  every  human 
action  and  upon  the  framing  of  laws.”  He  tells  us  that  “the 
erection  of  society  upon  Catholic  lines  makes  for  the  destruc- 
tion of  servitude  in  every  form”;  while  Mr.  Anstruther 
admits  that  the  Inquisition  was  “a  joint  tribunal  of  Church 
and  State,”  and  that  the  Roman  Church  “has  claimed  and 
exercised  the  right  to  punish  those  who  deliberately  for- 
sook her  communion.”5  And  Mr.  Anstruther  leaves  his 
readers  to  reconcile  that  proposition  with  another  assertion 
— “The  Catholic  Church  is  not  and  never  has  been  a perse- 
cuting body.  Persecution  in  history  has  characterized  the 


4 The  Church  and  Socialism,  pp.  12-13. 

5 Catholic  Answers  to  Protestant  Charges,  pp.  16-28. 


400 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


official  life  of  Catholic  countries,  the  acts  of  Catholic  kings, 
prelates,  and  individuals,  but  this  is  equally  true  of  Protestant 
states  and  rulers.” 

The  camouflage  in  those  words  of  the  pamphlet  of  the 
“Catholic  Truth  Society”  is  amazing.  Protestants  are  asked 
to  believe  that  the  Roman  Church  was  never  a persecutor  be- 
cause possibly  they  cannot  point  to  a canon  of  a General 
Council  decreeing  persecution  and  confirmed  by  the  reign- 
ing and  subsequent  popes,  even  though  one  may  truthfully 
charge  the  official  life  of  Catholic  countries,  Catholic  kings, 
prelates  and  individuals  with  persecution.  Truly  this  must 
have  been  a consoling  doctrine  to  the  countless  thousands 
who  suffered  from  time  to  time.  One  can  imagine  them  cry- 
ing aloud  in  the  midst  of  their  agonies  and  asking  the  ques- 
tion : “What  in  the  name  of  God  is  the  use  of  an  infallible 
pope  enjoying  the  plenitude  of  jurisdiction  over  the  whole 
Church  if  he  cannot  put  an  end  to  these  fanatical  bishops  of 
his,  who  have  corrupted  kings,  parliaments  and  peoples,  by 
their  false  and  wicked  teaching?  And  wffiy  is  the  Holy  Father 
silent  in  the  midst  of  our  sufferings?  Has  his  silence  no 
meaning  for  us,  nor  for  them  ? Are  we  asked  to  be  thankful 
to  Providence  and  to  his  Holiness  in  our  humble  prayers  be- 
cause he  has  not  come  boldly  out  in  an  encyclical  letter 
confirming  the  persecuting  doctrine  of  his  Catholic  kings, 
parliaments,  and  peoples?  What  in  the  name  of  heaven 
would  it  have  mattered  to  us  if  he  had  done  so;  and  what 
did  it  matter  to  us  that  he  did  not  do  so,  except  that  we 
had  reason  to  believe  from  his  silence  that  he  was  on  the  side 
of  our  enemies?” 

But  the  “Catholic  Truth  Society”  does  not  blush  to  say 
the  Roman  Church  still  claims  that  those  who  leave  her 
from  time  to  time,  or  who  may  possibly  leave  her  at  another 
Reformation  tomorrow,  are  liable  to  any  punishment  includ- 
ing death  in  any  manner,  which  the  Church  combining  her 
forces  with  those  of  the  state,  may  choose  to  inflict  upon 
them.  This  is  certainly  a modest  demand  to  be  made  upon 
Protestants  by  the  “Catholic  Truth  Society.” 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION 


401 


The  statements  of  writers  like  Belloc  and  Anstruther  let 
us  into  the  real,  if  sometimes,  disguised  purpose  of  the  whole 
policy  of  the  Court  of  Rome  and  its  political  and  theological 
machinery.  Times  without  number  her  theologians  have 
said  that  they  had  no  apology  to  offer  for  the  Church’s  con- 
nection with  the  Inquisition  in  any  country  whatever.  This 
attitude  is  the  only  consistent  one  for  men  to  assume  who 
hold  that  the  Church  has  a temporal,  as  well  as  a spir- 
itual sword,  of  divine  right.  It  does  not  at  all  detract  from 
the  doctrine  to  say  that  the  Church  can  only  exercise  the 
temporal  sword  when  the  state  permits  her.  For  the  same 
people  are  the  subjects  both  of  the  Church  and  of  the  state, 
and  although  these  two  powers  are  independent,  so  it  is 
said,  there  can  be  no  doubt  whatever  that  if  ever  Hilaire 
Belloc’s  dream  comes  true,  when  the  Church  and  state  will 
again  be  a moral  unit  in  their  system  of  doctrine  and  govern- 
ment, there  will  be  no  place  in  such  a state  for  the  public  pro- 
fession of  heresy.  The  distinction  which  some  Roman  casuists 
now  make  between  those  born  or  baptized  into  the  Roman 
communion,  and  those  born  and  baptized  out  of  it,  will  then 
find  no  support  whatever.  Given  the  same  conditions  as  in 
the  past  and  the  same  results  must  follow  from  the  same 
doctrines,  for  it  would  be  folly  to  accept,  in  a matter  of  this 
nature,  Macaulay’s  dictum,  namely:  We  cannot  conclude 
from  a man’s  beliefs  to  a man’s  actions. 

The  intolerant  and  persecuting  doctrines  of  Protestants 
have  long  since  been  repudiated  by  them  in  theory  and  in 
practice  in  almost  every  country  of  the  world.  But  the  intol- 
erant and  persecuting  doctrines  of  the  Roman  Church  not 
only  have  never  officially  been  repudiated,  nor  even  unoffi- 
cially, except  by  a few  brave  individuals  here  and  there 
among  clergy  and  laity,  but  are  proclaimed  as  vigorously  as 
ever  in  our  time  with  startling  and  amazing  frankness. 

When  Catholics  were  struggling  for  emancipation  in  Great 
Britain  it  was  the  policy  of  the  bishops  to  let  Daniel  O’Con- 
nell express  himself  at  great  public  meetings  as  follows : “I 
owe  it  to  my  religion  as  a Catholic  and  a Christian,  to  my 


402 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


country  as  an  Irishman,  to  my  feelings  as  a human  being,  to 
utterly  denounce  the  abominable  doctrines  contained  in  the 
Notes  of  this  edition  of  the  Rhemish  New  Testament.  I am 
a Catholic  upon  principle,  but  I would  not  remain  a Catholic 
one  hour  longer  if  I thought  it  essential  to  believe  it  was 
lawful  to  murder  Protestants,  or  that  faith  might  be  inno- 
cently broken  with  heretics.”6  Yet  such  were  the  doctrines 
to  be  deduced  from  the  Notes  to  this  Rhemish  New  Testa- 
ment. 

Now  let  it  be  remembered  that  the  Notes  to  this  Rhemish 
New  Testament  were  the  work  of  theologians  and  com- 
mentators who  must  be  supposed  to  know  the  doctrines  of 
the  Roman  Church  much  better  than  O’Connell  did.  They 
had  moreover  the  imprimatur  of  those  who  were  set  up  in 
the  Church  by  the  pope  himself  as  the  teachers  of  doctrine 
and  the  guardians  of  the  morals  of  the  people,  and  it  cannot 
be  denied  that  the  doctrines  contained  in  the  persecuting 
Notes  of  the  Rhemish  New  Testament  were  in  perfect  accord 
with  the  doctrine  and  practice  of  the  Church  in  the  past  and 
with  the  doctrine  of  the  Church  in  the  present,  as  that  doc- 
trine is  imbedded  in  the  works  of  numbers  of  her  approved 
theologians,  canonists,  and  philosophers.  That  is  what  one 
would  understand  by  the  continuity  and  uniformity  of  doc- 
trine in  the  same  sense  precisely  as  Roman  Catholics  under- 
stand the  continuity  and  uniformity  of  the  doctrine  of  the 
personal  infallibility  of  the  pope.  Catholics  admit  that  the 
personal  infallibility  of  the  pope  was  denied  here  and  there 
all  over  the  Church  before  a.d.  1870,  but  they  hold  that 
those  who  did  so  deny  it,  bishops,  priests,  and  laymen,  were 
unconscious  heretics.  Dollinger  in  a famous  letter  declared, 
that  he  had  taught  to  his  students  for  forty-seven  years  the 
personal  fallibility  of  the  popes  in  their  capacity  as  doctors 
and  pastors  of  all  Christians. 

It  was  the  same  with  the  doctrine  of  religious  liberty,  or 
the  toleration  of  heretics.  The  Church  never  officially  held 
or  taught  any  doctrine  of  the  toleration  of  heretics  except  as 
6 Speech  of  Dec.  4,  1817. 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION 


403 


a matter  of  political  expediency,  and  those  who,  like  O’Con- 
nell and  Father  Tom  Burke,  denounced  intolerance  and  the 
Inquisition,  were  unconsciously  proclaiming  a false  doc- 
trine. And  the  doctrine  of  political  expediency  we  may 
indulgently  express  in  Macaulay’s  words:  “I  (the  Church 
of  Rome)  am  in  the  right:  You  Protestant  heretics  are  in 
the  wrong.  When  you  (Protestants)  are  the  stronger  you 
ought  to  tolerate  me  (the  Church  of  Rome)  for  it  is  your 
duty  to  tolerate  truth : but  when  I am  the  stronger  I shall 
persecute  you  for  it  is  my  duty  to  persecute  error.”  And  in 
fact  such  is  the  gospel  proclaimed  to  his  countrymen  almost 
in  the  same  words  by  Louis  Veuillot  who  was  acclaimed  as 
a great  “leader”  among  the  orthodox  lay-folk  of  France. 
Was  the  late  Joseph  Chamberlain  merely  a religious  bigot 
or  playing  the  game  of  the  politician  when  in  his  speech  at 
Cardiff,  Wales,  July  6,  1886,  he  said:  “The  Protestant 
Church  is  founded  upon  the  principles  of  toleration.  ...  It 
admits  the  principle  of  religious  equality.  The  Catholic 
Church  by  the  necessity  of  the  case  is  opposed  to  toleration 
and  repudiates  the  doctrine  of  religious  equality.  Conse- 
quently, if  the  Catholic  Church  is  anywhere  in  the  majority 
it  must  try  ...  to  obtain  supremacy.” 

The  first  generation  of  Protestants  were  born  and  edu- 
cated in  the  Roman  communion.  In  that  communion  they 
were  of  necessity  influenced  by  the  evils  attaching  to  their 
religion.  It  was  then  that  under  the  teaching  of  priests  they 
learned  to  hate  and  persecute  those  whom  they  called  witches 
and  heretics.  They  unfortunately  brought  this  and  many 
other  superstitions  and  unchristian  doctrines  out  of  the 
Roman  communion  when  they  formed  themselves  into  Pro- 
testant or  protesting  churches  and  fiercely  propagated  them 
for  a time  amongst  their  followers.  But  the  genius  of  Pro- 
testantism was  antagonistic  to  their  permanency  and  devel- 
opment and  in  time  produced  such  clashing  of  minds,  initia- 
tive, and  independence  of  thought  and  investigation,  that  to 
these  the  world  of  today  is  indebted  for  freedom  from  reli- 
gious persecution  by  law,  and  in  theory,  if  not  always  in 


404 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


practice,  the  recognition  of  individual  liberty  of  conscience. 
Protestants  hold  to  the  principle  that  each  one  is  bound  to 
obey  his  enlightened  reason,  which  means  his  conscience,  and 
to  believe  what  under  its  dictation,  is  to  him  the  truth.  But 
when  the  enlightened  reason  or  conscience  of  the  Catholic 
is  in  conflict  with  that  of  his  Church  which  in  any  particular 
spot  in  the  world  may  be  represented  to  him  by  the  local 
bishop,  his  only  course  is  submission,  or  rejection  of  the 
papal  communion.  To  stand  by  your  conscience,  when  your 
judgment  is  in  practice  a very  unpopular  one,  demands  the 
highest  degree  of  virtue,  but  it  is  a virtue  which  the  Roman 
ecclesiastics  have  through  the  centuries  punished  with  the 
utmost  severity.  Their  doctrine  was  and  still  is,  to  crush 
conscience  by  force  of  law  and  punishment.  That  is  the  teach- 
ing contained  in  the  works  of  all  the  modern  theologians, 
canonists,  and  philosophers  of  the  Roman  Church  herein 
before  named. 

The  world  is  still  staggering  under  the  shock  of  this  fear- 
ful code.  The  world  of  today  is  not  supposed  to  be  very 
honest  in  any  department  of  life,  and  the  memory  left  to  it 
as  a legacy  from  the  past  and  still  cherished  by  Roman  theo- 
logians, is  hardly  calculated  to  make  it  otherwise.  For  cen- 
turies the  utilitarian  principle  was  employed  by  the  Roman 
Church  and  state  in  defence  of  religious  persecution.  The 
poison  of  heresy  must  not  be  allowed  to  spread  for  the  sake 
of  the  individual  himself  and  for  the  sake  of  the  body  politic. 
The  theologians  and  jurists  of  the  Middle  Ages,  who  were 
also  clergy,  made  heresy  and  high  treason  equal  crimes  be- 
fore the  law,  and  then  settled  all  penalties  by  their  syllogisms. 
But  what  at  once  both  amuses  and  astonishes  intelligent  Pro- 
testants is  the  character  or  quality,  if  I may  so  express  it,  of 
the  arguments  employed,  all  of  them  in  many  several  books, 
by  many  different  authors,  exactly  of  a piece,  and  apparently 
fashioned  to  order.  They  are  all  dishing  up  to  us  in  shameless 
fashion  the  same  old  vegetable  of  religious  persecution,  re- 
cooked and  re-hashed,  in,  if  possible,  a worse  form  than  it 
had  in  the  Middle  Ages.  We  are  told  that  excommunication 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION 


405 


is  a greater  punishment  than  death  and  if  the  greater  may  be 
inflicted  so  may  the  lesser.  We  are  told  that  the  death  penalty 
is  sometimes  the  only  remedy,  because  men  will  not  cease  to 
think  and  to  propagate  their  thoughts  on  religion,  morals, 
and  doctrine,  by  speech  and  writing;  and  as  all  that  is  con- 
trary to  the  teaching  of  the  Roman  Church  on  faith  and 
morals,  a region  of  doctrine  within  which  theologians  in- 
clude almost  everything,  therefore  all  those  who  pertina- 
ciously propagate  such  opinions  are  worthy  of  the  death  pen- 
alty. If  forgers  were  once  punished  with  death,  so  should 
heretics,  for  heretics  are  forgers  of  God’s  word.  If  men 
were  once  put  to  death  for  adultery,  so  should  heretics,  for 
heretics  break  faith  with  God  and  that  is  worse  than  break- 
ing faith  with  one’s  own  wife.  Heretics  should  be  put  to 
death  to  prevent  their  doing  harm  to  the  good  and  innocent, 
and  so  by  the  execution  of  a few,  the  many  would  be  cor- 
rected and  saved;  and  lastly  out  of  charity  to  the  heretics 
themselves,  to  prevent  the  accumulation  of  their  sins  by 
cutting  short  their  lives;  “for  these,”  says  Father  Marianus 
de  Luca,  S.J.,  “being  utterly  obstinate  would  only  become 
worse  the  longer  they  lived  and  would  suffer  still  more  ex- 
cruciating torments  in  the  flames  of  Hell.” 

St.  Thomas,  their  “greatest  theologian,”  says:  “Heretics 
in  Scripture  are  known  and  described  under  the  terms, 
wolves,  thieves,  and  sons  of  Satan.”  Now  in  those  days 
thieves  were  hanged  and  we  still  pay  bounty  for  the  head  of 
a wolf,  and  the  sons  of  Satan  are  in  hell  fire;  is  it  not  there- 
fore manifestly  clear  from  God’s  holy  word  that  heretics 
should  be  put  to  death  in  some  form  or  other?  Again,  the 
Scriptures  teach  us  that  a heretic  should  be  shunned  after 
one  or  two  admonitions,  and  what  easier  way  of  shunning 
him  than  by  quickly  putting  him  out  into  the  other  world 
from  whose  bourne  no  traveller  returns. 

But  the  modern  Roman  Jesuit  professor  does  not  stop 
there.  To  the  plea  that  Protestants  born  of  Protestant  parents 
are  not  in  the  Roman  Church,  Father  de  Luca  replies:  “I 
answer  that  though  heretics  be  not  in  the  Church  yet  they 


406 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


ought  to  be,  and  therefore  they  pertain  thereunto  as  they  per- 
tain to  the  fold  whence  they  have  fled.  . . . The  Church  has 
in  fact  decreed  many  penalties  against  heretics.  . . includ- 
ing that  of  death  which  no  man  may  escape  who  has  been 
given  over  by  the  Church  to  the  secular  arm.  To  this  penalty 
not  only  are  those  subject  who,  after  the  age  of  reason,  have 
fallen  away  from  the  faith,  but  those  also,  who,  once  bap- 
tized and  growing  up  in  heresy,  defend  pertinaciously  that 
which  they  have  sucked  in  with  their  mother’s  milk.” 

In  the  presence  of  these  statements  it  becomes  impossible 
for  Protestants  any  longer  not  to  believe  that  a reactionary, 
ultramontane  Catholicism  does  exist,  whose  ideal  in  spite 
of  the  encyclical  letters  of  Leo  XIII,  on  the  independence 
and  sui  juris  character  of  the  state,  is  a universal  empire, 
spiritually  and  politically  representing,  and  ardently  desir- 
ing, a combination  with  the  civil  state,  and  the  rule  of  force 
and  oppression  in  all  matters  not  pleasing  to  the  Church.  And 
as  a matter  of  fact  that  is  the  doctrine  taught  in  the  ency- 
clicals, Arcanum  Diznnae  and  Immortale  Dei.  In  the  former 
we  are  told  that  “matters  which  affect  the  temporal  as  well 
as  the  spiritual  power  should  . . . depend  on  the  other 
which  has  in  its  charge  the  interests  of  heaven.”  And  in  the 
latter  we  are  informed  that  it  is  the  duty  of  the  state  to 
establish,  when  possible,  Roman  Catholicism  as  an  exclusive 
religion.  And  what  else  could  we  consistently  expect  from  a 
church,  which,  in  her  authorized  Notes  to  Matt,  xviii.  20, 
appended  for  the  instruction  of  her  own  layfolk,  has  these 
words : “This  is  understood  of  such  assemblies  only  as  are 
gathered  in  the  name  and  authority  of  Christ,  and  in  the 
unity  of  the  Church  of  Christ.”7  Here  the  claim  is  that  the 
Church  of  Christ  is  the  Roman  Church  exclusively,  and  the 
implication  clearly  is,  that  only  assemblies  in  the  Roman 
communion  gathered  together  for  worship  have  the  prom- 
ise that  Christ  will  be  in  their  midst.  We  should  not  therefore 
be  surprised  to  find  it  taught  in  the  encyclical  on  the  Chris- 

7 See  Catholic  New  Testament,  imprimatur  Archbp.  Farley,  New  York, 
Dec.  8,  1905. 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION 


407 


tian  Constitution  of  States,  that  the  state  is  bound  to  the 
“public  profession  of  religion  . . . not  such  religion  as  it 
may  have  a preference  for  but  the  religion  which  God  en- 
joins and  which  certain  and  most  clear  marks  show  to  be 
the  only  true  religion.”  “Now,”  continues  the  encyclical  let- 
ter, “it  cannot  be  difficult  to  find  out  which  is  the  true  reli- 
gion if  only  it  be  sought  with  an  earnest  and  unbiased 
mind.  . . . From  all  this  it  is  evident  that  the  only  true 
religion  is  the  one  established  by  Jesus  Christ  Himself  and 
which  He  committed  to  his  Church  to  protect  and  to  propa- 
gate. . . . The  Church  has  the  two-fold  right  of  judging 
and  of  punishing.  ...  A civil  sovereignty  is  the  surest 
safeguard  of  her  independence.  . . . The  Almighty,  there- 
fore, has  appointed  the  charge  of  the  human  race  between 
two  powers,  the  ecclesiastical  and  the  civil,  the  one  being 
set  over  divine,  and  the  other  over  human  things.  . . . 
There  was  once  a time  when  states  were  governed  by  the 
principles  of  gospel  teaching;  then  it  was  that  the  power 
and  divine  virtue  of  Christian  wisdom  had  diffused  itself 
throughout  the  laws,  institutions  and  morals  of  the  people, 
permeating  all  ranks  and  relations  of  civil  society.  Then,  too, 
the  religion  instituted  by  Jesus  Christ  . . . flourished  every- 
where by  the  favor  of  princes  and  the  legitimate  protection 
of  magistrates : and  Church  and  state  were  happily  united 
in  concord  and  friendly  intercourse  of  good  offices.  ...  A 
similar  state  of  things  would  certainly  have  continued  had 
the  agreement  of  the  two  powers  been  lasting.  More  impor- 
tant results  even  might  have  been  justly  looked  for  had  obe- 
dience waited  upon  the  authority,  teaching,  and  counsels  of 
the  Church,  and  had  this  submission  been  specially  marked 
by  greater  and  more  unswerving  loyalty.  For  that  should  be 
regarded  in  the  light  of  an  ever  changeless  law  which  Ivo  of 
Chartres  wrote  to  Pope  Paschal  II : ‘When  kingdom  and 
priesthood  are  at  one,  in  complete  accord,  the  world  is  well 
ruled  and  the  Church  flourishes  and  brings  forth  abundant 
fruit.  But  when  they  are  at  variance  not  only  small  interests 


4o8 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


prosper  not,  but  even  things  of  greatest  moment  fall  into 
deplorable  decay.’  ” 

There  can  be  no  possible  doubt  of  the  meaning  of  this 
encyclical  of  Leo  XIII.  The  Church  here  referred  to,  and  the 
authority  to  which  submission,  obedience,  and  loyalty,  are 
due,  is  the  Roman  official  Church  which  means  the  pope  and 
the  papal  curia,  and  the  unswerving  aim  and  purpose  of  the 
pope  and  his  cardinals  at  all  times  is  their  supremacy  over 
the  state. 

The  state  is  bound  to  make  public  profession  of  the  one 
true  religion — the  Roman.  The  state  is  bound  to  inquire 
concerning  the  many  religions;  which  is  the  true  one?  The 
state  is  bound  to  prefer  one  religion  to  all  the  rest  and  that 
one  religion  the  Roman.  The  state  is  bound  to  show  to  this 
one  true  religion,  special  favor.  The  state  ought  not  to  grant 
equal  rights  to  every  creed  even  so  long  as  public  order  is 
not  disturbed  by  any  political  form  of  religious  belief.  The 
pope  denies  that  all  questions  that  concern  religion  are  to  be 
referred  to  private  judgment — denies  that  every  one  is  to  be 
free  to  follow  whatever  religion  he  prefers,  or  none  at  all,  if 
he  disapprove  of  all.  The  pope  denies  the  right  of  liberty  of 
expression  of  opinion  regarding  the  practice  or  omission 
of  divine  worship.  The  pope  maintains  that  the  Roman 
Catholic  religion  should  have  superior  rights  in  the  state  over 
every  other  religion.  And  in  addition  Leo  XIII  maintains 
that  the  Mirari  Vos  of  Pope  Gregory  XVI  taught  also  all  the 
above  doctrines. 

Now  honest  Protestants  contend  that  to  a mind  free  from 
controversial  quibbling  the  doctrine  in  this  encyclical  neces- 
sarily involves  the  spirit  and  the  practice  of  religious  in- 
tolerance. If  the  Catholic  principle  of  private  property  and 
its  inherent  exclusive  prerogatives  necessarily  involve  the 
condemnation  of  the  principle  of  Communism,  the  exclusive 
claims  of  the  Roman  religion  necessarily  involve  the  con- 
demnation of  all  heresy,  and,  given  the  proper  conditions 
under  the  Roman  system,  the  condemnation  of  all  heresy 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION 


409 


involves  at  the  same  time  the  condemnation  of  all  those  who 
profess  it. 

The  doctrine  of  those  encyclicals  and  that  of  the  Syllabus 
of  Pius  IX,  is  simply  the  continuity  of  the  doctrine  of  the 
Roman  Church  from  the  days  of  Saints  Augustine  and 
Jerome  and  logically  calls  for  the  practice  of  the  Inquisition. 
In  fact  Protestants  commit  a great  mistake  who  do  not  see 
that  there  is  an  essential  difference  between  religious  liberty 
as  understood  by  Protestants  and  as  understood  by  Roman 
Catholics. 

No  pope,  no  Catholic  Church.  No  Catholic  Church,  no 
true  Christianity.  No  true  Christianity,  no  true  religion.  The 
papacy  is  the  keystone  of  the  arch  of  the  Christian  temple. 
In  that  temple  no  one  may  determine  truth  of  his  own  judg- 
ment; the  pope,  alone  infallible,  declares  it,  either  directly 
and  immediately,  speaking  by  himself  and  for  the  whole 
Church,  or  speaking  through  the  mouth  and  confirming  the 
utterance  of  a general  council,  or  the  opinions  of  theolo- 
gians throughout  the  Church.  For  those  outside  the  temple 
there  is  no  salvation  except  through  invincible  ignorance  and 
repentance  for  sin  rooted  in  the  love  of  God  above  all  things, 
and  these  two  principles  stand  or  fall  together.  As  for  those 
who,  being  enlightened  and  dwelling  within  the  temple,  go 
out,  as  did  Renan  and  Father  McCabe,  for  instance,  under 
protestation  of  religious  and  conscientious  convictions,  there 
is  no  hope  for  such  people,  says  Perrone,  for  they  are  in  bad 
faith  and  are  all  damned;  and  Catholics  under  the  system 
dare  not  stop  to  ask  him,  how  and  by  what  means  he  got  this 
mysterious  information.  It  is  enough  for  them  to  know  that 
the  Church  has  officially  spoken,  or  when  the  Church  has  not 
officially  spoken,  that  the  theologians  with  her  approval, 
have  said  so.  Therefore,  all  the  Luthers,  Cranmers,  Calvins, 
Dollingers,  Hyacinths,  Lamennaises,  Tyrrells,  O’Keefes, 
and  all  other  ex-priests,  ex-nuns,  and  ex-Catholic  lay-folk 
who  were  once  Romanists,  and  are  Romanists  no  longer,  are 
all  damned. 

Let  no  one  be  shocked,  this  is  the  common  belief  among 


4io 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


Catholics,  and  from  this  belief,  rooted  in  their  hearts  and 
nurtured  by  their  religion,  springs  up  their  incessant  perse- 
cution of  all  who  leave  their  communion  under  the  combined 
pressure  of  reason  and  conscience.  It  is  not  only  their  com- 
mon belief,  but  is  times  without  number  expressed  with 
complacency  in  their  press.  It  has  so  engrafted  itself  upon 
their  lives  and  got  such  a hold  upon  their  hearts  and  rendered 
them  such  shameless  prigs  that  they  invariably  see  in  the 
face  of  one  whom  they  regard  as  an  apostate — priest  or  lay- 
man— the  brand  of  damnation  in  life,  not  to  talk  of  his  ap- 
pearance after  death.  Go  where  you  will  all  over  the  Catholic 
world  the  common  remark  of  priest  and  layman  in  referring 
to  a so-called  apostate  is:  Hasn’t  he  a most  unhappy  face? 
Isn’t  the  mark  of  Cain,  or  Judas  upon  his  brow?  And  so  on. 

All  that  is  the  result  of  the  system.  It  has  driven  out  of 
their  inner  lives  all  at  once  both  the  love  and  the  fear  of  God. 
They  are  so  utterly  conscious  of  their  own  superior  spiritual 
advantages  in  the  Roman  communion  and  of  the  security  of 
the  salvation  of  their  souls,  that  they  have  become  uncon- 
sciously, the  very  Pharisees  whom  Christ  so  scathingly  de- 
nounced. They  are  always  in  a frame  of  mind,  even  when 
they  have  not  for  years  troubled  the  priest  at  his  throne  in  the 
“Confessional  Box,”  to  thank  God  that  they  are  not  as  other 
men  are.  Why  should  these  saints  have  any  hesitation  in  say- 
ing that  an  apostate  priest,  or  lay-Catholic  is  damned,  and 
may  be  persecuted  even  to  death?  Such  judgments  are  in 
fact  a source  of  amusement  to  them.  They  afford  them  abun- 
dant topics  of  conversation  and  laughter.  How  can  their 
souls  be  lost  for  is  not  Father  Converse  there  to  give  them 
Absolution  ? 

Protestants  believe  that  Catholics  are  in  many  instances 
better  than  the  spirit  prevalent  in  their  Church,  and  at  the 
worst  are  what  corruption  of  religion  has  made  them.  But 
the  great  bulk  of  cultured  Protestants  believe  and  even  know 
that  Catholics  are  lacking  wholly  in  charity  to  those  Catho- 
lics, lay  and  cleric,  who,  for  the  most  part,  as  Protestants 
believe,  leave  the  Roman  Church  in  good  faith,  and  that  they 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION  411 

are  lacking  in  this  charity  because  their  religion  is  herein 
defective.  Protestants  believe  that  Catholics  are  even  posi- 
tively hostile  and  malevolent  to  such  people  and  that  the  con- 
tinuous personal  warfare  which  Catholic  writers  never  cease 
to  carry  on  against  reformers  of  all  kinds  and  of  all  times 
is  almost  demonstrative  proof  that  the  spirit  which  gave  birth 
to  the  Inquisition,  is  still  abiding  in  the  Roman  Church  and 
affecting  the  minds  and  hearts  of  the  great  bulk  of  Roman 
Catholics.  Protestants  think  they  rightly  and  logically  con- 
nect Catholic  practice  in  this  particular  with  Catholic  doc- 
trine. If  Catholic  priests  and  people,  almost  without  excep- 
tion, persecute  every  ex-priest  and  ex-nun  and  every  con- 
verted lay-Catholic,  man  and  woman,  and  their  families  and 
friends,  Protestants  believe  that  this  is  due  to  the  Roman  doc- 
trine that  no  one  can  leave  the  Roman  Church  in  good  faith. 
If  Protestants  accepted  that  Roman  principle  they  would 
be  forced  to  admit  that  all  the  Reformers  were  rogues  and 
hypocrites.  But  if  it  was  possible  for  the  Reformers  to  be 
honest  men  in  their  days,  it  must  be  equally  possible  for  con- 
verted Catholics — priests  and  lay-folk — to  be  honest  people 
in  the  present  time.  Protestants  who  believe  the  Roman  con- 
gregation to  be  only  one  of  the  multitude  of  Christian  sects 
and  that  too  a very  defective  one,  having  no  more  Scriptural 
foundation  or  right  than  their  own,  would  be  as  much  jus- 
tified in  believing  that  those  who  went  from  Protestantism 
to  Romanism  were  in  bad  faith  as  Romanists  unhesitatingly 
affirm  those  of  their  own  communion  to  be  in,  who  become 
Protestants.  But  Protestants  assimilating  the  religion  of 
their  New  Testament  do  not  believe  that  either  party  is  jus- 
tified in  so  thinking.  Protestants  are  fully  aware  that  not  only 
Catholic  priests  baptized  and  educated  in  the  Roman  com- 
munion and  renowned  as  scholars  and  educators,  have  left 
that  Church  and  become  Protestants,  some  of  them,  and 
agnostics  others,  but  that  a number  of  Protestant  ministers 
have  gone  over  to  Rome  and  become  priests,  and  later  pro- 
fessing to  have  become  utterly  disillusioned,  have  returned 
again  to  the  various  Protestant  bodies  to  which  they  for- 


412 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


merly  belonged.  Shall  Protestants  be  asked  to  believe  that 
these  men  were  hypocrites  and  double-minded,  and  therefore 
unstable  in  all  their  ways?  And  these  things  are  happening 
all  the  time.  There  is  a constant  going  over  to  and  coming  back 
from  Rome.  Shall  those  going  over  to  Rome  be  classed  as  hon- 
est and  those  leavingorcomingback  from  Rome  be  denounced 
as  hypocrites?  Protestants  know  that  such  judgments  are 
positively  forbidden  by  Christ;  and  therefore  their  conscience 
does  not  allow  them  to  condemn  converted  Catholics.  Why 
should  not  the  arguments  which  appeal  to  Protestants  and 
which  not  only  keep  them  out  of  the  Roman  communion  and 
put  them  on  their  guard  against  it  but  in  some  instances, 
make  them  positively  hostile  to  it,  appeal  to  Catholics  of 
intelligence  and  honesty  of  purpose  as  well?  They  many 
times  have  appealed  and  successfully  to  such  Catholics  in  the 
centuries  gone,  and  why  should  any  one  think  this  to  be 
impossible  today?  Or  shall  Protestants  accept  the  doctrine 
of  Roman  theologians — that  no  Catholic  can  honestly  leave 
the  Roman  communion  for  membership  in  a Protestant  con- 
gregation ? Shall  you  acknowledge  a Catholic  to  be  honest,  if 
like  Renan  and  Father  McCabe  he  professes  himself  an 
agnostic,  or  an  atheist,  but  dishonest  and  a scoundrel,  if  he 
become  a member  of  some  Protestant  and  Christian  sect? 
But  this  is  the  persecuting  attitude  Romanists  would  have 
Protestants  adopt,  and  which,  unhappily,  cunning  and  selfish 
Protestants  very  commonly  do  adopt.  Their  Protestantism 
has  a marketable  value;  it  is  always  measured  in  dollars  and 
cents.  Do  these  Protestants  dare  to  pretend  that  Catholics 
may  not,  like  Protestants,  be  also  honestly  affected  by  the 
same  arguments  which  bring  conviction  to  themselves? 

But  Catholic  editors  deny  that  Catholics  are  a persecuting 
sect.  The  trouble  with  such  men  is,  whenever  they  are  honest, 
that  they  are  prejudiced  and  have  a very  limited  experience 
and  take  refuge  in  their  personal  knowledge.  But  let  those 
gentlemen  not  forget  that  Protestants  are  ubiquitous,  are  in 
the  normal  enjoyment  of  their  senses  and  reason,  and  are 
therefore  in  a position  to  testify  of  what  happens  all  over 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION 


413 


the  Roman  communion.  Rome  let  loose  the  forces  of  perse- 
cution centuries  ago  and  science  tells  us  that  a force  once  let 
loose  never  ceases  thereafter  to  produce  its  effects.  Rome 
not  only  let  loose  the  forces  of  persecution  centuries  ago  but 
built  up  a system  of  theology  and  canon  law  to  justify  those 
forces;  and  that  system  of  theology  and  canon  law  has 
engendered  in  the  Roman  communion  a persecuting  spirit 
which  becomes  quiescent  under  pressure  of  political  and  eco- 
nomic conditions  but  never  goes  to  sleep  and  never  ceases  to 
watch  its  opportunities.  Protestants  can  everywhere  testify 
that  wherever  there  is  an  ex-priest,  however  respectable  he 
may  be,  he  is  persecuted  either  openly,  or  secretly,  or  in  both 
ways  directly  and  indirectly. 

But  however  that  may  be,  they  are  certain  that  while  we 
are  bidden  in  Scripture  to  mark  the  heretic  and  avoid  him 
or  have  no  communications  with  him  in  things  divine,  we  are 
not  only  commanded  not  to  persecute  him,  but  on  the  con- 
trary, to  love  him,  serve  him,  and  pray  for  him.  And  when 
Roman  Catholics  appeal  to  the  persecutions  levelled  against 
them  everywhere  and  from  the  beginning,  first  by  Jews,  then 
by  Gentiles,  next  by  schismatics  and  heretics  of  all  kinds,  as 
a proof  that  they  are  the  dear  children  of  God  and  constitute 
his  true  Church,  the  appeal  might  have  force,  if  Protestants 
did  not  know  that  whenever  and  wherever  these  dear,  perse- 
cuted children  of  God  had  sufficient  political  power,  they 
persecuted  every  one  of  the  persecutors  in  turn,  and  forgot 
the  doctrine  of  owing  no  man  anything  save  to  love  one 
another.  As  practised  by  Catholics  love  did  work  much  ill  to 
his  neighbor  and  did  not  do  unto  others  as  Catholics  wished 
that  others  should  do  unto  them.  And  Protestants  believe  that 
this  is  very  largely  the  spirit  of  Catholicism  still.  For  that 
reason  Protestants  are  convinced  that  eternal  vigilance  is  the 
price  of  their  liberty.  And  the  reason  why  Protestants  believe 
that  this  persecuting  spirit  still  abides  in  the  Church  of  Rome 
is  because  they  see  it  in  practice  necessarily  arising  out  of 
fundamental  Roman  Catholic  theology. 

Perrone  was  a leading  Jesuit  theologian  in  the  Council 


414 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


which  decreed  the  dogma  of  the  Immaculate  Conception  of 
the  Blessed  Virgin.  One  of  his  works  was  written  expressly 
for  the  common  people  whose  title  is,  Popular  Catechism, 
Dealing  with  Protestantism,  and  this  work  received  official 
approbation  in  1854.  Here  is  a specimen  from  Chapter  XV : 

D.  Can  those  who  pass  from  the  Catholic  Church  to  Protestantism 
have  this  [excuse  of]  invincible  ignorance? 

R.  The  mere  thought  is  absurd.  ...  It  is  a contradiction  and  an 
impossibility  that  any  Catholic  should  turn  Protestant  through  honest 
motives. 

D.  Would  you  therefore  say  that  no  Catholic  who  turns  Protestant 
can  ever  be  saved  ? 

R.  I say  that  it  is  certain  with  the  certainty  of  faith  that  all  Catholics 
who  turn  to  Protestantism  are  damned  except  those  cases  where  a man 
repents  sincerely  before  his  death  and  abjures  the  errors  he  has  pro- 
fessed. Except  for  such  a case  as  this,  it  is  an  article  of  faith  that  all 
Catholics  who  become  Protestants  are  damned  immediately  for  all 
eternity. 

D.  Why  do  you  say  that  this  damnation  is  one  of  the  certainties  of 
faith? 

R.  Because  it  is  a plain  revelation  of  God. 

I am  sure  it  must  be  far  less  revolting  to  Protestants  gen- 
erally, to  be  told  that  an  anthropoid  ape  is  their  physical  an- 
cestor than  to  be  informed  that  they  are  the  spiritual  children 
of  people  now  buried  in  hell.  Yet  according  to  this  official 
doctrine  of  Perrone,  all  the  Protestant  Reformers,  that  is  to 
say,  the  founders  and  builders  of  their  denominations,  and 
their  millions  of  quondam  Catholic  followers,  are  in  hell 
for  all  eternity. 

Now  how  can  any  people  accepting  and  assimilating  these 
doctrines  be  expected  to  abstain  from  persecuting  their  neigh- 
bors whom  they  believe  to  be  already  marked  with  the  brand 
of  hell  upon  their  souls,  put  there  by  a church’s  official  teach- 
ing whose  disciples  believe  it  to  be  infallible?  Is  not  such 
doctrine  worse  than  sedition?  Is  it  not  calculated  to  engender 
the  most  profound  hypocrisy  and  distrust  and  to  disrupt  the 
whole  peace  of  the  state?  If  it  does  not  do  so,  is  it  not  because 
Protestants  are  utterly  ignorant  of  it,  or  because  Catholic 
duplicity  puts  them  asleep,  or  because  they  have  no  higher 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION  415 

interest  in  life  than  money  and  subordinate  everything  else 
to  it? 

Perrone  and  his  Roman  followers  profess  to  know  with  the 
certainty  of  faith  that  Luther  and  his  fellow  Reformers  are 
all  in  hell.  But  Lingard8  the  great  Catholic  historian  tells  us 
with  what  noble  constancy  “the  Protestant  martyrs  suffered 
in  Mary’s  reign  under  the  cruel  statute  De  Haeretico  Com- 
burendo”  He  says,  that  “though  pardon  was  offered  them  to 
the  last  moment,  they  scorned  to  purchase  their  lives  by 
feigning  an  assent  to  doctrines  which  they  did  not  believe.” 
Now  let  it  be  remembered  that  all  of  those  martyrs  had  been 
baptized  into  the  Roman  fold  and  had  conscientiously  left  it 
and  died  in  agonies  for  their  convictions.  What  is  the  value 
of  Perrone’s  impious  guesses  in  the  face  of  that  fact?  Is  it 
possible  to  doubt  the  integrity  of  the  bishops,  Hooper,  Rid- 
ley, Latimer,  and  ever  Cranmer  at  the  last?  For  if  they  be- 
lieved in  it  the  salvation  of  their  souls  depended  on  their 
public  profession  of  the  Roman  Catholic  religion.  But  at  the 
very  moment  when  it  was  most  essential  for  him  to  profess  it 
Cranmer  “recalled  his  former  recantations,  declaring  that  he 
had  never  changed  his  belief,  and  that  his  recantation  had 
been  wrung  from  him  by  the  hope  of  life.”9  I do  not  envy 
the  man  who  is  bold  enough  to  say  that  Cranmer  and  his 
brother-bishops  chose  to  go  straight  into  hell  with  their  eyes 
wide  open  and  with  a consciousness  of  their  privilege  to  go 
to  heaven  instead  through  the  abounding  mercy  of  Jesus 
Christ. 

Truth  lives  by  being  tested  and  experienced  as  does  what- 
ever is  good,  and  error  dies  by  being  found  out  as  evil.  Each 
may  be  forced  to  hide  itself  for  a time  under  pressure  of  per- 
secution but  in  the  struggle  for  existence  truth  will  eventually 
prevail  over  error,  as  Gamaliel  well  understood  and  fore- 
told. Only  in  the  domain  of  faith  and  morals  as  expounded 


8 Dom.  Birt’s  Lingard,  pp.  355,  356- 

9 Ibid. 


416 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


by  the  Roman  Church  is  there  no  choice  between  toleration 
of  error  and  the  expression  of  intellectual  activity. 

The  Constitution  of  that  ideal  Christian-World-Empire 
started  by  Constantine  with  the  pope  as  Lord  of  all  lords 
was  briefly  summarized  by  Pope  Nicholas  V,  October  n, 
1451,  as  follows : “One  of  the  principal  articles  of  the  Chris- 
tian faith  is  the  unity  of  the  Church.  The  constitution  of  this 
unity  is  the  existence  of  a unique  and  visible  head  represen- 
tative of  a great,  eternal  priest,  whose  throne  is  in  heaven, 
and  the  obedience  of  all  members  of  the  Church  to  this 
unique  head.  Where  two  masters  command  there  is  no  unity 
of  empire.  Outside  the  unity  of  the  Church  no  salvation; 
every  man  not  in  the  ark  of  Noah  perished  in  the  deluge.” 

Now  the  history  of  the  papacy  and  the  claims  and  deeds 
of  the  popes  in  deposing  rulers  and  bestowing  kingdoms  at 
will  clearly  prove  that  the  ideal  of  this  constitution  was  not 
that  of  a spiritual  kingdom  only,  for  if  so  it  would  have  been 
a new  interpretation  of  papal  documents.10 

When  Catholic  barons  and  Catholic  bishops  wrung  from 
a tyrant  king  of  England  the  vaunted  Magna  Charta,  Pope 
Innocent  III  rejected  it  in  a bull  of  date,  August  15,  1215, 
in  the  most  vigorous  language  of  thorough  reprobation  and 
condemnation,  forbidding  the  king  to  observe  it,  or  the  barons 
and  their  accomplices  to  demand  its  observance,  and  all  be- 
cause the  proud  pope  had  not  been  consulted  on  the  matter. 
Innocent  X condemned  the  peace  of  Westphalia  in  1648 
because  it  secured  to  Protestants  the  free  exercise  of  their 
religion  and  admission  to  civil  offices,  and  the  popes  have 
condemned  every  constitution  since  then  in  every  Catholic  or 
so-called  Catholic  nation  which  has  granted  freedom  of 
conscience,  public  worship,  and  freedom  of  the  press,  to  its 
subjects.  And  no  matter  how  Roman  theological  interpreters 
may  attempt  to  explain  or  explain  away  papal  encyclicals, 
Protestants  are  compelled  in  justice  to  themselves  and  as  a 
matter  of  prudence  and  vigilance,  to  understand  them  only 
in  that  logical  sense  which  will  bring  them  into  harmony 
10  See  Jannsen,  Hist.  Germ.  People,  V.  2. 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION  417 

with  the  whole  doctrine  and  political  history  of  the  papacy. 
Protestants  must  not  forget  that  Paul  IV,  the  year  before 
Queen  Elizabeth’s  accession  to  the  throne,  issued  his  bull, 
Cum  Ex  Apostolatus  Officio  “out  of  the  plenitude  of  his 
apostolic  power,”  declaring  that  all  civil  rulers  were  subject 
to  his  will,  and  would  forfeit  their  dominions  for  heresy, — no 
other  doctrine  than  that  of  the  Unam  Sanctam  of  Boniface 
VIII.  They  will  then  be  in  a position  to  understand  why 
Elizabeth  for  reasons  of  state  and  her  own  security,  pre- 
ferred ultimately  the  Protestant  to  the  Roman  Church.  Some 
English  Catholics  and  Seminarists  professed  to  reconcile 
allegiance  to  Queen  Elizabeth  with  their  conscience,  but 
they  evidently  did  so,  with  a mental  reservation,  for  the 
whole  doctrine  then  taught  by  the  entire  school  of  theolo- 
gians and  canonists,  made  it  certain  with  the  certainty  of 
faith,  that  any  Christian  prince  who  had  openly  or  manifestly 
fallen  away  from  the  Catholic  religion,11  and  wished  to  per- 
vert others,  ipso  facto , by  force  of  law  divine  and  human, 
had  lost  all  authority  and  dignity,  and  all  this  antecedently 
to  any  sentence  of  condemnation  by  the  pope  or  other  su- 
preme power,  and  that  his  subjects  were  freed  from  all  their 
oaths  of  allegiance  and  that  they  should  and  ought,  when- 
ever and  wherever  they  had  sufficient  power  to  do  so,  to  cast 
him  out  as  an  enemy  and  deserter  of  Christ,  as  an  apostate 
and  a heretic.12  That  too,  is  the  meaning  of  the  bull  of  Pius 
V as  given  by  Gregory  XIII.  That  bull  was  to  be  considered 
always  in  force  against  heretics  but  should  only  be  binding 
on  Catholics  when  due  execution  of  it  could  be  had.  Let 
therefore  Catholics  be  in  sufficient  numbers  to  control  our 
armies,  navies,  congresses,  and  parliaments,  and  all  the 
machinery  of  the  Inquisition  will  once  more  be  put  in  force, 
if  Catholics  obey  the  doctrine  of  their  Church.  The  whole 
experience  of  Protestants  everywhere  reveals  the  fact  that 
the  conscience  of  Catholics  responds  to  the  teaching  of  the 
Church  when  the  head  of  that  Church  and  the  rulers  of  the 


11  Alzog,  Church  History,  V.  2,  pp.  496-97. 

12  Hallam’s  Constitutional  History,  p.  115,  note  2. 


418  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

state  are  living  in  peace  with  each  other.  Voltaire  tells  us  that 
the  clergy  were  the  authors  of  all  the  persecutions  which 
sullied  the  reign  of  Louis  XIV  and  history  tells  us  that  in 
the  war  between  Prussia  and  Austria,  which  ended  in 
Sadowa,  French  and  Austrian  ecclesiastics  proclaimed  to 
superstitious  people  that  Austria  must  win  for  the  Church 
must  triumph  over  heretics. 

The  Inquisition  at  its  roots  was  a spirit  of  hatred  against 
heresy;  and  non-tolerance  of  heresy  meant  then  and  means 
now,  non-tolerance  of  the  heretic  when  the  supreme  will  of 
the  Church  and  that  of  the  state  are  one,  or  in  agreement, 
which  is  the  aim  today  as  since  the  days  of  Constantine ; for 
the  Curia  which  is  the  pope  in  operation,  never  swerves  from 
its  fundamental  doctrine  and  purpose.  The  heretic  will  ever 
be  a pestilential  weed  that  must  be  dug  up  and  rooted  out  of 
the  gardens  of  the  Church,  which,  in  her  purpose,  is  to  be 
made  coterminous  with  the  state. 

“The  Church  established  by  Christ  as  a perfect  society 
is  empowered  to  make  laws  and  inflict  penalty  for  their 
violation.  Heresy  not  only  violates  her  law,  but  strikes  at 
her  very  life,  unity  of  belief : and  from  the  beginning  the 
heretic  had  incurred  all  the  penalties  of  the  ecclesiastical 
courts.  When  Christianity  became  the  religion  of  the  Em- 
pire . . . the  close  alliance  of  Church  and  state  made  unity 
of  faith  essential,  not  only  to  the  ecclesiastical  organization 
but  also  to  civil  society.  Heresy  in  consequence  was  a crime 
which  secular  rulers  were  bound  in  duty  to  punish.”  This  is 
the  doctrine  of  Rome  laid  down  in  the  American  Catholic 
Encyclopedia 13  and  it  means  that  heresy  is  to  be  punished 
by  making  the  heretic  an  outlaw.  This  is  precisely  what  will 
happen  if  ever  Rome  attains  her  ideal  of  Church  and  state. 

And  that  we  may  have  no  doubt,  who,  or  what,  a heretic 
is,  we  are  given  the  definition  of  St.  Augustine  in  De  Civitate 
Dei,  xviii,  approved  by  St.  Thomas  Aquinas  in  the  Summa 
Theologica,  namely:  “Those  are  heretics  who  hold  mis- 
chievous and  erroneous  opinions  and  when  rebuked  . . . 


is  Vol.  VOI,  p.  36,  col.  1. 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION 


419 


after  a stubborn  resistance,  and  refusing  to  mend  their  per- 
nicious, and  deadly  doctrines,  persist  in  defending  them.” 
And  St.  Thomas  tells  us  that  pernicious  and  deadly  doctrines 
are  doctrines  contrary  to  the  dogmas  of  faith,  and  they  may 
be  so  directly  or  indirectly,  either  by  contradicting  an  article 
of  faith  or  by  denying  matters  the  denial  of  which  leads  to 
the  corruption  of  faith.  What  heretics  intend,  he  tells  us,  is 
the  corruption  of  the  faith,  and  although  they  do  protest  the 
contrary  and  proclaim  their  zeal  for  the  purity  of  doctrine, 
St.  Thomas  will  give  them  no  credit  for  any  professed  good 
intentions  in  order  to  cut  away  all  ground  for  tolerating 
them.  Whatever,  if  any,  profit  ensues  to  the  Church  from 
heresy,  is  outside  the  intention  of  the  heretic  and  should  in 
no  way  extenuate, t palliate,  or  mitigate  his  crime,  or  its 
punishment,  for  it  is  not  contrary  to  our  Lord’s  command  to 
“uproot  heretics  altogether  from  the  earth  by  death  whenever 
the  cockle  can  be  destroyed  without  destroying  the  wheat.” 
This  holy  doctor  has  no  difficulty  in  getting  over  1 Cor. 
v.  5,  or  1 Cor.  xi.  19,  or  1 Cor.  xiii.,  or  2 Tim.  ii.  24-5.  What 
a parody  it  all  is  upon  the  Sermon  on  the  Mount  and  upon 
all  other  discourses  of  Christ  contained  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment and  above  all  on  the  reports  of  His  daily  practice  in 
all  relations  with  obstinate  heretics,  and  with  all  penitent 
sinners.  Oh,  those  dear  canonized  saints  of  the  Roman 
Church,  supposed  to  have  their  natural  intellects  superabun- 
dantly aided  by  supernatural  light ! What  a demonstration  do 
they  not  present  of  the  apparent  impossibility  of  men  rising 
above  their  environment  and  the  spirit  of  the  age  in  which 
they  live  and  of  the  education  they  have  received.  One  would 
suppose  that  their  principles  of  hermeneutics  would  lead 
them  to  interpret  bitter,  harsh,  or  persecuting  texts  of  Scrip- 
ture, by  the  loving  and  tender  appeal  and  promises  contained 
in  those  of  an  opposite  character.  On  the  contrary  these  per- 
secuting saints  are  continually  telling  us  that  “the  good  of 
the  many  is  to  be  preferred  to  the  good  of  the  one,”  forgetting 
that  in  the  New  Testament  the  emphasis  is  always  put  on  the 
one  rather  than  on  the  many,  as  in  Ephes.  iv.  7 ; Gal.  vi.  5 ; 


420  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

I Cor.  iii.  8;  Matt.  xvi.  27;  Rom.  ii.  6;  Colos.  iii.  9,  13,  and 
so  on. 

The  teaching  of  St.  Thomas  is  also  that  of  the  great  con- 
troversialist, Bellarmine,  who  builds  his  arguments  on  Matt, 
xviii.,  on  the  decrees  and  laws  of  Roman  emperors  approved 
by  the  Church,  on  the  laws  of  the  Church  herself,  and  on  the 
testimony  of  the  Fathers.  Innocent  III  in  the  Fourth  Lateran 
Council  (a.d.  1215),  decreed  that  heretics  are  everywhere 
to  be  sought  out  and  handed  over  to  the  secular  arm  and  that 
princes  who  refuse  to  exterminate  them  from  their  terri- 
tories, are  to  be  deposed,  and  their  lands  given  to  others  who 
are  more  faithful.  It  is  in  fact  beyond  doubt  that  all  the 
popes  from  Leo  IX  to  Gregory  XIII  inclusive,  a period  of 
nearly  five  centuries,  claimed  the  right  to  depose  all  civil, 
political  rulers  for  cause  of  which  the  Church  was  judge, 
and  pass  their  kingdoms  on  to  others.  This  claim  it  was 
which  constituted  then,  and  still  constitutes,  the  binding 
force  of  all  laws  against  heretics.  Every  prince  forfeited  his 
crown  to  the  pope,  the  vicar  of  Christ,  by  reason  of  his 
heresy.  The  later  divine  right  of  kings,  assigned  to  them  by 
Protestants,  was  then  the  divine  right  of  the  popes.  Protes- 
tants are  told  even  today  under  the  patronage  of  the  “Catho- 
lic Truth  Society”  with  a degree  of  boldness  almost  surpass- 
ing belief  that  their  lives  are  secured  to  them  only  because  the 
children  of  the  pope  are  wanting  in  physical  and  political 
power  to  destroy  them.  The  distinction  made  by  Mr.  Anstru- 
ther  between  the  official  life  of  Catholic  countries,  the  acts 
of  Catholic  kings,  prelates,  and  individuals,  and  the  Catholic 
Church  itself,  is  only  sophistry.14  Has  he  never  heard  of  the 
bull  of  Pope  Urban  II  decreeing  permission  to  kill  an  ex- 
communicated person  ? Has  he  never  heard  that  Innocent  IV 
inserted  in  a bull  of  1254,  the  cruel  constitution  of  Frederick 
II,  in  particular  the  edict  of  Ravenna,  and  the  Sicilian  Con- 
stitution, Inconsulitam  Tunicam  which  expressly  decreed 
death  by  fire?  And  has  he  never  heard  that  Clement  IV  and 
Nicholas  IV  and  Calixtus  III  confirmed  the  decrees  of  Inno- 


14  Cf.  Anstruther,  as  cited,  p.  6. 


THE  ROMAN  DOCTRINE  OF  PERSECUTION  421 

cent?  Has  he  never  heard  of  the  documents  Ad  Abolendcmi, 
De  Heretico  C omburendo  and  U nam  Sanctam  ?15  Has  he  never 
heard  that  Louis  IX  of  France  was  scarcely  fourteen  years  of 
age  when  papal  legates  practically  compelled  him  to  make  a 
law  decreeing  death  against  heretics?  Has  he  never  heard  that 
the  unfortunate  Louis  XVI  of  France  was  forced  by  the  ec- 
clesiastics of  his  kingdom  to  take  the  following  terrible  oath 
against  his  own  most  loyal  subjects:  “I  swear  that  I will 
apply  myself  most  sincerely  and  with  all  my  power  to  exter- 
minate in  all  lands  under  my  dominion  the  heretics  particu- 
larly condemned  by  the  Church.” 

Monks,  priests,  and  confessors,  had  made  it  their  busi- 
ness to  poison  the  minds  of  kings,  nobles  and  peasants 
against  heretics,  that  is  to  say,  against  Protestants.  Francis  I 
of  France  declared  he  would  cut  off  his  right  hand  if  it  were 
a heretic,  and  advised  Charles  V to  expel  all  Mohammedans 
from  Spain.  His  son,  Henry  II  made  the  extirpation  of  here- 
tics his  principal  business  and  issued  a circular  to  his  parlia- 
ments and  judicial  tribunals  commanding  them  to  extirpate 
the  Lutherans.  Henry  III  was  such  an  arch-enemy  of  Protes- 
tants that  he  was  convinced  he  could  not  find  a prouder  grave 
than  amidst  the  ruins  of  heresy.  The  great  King  Henry  IV 
was  murdered  by  an  assassin,  confessedly  driven  to  do  the  dark 
deed  by  what  he  regarded  as  a religious  impulse  like  those 
two  men  who  murdered  Sir  Henry  Wilson  in  our  time  and 
gloried  in  the  deed,  even  after  having  made  their  confession 
to  a priest.16 

“No  religion,”  says  Turgot,  “has  the  right  to  demand  any 
other  protection  than  liberty,  and  it  loses  its  rights  to  this 
liberty,  when  its  doctrines  of  worship  are  contrary  to  the  in- 
terest of  the  state.” 

This  proposition  Catholic  theologians  will  only  admit  on 
condition  that  it  is  conceded  that  no  doctrine  of  the  Catholic 
Church  is  contrary  to  the  interest  or  welfare  of  the  state. 


15  The  bull  Unam  Sanctatn  is  an  exposition  of  the  relations  between 
Church  and  state,  Alzog,  V.  2,  p.  624. 

16  The  murderer  of  the  President-elect  in  Mexico  is  another  instance. 


422 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


Protestant  governments  and  Protestant  peoples  have  never  yet 
formally  made  this  concession  and  so  their  modus  vivendi 
when  it  is  not  open  warfare  is  to  keep  silence  and  call  it 
peace.  It  is  only  the  peace  of  the  volcano  before  it  breaks 
forth  upon  a sleeping  world. 

What  then  is  the  difference  between  the  policy  of  Protes- 
tant and  Catholic  countries?  It  is  this:  Protestant  doctrine 
does  not  today  as  it  once  did,  advocate  union  of  Church  and 
state,  either  as  a doctrine  or  as  a policy;  while  Roman  the- 
ology does  still  advocate  union  of  Church  and  state  both  as 
a doctrine  and  a policy  of  the  Roman  Church.  Again,  Protes- 
tant doctrine  teaches  absolute  liberty  of  conscience  in  all 
matters  not  destructive  of  the  state  itself,  for  all  citizens, 
irrespective  of  creed,  class,  or  color.  But  the  Roman  Church 
has  not  only  no  such  doctrine  of  absolute  liberty  of  con- 
science in  the  premise  but  has  formally  condemned  it  in  prin- 
ciple. The  Roman  system  of  doctrine  and  her  claims  as  the 
only  divinely  appointed  and  infallible  teacher  of  mankind  in 
matters  of  doctrine  and  morals  absolutely  demand  the  con- 
demnation of  liberty  of  conscience  in  the  Protestant  sense. 
Many  Roman  documents  are  clear  on  that  matter  before  the 
Syllabus  of  Pius  IX;  and  the  Catholic  Dictionary  (a.d. 
1917)  tells  us  that  “the  pope’s  power  is  limited  by  a multi- 
tude of  previous  definitions,  due  to  his  predecessors,  to  the 
councils,  to  the  ordinary  exercise  of  the  Church’s  Magiste- 
rium,  through  the  pastors  (bishops)  united  to  the  Holy  See.” 

Here  then  is  where  the  Protestant  world  stands  in  rela- 
tion to  Rome ; it  is  an  outlaw  and  there  is  no  reconciliation 
to  be  expected  from  any  future  pope  except  on  his  own 
terms,  for  he  is  bound  hand  and  foot  by  the  traditions,  bulls, 
decrees,  and  definitions  of  his  predecessors. 

An  Ex  Catholic  Priest. 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


There  is  no  use  of  discussing  the  subject  of  a divinely- 
given  rule  of  faith  and  life  with  one  who  really  believes  that 
there  is  no  God.  It  is  doubtful,  however,  if  there  is  anyone 
in  a Christian  country  so  unreasonable  as  not  to  believe  in  a 
Creator  and  Upholder  of  the  universe.  And  to  one  who  be- 
lieves in  a Creator,  the  questions  inevitably  come:  Can  I 
know  Him?  How  can  I know  Him?  How  much  about  Him 
can  I know  ? Why  did  He  make  the  universe,  including  man- 
kind and  me — with  all  my  longings  after  perfection  and  im- 
mortality and  Him? 

The  great  Apostle  in  the  second  chapter  of  First  Corin- 
thians rightly  argues  from  the  analogy  of  man  that  no  one 
can  know  the  things  of  God  save  the  Spirit  of  God  that  is  in 
Him.  Again,  he  agrees  with  Isaiah  that  “Eye  hath  not  seen, 
nor  ear  heard,  neither  have  entered  into  the  heart  of  man, 
the  things  which  God  hath  prepared  for  them  that  love  Him. 
But  God  hath  revealed  them  unto  us  by  His  Spirit;  for  the 
Spirit  searches  all  things,  yea,  the  deep  things  of  God.”  The 
Old  Testament  claims  to  contain  a series  of  revelations  from 
God  and  the  whole  New  Testament  is  full  of  statements  de- 
claring that  the  Old  Testament  contains  a reliable  record 
of  revelations  of  God  and  that  all  the  Scriptures  were  in- 
spired by  Him.  The  Lord  asserts  that  the  Scriptures  cannot 
be  broken  and  Christianity  rests  upon  this  belief.  All  the 
Churches  and  Creeds  of  Christendom  are  based  upon  the 
supposition  that  the  Scriptures  are  true. 

In  the  present  article,  I shall  consider  some  of  the  objec- 
tive, or  evidential,  grounds  for  concluding  that  this  opinion 
of  the  Church  semper  et  ubique  et  ab  omnibus  is  correct  and 
especially  that  the  thirty-nine  books  of  the  Old  Testament 
are  reasonably  to  be  considered  as  a part  of  the  God-given 
Rule  of  Faith  and  Life.1 

And  first,  let  us  look  at  the  reasonableness  of  this  belief 
to  one  who  acknowledges  that  there  is  a God  and  that  He 


1 Cf.  Westminster  Confession,  Chap.  I. 


424 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


alone  can  reveal  His  will  to  us  as  a rule,  or  canon,  of  faith 
and  life.  It  seems  to  me  that  it  is  no  more  than  what  we,  in 
the  case  of  men,  call  commonsense  for  God  to  provide  that 
any  revelation  that  He  might  make  to  the  human  race  for 
all  time  to  come  would  be  correctly  written  and  preserved. 
Just  as  you  may  be  sure  that  a royal  proclamation  of  King 
George  of  England,  or  a presidential  proclamation,  will  be 
correctly  published  and  transmitted  to  the  persons  for  whom 
it  is  designed ; so  you  may  be  sure,  that  God,  when  speaking 
to  and  through  the  prophets  for  the  instruction  and  benefit 
of  the  whole  human  race,  would  see  to  it  that  what  He  had 
to  say  was  correctly  recorded  and  transmitted  to  that  race. 
Further,  it  would  inevitably  follow  that  these  records  would 
at  some  time  be  collected  in  proper  form  and  that  this  col- 
lection would  be  handed  down  in  a sufficiently  correct  condi- 
tion to  those  for  whom  it  was  intended.  It  is  a surprising 
fact  of  history  that  not  merely  the  Jewish  people  but,  with 
possibly  one  exception,  all  branches  of  the  Christian  Church 
always  and  everywhere,  have  agreed  in  accepting  all  the 
books  of  our  Hebrew  Bible  as  constituting  a part  at  least  of 
the  inspired  word  of  God.  This  gives  me  great  confidence 
in  undertaking  my  task  of  defending  the  position  that  the 
right  books  were  selected  and  handed  down.  And  most  of  all 
do  I undertake  my  task  with  a feeling  of  joy  that  I may  do 
something  at  least  to  remove  the  doubts  of  honest  believers 
in  the  teaching  of  the  New  Testament,  when  confronted  with 
the  assertion,  said  to  be  the  result  of  scientific  investigation, 
that  the  Old  Testament  is  not  what  Christ  and  the  Apostles 
thought  it  to  be. 

In  this  article,  I shall  restrict  myself  to  a statement  of 
some  of  the  direct  evidence  calculated  to  show  that  the  indi- 
rect evidence  alleged  by  many  critics  of  the  Old  Testament 
to  prove  that  the  completion  of  the  Canon  was  not  made  till 
about  a.d.  90  is  inadequate.  The  evidence  to  be  given  bears 
especially  upon  seven  allegations. 

The  Seven  Allegations 

1.  That  the  Samaritans  accepted  as  canonical  the  Penta- 
teuch alone. 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


425 


2.  That  the  term  “Law”  being  used  at  times  in  the  New 
Testament  and  in  Jewish  writings  to  denote  the  whole  Old 
Testament  and  the  phrase  “Law  and  Prophets”  at  other 
times,  shows  that  there  was  a time  when  the  Law  constituted 
all  of  the  Canon  and  later  when  it  consisted  of  the  Law  and 
the  Prophets  alone.2 

3.  That  several  books  in  the  present  Bible  were  not  written 
until  after  the  time  of  Ezra  and  even  as  late  as  Maccabean 
times. 

4.  That  the  canonicity  of  certain  books  was  not  finally 
decided  among  the  Jews  till  the  Council  of  Jamnia  about 

A.D.  90. 

5.  That  the  synagogue  lessons  were  taken  exclusively 
from  the  Law  and  the  Prophets  because  the  canonicity  of  the 
other  books  was  not  acknowledged  when  these  lessons  were 
selected. 

6.  That  there  are  indications  in  the  order  of  the  books  in 
both  the  Prophets  and  the  third  part  of  the  Canon  tending 
to  show  that  these  divisions  of  the  Old  Testament  were 
formed  gradually. 

7.  That  the  “three-fold  division  of  the  Canon  itself  affords 
a clue  to  the  mode  of  its  formation.”3 

Discussion  of  the  Allegations 

When  and  by  whom  the  present  divisions  in  the  Old 
Testament  Hebrew  Bible  were  made,  we  do  not  know.  We 
do  know,  however,  that  many  of  the  books  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment were  written  centuries  before  their  canonicity  was 
generally  acknowledged.  The  Church  has  always  held  that 
these  books  were  canonical  from  the  time  that  they  were 
written  and  that  their  authority  depends  upon  the  fact  that 
they  were  written  by  inspiration  of  God.  They  are  a rule  of 
faith  and  life  for  all  men,  whether  these  men  accept  them  as 
such,  or  not.  But,  as  to  many  of  them,  we  are  ignorant  of 
their  authors,  the  time  when  they  were  written,  and  the 

2 Cf . W.  H.  Green,  General  Introduction  to  the  Old  Testament:  The 
Canon  (1899),  P-  I0°- 

3 Ibid.,  pp.  22-25. 


426 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


time  when  they  were  accepted.  We  do  not  know  what  were 
the  divisions  in  the  earliest  collections,  but  we  do  know 
that  there  must  have  been  divisions ; because  the  whole  Old 
Testament  could  not  have  been  written  on  one  portable 
leather  or  papyrus  volume  nor  on  less  than  numerous  tab- 
lets. Whether  these  divisions  were  consciously  made  or 
commonly  received,  we  do  not  know ; nor,  what  was  the 
number  or  order  of  the  different  books  in  these  divisions. 
We  do  know,  however,  that  in  our  Hebrew  Bible,  we  have 
the  books  that  were  acknowledged  by  the  Jews  of  the  time  of 
Christ  as  canonical  and  that  Christ  and  the  Apostles  recog- 
nized the  same  canon  of  Holy  Scripture. 

This  whole  matter  of  the  order  and  divisions  of  the  books 
of  the  Old  Testament  might  be  considered  one  of  minor 
importance,  were  it  not  for  the  fact  that  many  critics  write 
as  if  they  knew  when  these  divisions  were  made  and  the 
content  of  them,  and  are  using  this  presumed  knowl- 
edge to  cast  suspicion  upon  the  date  and  reliability  of  many 
of  the  books.  I think,  therefore,  that  it  may  guard  the  faith 
of  believers,  if  I state  the  main  evidence  on  the  ground  of 
which  I am  convinced  that  the  critics  are  wrong  in  their 
view  as  to  the  formation  of  the  Canon  of  the  Old 
Testament. 

In  the  first  place,  the  Bible  itself  is  not  so  devoid  of  infor- 
mation on  this  subject,  as  some  would  have  us  conclude. 
Long  before  the  time  of  Moses,  Adam  and  Noah  and  Abra- 
ham had  received  commandments  and  visions  from  God  that 
were  the  rule  of  their  faith  and  life,  and  were  handed  down 
for  the  guidance  and  observation  of  future  generations.  The 
code  of  the  Covenant  was  accepted  by  the  people  at  Sinai* 
and  the  whole  law  at  Shittim5  and  re-adopted  at  Shechem.6 
The  books  of  Joshua,7  Judges,8  Samuel,9  Kings,10  and 

4 Ex.  xx-xxiv. 

5 Num.  xxv.  I. 

6 Josh.  xxiv.  i. 

7 Josh.  xxiv.  26. 

8 Jud.  ii.  20. 

9 Passim.  Cf.  Green,  The  Higher  Criticism  of  the  Pentateuch,  p.  52. 

10  Passim.  Cf.  op.  cit.,  p.  53. 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


427 


Nehemiah11  show  that  the  Law  of  Moses  was  accepted  by 
the  people  of  Israel  and  their  only  rule  of  faith  and  life. 
This  rule  was  to  be  taught  by  fathers  to  their  children12  and 
by  the  priests  to  the  people13  and  the  king  was  expected  to 
observe  it.14  The  prophets,  also,  encouraged  and  emphasized 
the  obligation  and  beneficient  results  of  the  keeping  of  the 
Law,  and  enforced  their  preaching  by  new  messages  of 
threatening  and  grace  from  the  God  of  Abraham  and  Israel, 
and  their  messages  were  accepted  by  the  faithful  as  the 
rule  of  their  faith  and  life.  Filled  with  the  Spirit  of  Jehovah 
the  poets  and  wise  men  of  Israel  wrote  psalms  and  idylls 
and  proverbs  and  philosophies  of  life  in  praise  of  God  and 
of  His  law  and  in  commendation  of  the  godly  life  and  con- 
demnation of  the  wicked.  What  men  were  to  believe  concern- 
ing God  and  sin  and  death  and  judgment  and  the  necessity 
of  a God-wrought  redemption  was  repeatedly  and  in  many 
ways  set  forth ; so  that  the  Scriptures  of  “divine  origin  and 
excellence”  and  “inspired  of  God”  were  “profitable,  for 
doctrine,  for  reproof,  for  correction  and  for  instruction 
which  is  in  righteousness.”  “At  sundry  times  and  in  divers 
manners,  God  spake  unto  the  fathers  by  the  prophets”  and 
what  He  spake  was  for  them  and  their  descendents  a rule  of 
faith  and  practice  and  life.  God’s  law  given  at  Sinai  was  the 
Magna  Charta  of  Israel’s  rights  and  obligations.  The  Pro- 
phets and  the  other  writings  that  were  added  to  this  law 
must  be  in  harmony  with  it  and  must  serve  the  purpose  of 
showing  its  most  profitable  use  and  the  danger  of  its  neglect. 

Such  works  written  by  men  inspired  by  the  Spirit  of  God 
needed  no  council,  nor  senate,  of  great  men  to  cause  their 
acceptance.  The  people  of  God  themselves  recognized  the 
works  of  the  prophets  and  wise  men  as  a part  of  the  infalli- 
ble rule  of  faith  and  life  which  God  designed  for  them; 
and  by  selection  and  elimination  the  present  Canon  of  the 
Old  Testament  was  formed  under  the  special  guidance  of 

11  Neh.  viii. 

12  Gen.  xviii.  19,  Ex.  xiii.  11,  Deut.  vi.  20,  et  al. 

13  2 Chron.  xv.  3,  xvii.  7-9. 

14  Deut.  xvii.  18. 


428 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


the  prophets  and  the  enlightening  influence  of  the  Spirit  of 
God.  The  Jews  have  taught  that  a book  to  be  canonical  must 
be  in  harmony  with  the  Law  and  have  been  written  before 
the  succession  of  the  prophets  ceased.  This  seems  to  be  rea- 
sonable and,  as  far  as  anybody  knows,  it  is  agreeable  to  the 
evidence. 

But,  notwithstanding  the  fact  that  the  critics  admit  there 
is  no  direct,  nor  explicit,  evidence  that  any  of  the  books 
were  written  after  400  b.c.,  nor  that  the  divisions  of  the 
Canon  recognized  in  our  Hebrew  Bible  as  Law,  Prophets 
and  Hagiographa  (or  Writings),  were  constituted  and 
closed  one  after  the  other  by  enactment  of  some  body  of 
men  in  authority,  they  all  persist  in  affirming  that  the  Law 
was  first  officially  declared  to  be  canonical  by  Ezra  and  his 
contemporaries,  the  Prophetical  Books,  consisting  of  Joshua, 
Judges,  Samuel,  Kings,  Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel  and  the 
Twelve  Minor  Prophets  by  some  unknown  authority  about 
200  b.c.,  and  all  of  the  books  at  the  council  of  Jamnia  in 
a.d.  90.  With  all  due  deference  to  the  learning  of  the  lead- 
ers of  these  critics,  it  is  my  judgment  that  the  prima  facie 
evidence  of  the  documents  bearing  upon  the  matter,  as  well 
as  of  the  traditions  of  the  Jews,  is  against  the  critics’  affir- 
mations and  conclusions  in  reference  to  the  origin  and 
formation  of  the  Old  Testament  Canon. 

And,  first  of  all,  this  judgment  of  mine  is  based  upon  the 
consideration  that,  in  order  to  accept  the  allegations  of  the 
radical  critics  as  correct,  we  will  have  to  conclude  that  almost 
every  document  of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments  rests  upon 
false  assumptions  and  is  itself  a witness  in  favor  of  what 
should  have  been  known  to  be  false.  It  is  only  as  we  conceive 
of  the  Bible  as  written  by  the  inspiration  of  God  that  we 
can  speak  of  it  as  one  book  with  a single  author.  If  we  be- 
lieve that  it  is  such  a book,  it  would  be  impious,  or  blas- 
phemous, for  us  to  think  that  it  was  full  of  errors  and 
misstatements  as  the  critics  allege.  If  on  the  other  hand, 
we  look  at  the  human  authors,  we  will  find  at  least  forty  dif- 
ferent men  involved  in  a general  accusation  of  forgery  and 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


429 


falsehood,  or  of  a blameworthy  and  inexcusable  assumption 
of  a knowledge  and  piety  which  they  did  not  possess.  Be- 
sides, the  men  who  wrote  most  of  the  Old  Testament  were 
not  the  mean  and  unknown  and  uneducated  men  of  their 
day  and  generation.  One  author  alone  of  all  the  writers  of 
the  Old  Testament  disclaims  any  special  preparation  for  his 
work,  except  the  call  of  God.  Only  two  authors  of  books  of 
the  New  Testament  can  possibly  be  charged  with  a lack  of 
literary  education;  yet  those  two  who  wrote  three  of  the 
smallest  letters  had  been  specially  trained  by  the  Lord  Him- 
self. But  all  the  other  authors,  both  of  the  Old  Testament 
and  of  the  New,  had  the  finest  education  which  the  times 
afforded.  God  chose  the  brightest  and  the  best  to  do  His 
work  of  providing  a divine  library  for  the  world  of  men  in 
all  time  and  in  every  land.  Egypt  furnished  the  adopted  son 
of  Pharaoh’s  daughter,  trained  in  all  the  wisdom  of  that 
land  of  letters  and  arts,  to  be  the  mediator  of  the  old  cove- 
nant and  the  founder  of  the  Israelitish  government  and  reli- 
gion. Assyria  bowed  before  the  threats  of  Jonah.  Daniel  was 
taught  the  letters  and  science  of  the  Babylonians;  and  Mor- 
decai,  Ezra  and  Nehemiah  were  prime  ministers  of  the 
kings  of  Persia.  Isaiah  and  Jeremiah  directed  the  policy  of 
Judah.  And  what  shall  one  say  of  Samuel,  the  king-maker, 
and  of  David,  the  sweet  singer  of  Israel,  and  of  Solomon 
in  all  his  glory?  And  how  can  we  depreciate  John,  the  be- 
loved, and  Paul,  the  matchless  proclaimer  of  the  mysteries 
of  God  ? And  where  in  all  history  and  literature  can  we  find 
a body  of  writers  who  make  the  burden  of  their  themes  the 
highest  thoughts  and  noblest  deeds  that  ever  entered  the 
mind  of  man?  Men  of  such  character  and  intellect  and  high 
sense  of  sin  and  reverence  for  God  can  be  safely  trusted  not 
to  have  been  false  in  the  solemn  and  reverent  statements 
which  they  have  made  about  the  will  of  God  and  the  duty 
of  man. 

Besides,  we  are  met  by  the  astounding  and  inexplicable 
fact,  that  Israelites  and  Christians  alike,  scribes,  rabbis, 
Origen,  Jerome,  Eusebius,  Calvin,  Melancthon,  Heng- 


43° 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


stenberg  and  scores  of  other  scholars  as  learned  and  brilliant 
as  any  whom  the  critics  can  muster,  have  recognized  these 
records  as  true  and  trustworthy. 

And  there  are  five  great  items  of  evidence  that  are  existing 
today  and  which  nobody  can  deny  or  fail  to  recognize  which 
support  the  trustworthiness  of  the  Bible.  The  first  is  the 
Jews.  The  second  is  the  Christian  Church.  The  third  is  the 
Bible  itself.  The  fourth  is  the  appeal  which  the  Bible  still 
makes  to  the  millions  of  believers.  And  the  fifth  is  the  effect 
which  ft  has  produced  and  still  produces  on  the  peoples  who 
have  accepted  the  Bible  and  have  tried  to  obey  its  precepts, 
to  fear  its  God,  and  to  follow  in  the  footsteps  of  the  strong 
Son  of  God  whom  it  portrays. 

When,  then,  we  come  to  investigate  these  literary  pro- 
ducts, let  us  admit  at  least  that  we  are  coming  in  contact  with 
the  thoughts  and  descriptions  of  men  who  have  never  been 
surpassed  in  the  exaltation  of  their  ideals  and  in  their  fitness 
for  their  task.  And,  if  we  are  Christians,  let  us  not  hesitate 
to  adopt  as  true  to  fact  the  accounts  of  miracles  and  the 
prediction  of  future  events,  inasmuch  as  the  whole  Christian 
system  is  itself  a miracle  from  the  creation  to  the  constitu- 
tion of  the  new  heavens  and  the  new  earth  wherein  dwelleth 
righteousness. 

Of  course,  we  freely  admit  that,  if  the  critics  could  prove 
that  the  books  of  the  Old  Testament  are  unreliable,  we 
would  be  obliged  to  revise  our  views  of  it.  But,  we  do  not 
know  of  any  valid  proofs  the  critics  have  to  offer.  In  our 
judgment  the  religions  outside  the  Bible  present  no  litera- 
ture that  can  rival  that  of  the  Old  Testament  merely  as 
literature;  and  when  it  comes  to  religion,  they  fail  to  satisfy 
us  on  the  main  points  of  what  God  is  and  what  He  requires 
of  man.  Further,  the  history  of  all  other  nations  outside  of 
Israel  shows  us  that  they  were  without  the  knowledge  of  the 
true  God,  except  as  they  had  derived  this  knowledge  from 
Israel  itself.  Besides,  in  our  opinion,  the  history  of  Egypt, 
Assyria,  Babylon  and  Persia,  so  far  as  it  is  known,  corrobo- 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


43 1 


rates  and  harmonizes  with  the  facts  recorded  on  the  sacred 
pages  of  the  Bible. 

Again,  in  the  second  place,  not  merely  is  the  theory  of  the 
critics  out  of  harmony  with  the  prima  facie  evidence  of  the 
Scriptures  themselves  and,  also,  entirely  unsupported  by  com- 
parative religion  and  history ; it  is  contrary,  also,  to  the  facts 
as  revealed  in  the  language  in  which  the  books  of  the  Old 
Testament  are  written.  This  I have  sufficiently  and,  I think, 
conclusively  shown  in  three  articles  already  published  in  this 
Review.  In  the  first  of  these,15  I endeavored  to  show  that  the 
use  of  Aramaisms  in  the  Old  Testament  literature  corresponds 
exactly  to  what  we  would  have  expected,  if  the  records  are 
true.  In  the  second,16  I answered  the  objections  to  the  prima 
facie  and  traditional  account  of  the  origin  and  age  of  the 
Old  Testament  documents  so  far  as  these  are  affected  by  the 
alleged  presence  in  some  of  them  of  so-called  New  Hebrew 
words.  In  the  third,17  I took  under  consideration  all  the 
Egyptian,  Babylonian,  Persian  and  other  foreign  words  and 
found  that  their  occurrence  in  the  literature  of  the  Old 
Testament  is  such  as  we  would  have  found  only  if  that  lit- 
erature is  historically  correct  as  to  the  time  and  place  of 
its  origin. 

In  the  third  place,  my  readers  must  notice,  that  the  canoni- 
cal authority  of  a book  of  the  Bible  does  not  depend  upon 
the  time  when  all  the  books  were  collected  into  one.  God 
made  the  books  canonical,  not  man.  But,  neither  does  the 
canonical  authority  of  a book  depend  upon  the  time  at  which 
it  was  acknowledged  as  such  by  the  church  at  large.  The 
failure  of  the  Jewish  church  until  a.d.  90  to  acknowledge 
finally  that  Ezekiel  and  Ecclesiastes  were  canonical  would 
not  prove  that  they  had  not  been  a part  of  the  Canon  until 
that  time.  Much  less  would  it  show  that  these  books  had  not 
been  written  before  the  first  century  a.d. 

15  “Aramaisms  in  the  Old  Testament”  (Vol.  XXIII,  pp.  234-266). 

16  “Evidence  in  Hebrew  Diction  for  the  Dates  of  Documents”  (Vol. 
XXV,  pp.  353-88). 

17  “Foreign  Words  in  the  Old  Testament  as  an  Evidence  of  Histo- 
ricity” (Vol.  XXVI,  pp.  177-247). 


432 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


In  the  fourth  place,  let  me  refer  my  readers  to  my  Scientific 
Investigation  of  the  Old  Testament 18  and  my  articles  on  the 
Psalms  in  this  Review19  for  an  answer  to  the  assertions  of 
the  critics  that  several  books  of  the  Old  Testament  were 
written  after  the  time  of  Ezra. 

In  the  fifth  place,  the  term  “law”  was  used  in  two  senses: 
to  denote  the  whole  rule  of  faith  and  life,  i.e.,  the  whole 
Canon  of  the  Old  Testament;  and,  also,  in  a narrower  sense 
of  the  books  of  Moses  alone.  This  double  sense  and  use  of 
the  word  “law”  is  true,  also,  of  the  words  “prophets”  and 
“scriptures.”  Since,  therefore,  every  one  of  these  was  em- 
ployed at  times  to  denote  a part  and  at  times  to  denote  the 
whole  of  the  Old  Testament,  it  is  hard  to  see  how  the  men- 
tion of  one  of  them  alone  should  have  anything  to  do  with 
the  question  of  their  order  when  taken  together;  much  less 
how  it  could  show  which  was  written  first  and  which  last. 

In  the  sixth  place,  we  must  remember  that  books  consist- 
ing of  folios,  as  ours  do,  did  not  come  into  existence  until 
the  second  century  a.d.  Before  that  time,  they  were  written 
on  rolls  (hence  the  word  “volume”),  or  tablets,  and  every 
man’s  collection  might  be  arranged  by  himself  into  what 
divisions  and  order  he  saw  fit.  This  will  be  apparent  from 
the  evidence  given  under  the  next  section. 

Lastly,  in  proof  that  the  order  and  divisions  of  the  books 
were  never  fixed  by  law  and  that  the  age  and  authorship 
did  not  necessarily  determine  the  position  of  a book  in  the 
Canon,  but  that  they  were  arranged  to  suit  the  convenience 
or  the  whim  of  the  owners  or  users,  I present  the  evidence 
found  in  the  ancient  documents  bearing  on  the  case.20 

I am  aware  that  the  fact  that  the  Law  of  Moses  always  is 
put  first  is  likely  to  seem  to  be  against  this  statement.  But 

18  A Scientific  Investigation  of  the  Old  Testament  (The  Sunday 
School  Times  Co.,  1926). 

19  “The  Headings  of  the  Psalms”  (Vol.  XXIV,  pp.  1-37,  353-395). 

20  Most  of  the  evidence  from  Greek  and  (Latin  sources  given  below 
will  be  found  in  my  article,  “The  Book  of  Daniel  and  the  Canon,”  in  this 
Review,  Vol.  XIII,  pp.  352-408.  In  that  article  the  lists  of  Jerome  were 
inadvertently  omitted. 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


433 


it  is  not,  for  the  good  and  sufficient  reason  that  frequency  of 
use  as  well  as  the  fact  that  its  contents  are  the  natural  and 
preliminary  requirement  for  a correct  understanding  of  all 
the  other  literature  and  history  render  its  right  to  the  first 
place  a necessity  for  any  principle  of  division.  We  shall  find, 
however,  that  the  order  of  books  in  this  division  is  not 
always  the  same. 

The  order  of  the  books  in  the  Pentateuch  is  not  mentioned 
in  the  Old  or  New  Testaments,  though  the  references  to 
events  recorded  in  Exodus  succeed  those  mentioned  in 
Genesis  in  the  various  psalms  where  they  occur  as  they  do  in 
the  speech  of  Stephen  and  in  the  eleventh  chapter  of  He- 
brews. No  reference  to  any  one  of  the  five  books  by  name 
and  no  order  of  the  books  occurs  in  any  place  until  after 
the  time  of  Christ. 

It  is  a fact  not  dwelt  upon  by  the  critics  that  MS  124  of 
Kennicott  gives  the  order  of  the  books  of  the  Law  as  Gene- 
sis, Exodus,  Deuteronomy,  Leviticus,  Numbers;  and  that 
the  list  of  Melito  and  that  of  Leontius  give  the  order  as 
Genesis,  Exodus,  Numbers,  Leviticus,  Deuteronomy.  This 
is  especially  noteworthy  in  the  case  of  Melito,  who  was 
bishop  of  Sardis  in  a.d.  180  and  gives  the  earliest  complete 
list  of  the  books  of  the  Old  Testament  that  we  possess;  and 
further,  because  he  expressly  says  that  when  he  came  East 
“he  learned  accurately  the  books  of  the  Old  Testament” 
and  sent  a list  of  the  books  to  Onesimus  who  had  “de- 
sired to  have  an  accurate  statement  of  the  ancient  books, 
as  regards  their  number  and  their  order.”  Thus,  it  is  evident, 
that  the  order  of  the  books  of  the  Pentateuch  was  not  fixed, 
seeing  that,  counting  the  usual  order,  there  are  three  orders 
known  from  ancient  documents. 

The  fact  that  both  the  Hebrew  and  Aramaic  recensions 
of  the  Samaritan  Pentateuch  have  the  common  order  is,  we 
think,  decidedly  in  favor  of  its  being  the  most  original.  For, 
whether  the  Samaritans  received  their  copy  of  the  Penta- 
teuch in  the  time  of  the  Assyrians21  (seventh  century  b.c.) 


21  Cf.  2 Kgs.  xviii. 


434 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


or  in  the  time  of  Sanballat22  (fifth  century  b.c.),  it  repre- 
sents its  condition  centuries  before  any  other  source  of 
information. 

Ben  Sira,  in  his  great  work  Ecclesiasticus,  speaks  many 
times  of  the  T ora,  or  Law ; but  he  does  not  give  the  order  of 
the  books,  nor  even  refer  to  a five-fold  division  of  them.  He 
cites  his  heroes  of  Israel  in  chronological  order  without 
regard  to  where  they  are  described.  His  order  of  citation  is, 
for  the  books  outside  the  Law,  Joshua,  Judges,  Samuel, 
Kings,  Isaiah  and  Chronicles,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel,  Job 
(whom  he  calls  a prophet),  the  Twelve  (without  defining 
who  they  were)23  and  Nehemiah.  It  is  to  be  noted  that  he 
makes  the  order  of  the  prophets,  Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel, 
Job  and  the  XII. 

In  the  prologue  to  the  translation  of  Ecclesiasticus  into 
Greek,  made  by  Ben  Sira’s  grandson  about  130  b.c.,  the 
latter  three  times  speaks  of  three  divisions  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment, as  follows : the  first  division  he  three  times  calls  “the 
Law”;  the  second  division,  three  times,  “the  Prophets”; 
and  the  third  division,  first,  “the  other  books  which  follow 
them”;  secondly,  “the  other  ancestral  books”;  thirdly,  “the 
rest  of  the  books.”  It  is  to  be  noticed  that  he  does  not  give 
the  name  of  anyone  of  the  books,  nor  the  number  in  any 
division,  nor,  the  order,  nor  the  time  nor  place  of  composi- 
tion, nor,  the  time  when  they  had  been  acknowledged  as  part 
of  the  Canon,  nor  why. 

The  First  Book  of  Maccabees  represents  Mattathias,  the 
father  of  the  Maccabees  as  making  a speech  in  169  b.c.,  in 
which  he  calls  “to  remembrance  the  acts  which  their  father 
did  in  their  time.”  In  his  speech  (ii.  49-61)  he  mentions  in 
order  the  deeds  of  Abraham,  Joseph,  Phinehas,  Joshua, 
Caleb,  David,  Elijah,  Ananias,  Azarias,  Misael  and  Daniel. 

22  Cf.  Nehemiah  (passim). 

23  At  this  time,  Jonah  may  have  been  a part  of  the  book  of  Kings;  or 
Zechariah  and  Malachi  may  have  been  counted  as  one;  or  Daniel  may 
have  been  included  among  the  Twelve,  as  the  use  of  the  word  comforted 
(oSnn,  literally,  to  cause  to  dream,  or  “see  dreams”)  might  indicate. 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


435 


It  will  be  noted,  that  he  follows  the  chronological  order  of 
the  canonical  books  and  that  he  seems  to  consider  the  ac- 
counts of  the  three  children  and  of  Daniel  just  as  reliable  as 
what  is  said  about  Abraham,  David  and  Elias. 

The  Second  Book  of  Maccabees,  written  in  124  b.c.,  tells 
of  “the  records  and  commentaries  of  Nehemiah  and  how, 
founding  a library,  he  gathered  together  the  books  concerning 
the  kings  and  the  prophets  and  those  of  David  and  epistles 
of  kings  concerning  votive  offerings”  (ii.  13).  The  Syriac 
translation  says  that  he  “collected  and  arranged  in  order 
these  books.”  Unfortunately,  the  author  of  this  book  does 
not  state  what  this  order  was  nor  what  books  were  included 
in  the  various  divisions.  Counting  the  Law,  which  all  of 
these  divisions  cite,  this  would  make  five  divisions  in  all  in 
the  collection  of  Nehemiah : his  books  of  “Kings”  would 
include  Joshua,  Judges,  Ruth,  Samuel,  Kings,  and  probably 
Chronicles,  Esther  and  Ezra.  “David”  would  probably  be 
the  Book  of  Psalms.  “Prophets”  might  embrace  Job  and 
Daniel,  so  that  Solomon’s  three  books  alone  would  be 
omitted  from  this  collection. 

Philo  of  Alexandria  (1st  cty.  a.d.)  says  in  his  De  Vita  Con- 
templativa  that  the  Therapeutae  received  “the  Law  and  the 
oracles  uttered  by  the  prophets  and  the  hymns  and  other 
(writings)  by  which  knowledge  and  piety  are  augmented 
and  perfected.”  Here  are  three,  or  possibly  four,  divisions, 
but  no  indication  of  the  books  in  each  division,  nor  of  the 
order  in  which  they  were  arranged,  nor  of  their  number,  or 
names.  The  phrase,  “the  other”  (writings,  or  books,  or 
poems)  by  which  “knowledge  and  piety  are  augmented  and 
perfected”  probably  were  the  same  as  are  meant  by  Josephus 
when  he  says,  after  mentioning  the  Law  and  the  thirteen 
books  of  the  Prophets,  that  the  remaining  four  books  contain 
“hymns  to  God  and  precepts  for  the  conduct  of  human  life.” 

In  Luke  xxiv.  44  the  Lord  speaks  of  those  things  that 
were  written  concerning  Him  “in  the  Law  of  Moses  and  in 
the  Prophets  and  in  the  Psalms.”  There  is  no  doubt  from 
this  statement  that  the  Psalms  might  be  put  in  a division 


436 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


separate  from  the  Law,  or  the  Prophets.  Nevertheless,  there 
is  no  warrant  elsewhere  for  supposing  that  “Psalms”  was 
thought  to  be  a suitable  designation  for  a division  containing 
Esther,  Ezra-Nehemiah,  Chronicles  and  Daniel.  The  word 
“Law”  might  include  and  often  did  include  the  prophets  and 
all  the  other  sacred  literature,  since  it  was  all  looked  upon 
as  canonical,  that  is,  as  a rule,  or  law,  of  faith  and  life.  The 
word  “Prophets”  might  be  used  for  all  the  Old  Testament 
and,  as  a matter  of  fact,  was  so  used;  for  the  Law  was  writ- 
ten by  Moses,  the  greatest  of  the  prophets,  and  it  was  a 
principle  of  the  Jews  that  a book  to  be  canonical  had  to  have 
been  composed  by,  or  sanctioned  by,  a prophet.  But,  the 
word  “Psalms”  is  never  elsewhere  used  for  the  whole  divi- 
sion; nor,  anywhere  else  but  here,  as  a possible  heading  of  a 
third  division.  But,  in  view  of  the  fact  that  Philo  and  Jose- 
phus use  the  synonym  “Hymns”  to  denote  the  third  divi- 
sion, let  us  wave  this  evidence  aside  as  being  hyper-critical. 
Remember,  however,  that  neither  Philo  nor  Josephus  classed 
Esther,  Ezra,  Chronicles  or  Daniel  under  the  heading 
“Hymns.”  Let  us  remember,  also,  that  both  Ben  Sira  expressly 
and  Josephus  by  implication  put  Job  among  the  Prophets 
and  that  the  Lord  speaks  of  “Daniel  the  prophet”  and  Jose- 
phus calls  him  the  greatest  of  the  prophets.  The  common- 
sense  view,  then,  seems  to  be,  that  by  “the  Psalms”  the  Lord 
meant  the  same  as  we  do  when  we  use  the  designation.  He 
probably  singled  them  out  from  the  “other  writings,”  be- 
cause they  of  all  the  books  of  the  Old  Testament  say  the  most 
concerning  Him  and  His  kingdom.  In  conclusion,  let  it  be 
noted,  that  this  passage  in  Luke,  while  recognizing  three 
divisions,  does  not  give  the  order  nor  the  number  of  the 
books  in  anyone  of  the  divisions;  nor  does  it  mention  the 
name  of  any  book,  except  the  Psalms. 

In  Luke  xxiv.  27,  we  read  that  the  Lord,  “beginning  from 
Moses  and  out  of  all  the  Prophets  expounded  in  all  the 
Scriptures  the  things  concerning  himself.”  As  “all  the  Scrip- 
tures” evidently  means  the  whole  Old  Testament,  it  is  most 
natural  to  suppose  that  “Law  and  Prophets”  here  denotes  the 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


437 


same;  though  it  is  fair  to  grant,  that  there  is  a possibility 
that  other  books  in  a third  division  may  have  been  in  the  mind 
of  the  writer.  However  that  may  be,  in  John  i.  45  we  find 
Nathanael  saying  that  Jesus  of  Nazareth  was  “he  of  whom 
Moses  in  the  Law  and  the  Prophets  did  write,”  mentioning 
only  two  divisions,  Neither  number,  order,  nor  names  of 
books  are  given  in  these  two  passages. 

In  Mt.  xxiv.  15  a prediction  is  cited  by  the  Lord  as  having 
been  “spoken  of  by  Daniel  the  prophet.”  In  Mt.  xiii.  55,  the 
78th  Psalm  which  in  the  heading  is  called  “a  maschil  of 
Asaph”  is  said  by  Matthew  to  have  been  spoken  by  “a 
prophet.”  In  Acts  ii.  29-36  David,  as  author  of  the  noth 
Psalm,  is  by  Peter  called  a “prophet.”  In  Mt.  iii.  3,  Isaiah; 
in  Mt.  xii.  39,  Jonah;  in  Acts  ii.  16,  Joel;  and  in  Mt.  xxvii. 
9,  Jeremiah  are  respectively  called  “the  prophet.”  From  these 
passages,  we  see  that  Jesus  and  the  Apostles,  Matthew  and 
Peter,  designate  Daniel,  David  and  Asaph  as  “prophets,” 
and  this  in  formal  addresses  where  they  must  have  known 
that  their  audiences  agreed  with  them  in  their  use  of  the 
designation.  This  should  teach  us  all  to  be  careful  about 
accepting,  without  any  direct  evidence  in  its  favor,  the  asser- 
tion of  the  critics  that  the  Prophetical,  or  second,  division  of 
the  Old  Testament  Canon  was  closed  about  200  b.c.  For  we 
see  that  writers,  whose  works  are  in  what  later  constituted 
for  the  Jews  the  Hagiographa,  or  third  part  of  the  Old 
Testament,  were  cited  in  the  first  century  a.d.  as  prophets 
just  in  the  same  manner  as  Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Joel,  and 
Jonah;  and  that  the  whole  Old  Testament  was  designated 
by  Luke  and  by  Nathanael  (on  the  authority  of  John)  as 
the  Law  and  the  Prophets. 

This  caution  appears  to  be  more  necessary,  when  we  come 
to  consider  the  testimony  of  Josephus,  our  other  great  wit- 
ness from  the  first  century  a.d.  Josephus  says,  “We  have  only 
twenty-two  books,  which  contain  the  records  of  all  the  past 
times,  which  are  justly  believed  to  be  divine;  and  of  them 
five  belong  to  Moses  . . . but  as  to  the  time  from  the  death 
of  Moses  till  the  reign  of  Artaxerxes,  king  of  Persia,  who 


438  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

reigned  after  Xerxes  (i.e.,  from  466  to  424  b.c.),  the 
prophets,  who  came  after  Moses,  wrote  down  what  was 
done  in  their  times  in  thirteen  books.  The  remaining  four 
books  contain  hymns  to  God,  and  precepts  for  the  conduct 
of  human  life.  It  is  true,  our  history  has  been  written  since 
Artaxerxes,  very  particularly,  but  hath  not  been  esteemed 
of  like  authority  with  the  former  by  our  forefathers,  because 
there  hath  not  been  an  exact  succession  of  prophets  since 
that  time ; and  how  firmly  we  have  given  credit  to  those  books 
of  our  own  nation  is  evident  by  what  we  do ; for  during  so 
many  ages  as  have  already  passed,  no  one  has  been  so  bold  as 
either  to  add  anything  to  them  or  take  anything  from 
them.”24 

1.  It  will  be  seen  that  Josephus  states  expressly  that  the 
Jews  of  his  time  had  only  twenty-two  books  “justly  believed 
to  be  divine.”  Of  these,  five  constituted  the  Law,  or  first 
division.  The  four  in  the  third  division  are  said  to  “contain 
hymns  to  God,  and  precepts  for  the  conduct  of  human  life.” 
These  are  probably  the  Psalms,  Proverbs,  Ecclesiastes  and 
the  Song  of  Songs.  The  thirteen  books  of  the  Prophets,  or 
second  division,  would  be  Joshua,  Judges  (including  Ruth), 
Samuel,  Kings,  Chronicles,  Ezra-Nehemiah,  Esther,  Job, 
Isaiah,  Jeremiah  (including  Lamentations),  Ezekiel,  Daniel 
and  the  Twelve  Minor  Prophets  (all  in  one  volume). 

2.  He  limits  the  time  in  which  the  authors  of  the  Prophe- 
tical Books  lived  by  the  year  424  b.c.  when  Artaxerxes  I 
died. 

3.  He  further  limits  the  time  at  which  the  last  of  the  Old 
Testament  books  was  written  by  the  “exact  succession  of 
the  prophets,”  i.e.,  by  the  time  of  Malachi. 

The  greatest  list  from  the  second  century  a.d.  is  that  of 
Melito,  bishop  of  Sardis  about  a.d.  175  in  his  “catalogue  of 
the  books  of  the  Old  Testament  which  it  is  necessary  to 
quote.”  We  have  two  copies  of  this  catalogue,  one  preserved 
in  the  Ecclesiastical  History  of  Eusebius;25  the  other,  in  the 

24  Contra  Apion,  I.  8. 

25 IV.  26. 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


439 


Syriac  Fragments  of  Cureton.  The  list  of  books  given  by 
Melito  in  the  Greek  recension  is  as  follows:  Genesis,  Exo- 
dus, Numbers,  Leviticus,  Deuteronomy,  five  books,  Jesus 
Nave,  Judges,  Ruth,  four  books  of  Kings,  two  of  Chronicles, 
the  Psalms  of  David,  the  Proverbs  of  Solomon  (which  also 
is  Wisdom),  Ecclesiastes,  Song  of  Songs,  Job;  of  Prophets; 
Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  the  XII,  Daniel,  Ezekiel,  Esdras.  The 
Syriac  recension  agrees  with  this,  except  that  it  speaks  of 
“the  book  of  Judges  and  Ruth,”  “the  book  of  four  Kings,” 
“the  book  of  two  Chronicles.” 

Further,  Melito,  in  his  letter  to  Onesimus  from  which  this 
list  is  taken,  says  in  the  former  part  of  the  letter : “Melito  to 
his  brother  Onesimus,  Greetings ; since  thou  hast  often,  in 
thy  zeal  for  the  word,  expressed  a wish  to  have  extracts 
made  from  the  Law  and  the  Prophets  concerning  the  Saviour 
and  concerning  our  entire  faith,  and  hast  also  desired  to  have 
an  accurate  statement  of  the  ancient  books,  as  regards  their 
number  and  their  order,  I have  endeavored  to  perform  the 
task.  . . . Accordingly,  when  I went  East  and  came  to  the 
place  where  these  things  were  preached  and  done,  I learned 
accurately  the  books  of  the  Old  Testament  and  sent  them  to 
thee  as  written  below.” 

Notice,  that  this  is  the  first  attempt  known  to  give  the 
books  of  the  Old  Testament  in  their  number  and  order. 
Notice,  further,  that  MelitO'  says  that  he  endeavored  “to 
make  an  accurate  statement  of  the  ancient  books  as  regards 
their  number  and  order.”  Again,  he  says  that  he  went  to  the 
East,  to  the  place  where  these  things  (recorded  in  the  Old 
Testament  books)  were  preached  and  done;  and  that  he 
learned  accurately  the  books  of  the  Old  Testament  and  sent 
them  to  Onesimus  as  given  in  the  list. 

Lastly,  notice  that  this  list  contains  at  least  four  divisions : 
Law,  Historical  Books,  Poetical  Books  and  Prophetical 
Books,  Esdras  being  counted  as  among  the  Prophets.  If, 
however,  we  separate  Esdras  from  the  Prophets,  it  would  be 
all  alone  in  a fifth  division.  Job  is  placed  among  the  Poetical 
books;  Ruth  and  Chronicles,  among  the  Historical;  Daniel 


440 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


and  perhaps  Esdras  among  the  Prophetical.  Numbers  pre- 
cedes Leviticus,  and  the  order  of  the  Prophets  is  Isaiah, 
Jeremiah,  the  XII,  Daniel  and  Ezekiel. 

The  next  witness  we  shall  produce  is  Origen,  who  died  in 
a.d.  254.  He  was  the  greatest  critical  scholar  of  the  ancient 
Greek  Church  and  certainly  one  of  the  most  conversant  with 
Hebrew.  His  list  of  the  books  in  the  Hebrew  Bible  is  as  fol- 
lows: “Gen.,  Ex.,  Lev.,  Num.,  Deut.,  Joshua,  Judges  and 
Ruth  (in  one),  Kings  a-d,  Chronicles  a-b,  Esdras  a-b,  Book 
of  Psalms,  Proverbs  of  Solomon,  Ecclesiastes,  Song  of 
Songs,  Isaiah,  Jeremiah  with  Lamentations  and  the  Epistle 
in  one,  Daniel,  Ezekiel,  Job,  Esther,  and  besides  these  is  the 
Maccabees.”  Several  features  of  this  list  are  specifically 
important : 

1.  He  certainly  places  Daniel  among  the  Prophets  and 
perhaps  Job  and  Esther. 

2.  He  seems  to  agree  with  Josephus  in  having  four  books 
of  poetry,  though  he  puts  them  into  a different  place. 

3.  He  has  no  division  corresponding  to  the  Hagiographa, 
since  he  puts  Ruth  in  with  Judges  and  Chronicles  and  Ezra- 
Nehemiah  (1  &2  Esdras)  along  with  the  Former  Prophets, 
or  Historical  works. 

4.  He  adds  Lamentations  to  Jeremiah,  instead  of  putting 
it  among  the  Hagiographa,  or  Megilloth. 

5.  Job  and  Esther,  also,  seem  to  be  classed  as  Prophets 
instead  of  being  put  among  the  Hagiographa. 

6.  In  short,  he  recognizes  neither  the  divisions,  nor  the 
order,  of  books  as  given  in  any  known  Jewish  list,  or  manu- 
script ; yet,  it  is  hard  to  see,  how  he  can  have  been  ignorant 
of  the  divisions  and  order  existent  among  the  Hebrews  of 
his  time,  especially  if  these  had  been  fixed  by  the  authority 
of  the  Jewish  Church. 

Next,  let  us  look  at  the  testimony  of  Jerome,  the  greatest 
scholar  of  the  early  Latin  Church  and  the  author  of  the 
Latin  Vulgate.  Jerome  wrote  these  lists  about  a.d.  400;  but 
we  know  that  he  prepared  himself  for  his  work  of  trans- 
lating by  going  to  Palestine  and  studying  Hebrew  with  the 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


441 


best  Hebrew  scholars  of  his  time.  He  has  left  us  two  lists. 
The  first,  in  the  letter  to  Paulinus,  is  as  follows:  Gen.,  Ex., 
Lev.,  Num.,  Deut.,  five  books  = Pentateuch;  Joib,  Joshua, 
Judges,  Ruth,  Samuel,  Kings,  Hosea,  Joel,  Amos,  Obadiah, 
Jonah,  Micah,  Nahum,  Habakkuk,  Zephaniah,  Haggai, 
Zechariah,  Malachi,  Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel,  Daniel, 
David,  Solomon,  Esther,  Chronicles,  Ezra-Nehemiah. 

The  second  list,  in  the  so-called  Prologus  Galeatus,  is  as 
follows:  I.  (Gen.,  Ex.),  Lev.,  Num.,  Deut.  = Books  of 
Moses  = Thora,  Law;  II.  Joshua,  Judges-Ruth,  Samuel, 
Kings,  Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel,  the  XII;  III.  Job,  David, 
Solomon  (Prov.,  Koheleth,  Song),  Daniel,  Chronicles, 
Ezra,  Esther — 22  books;  IV.  Apocrypha:  Wisdom  of  Solo- 
mon, Jesus  ben  Sirach,  Judith,  Tobias  and  Pastor,  1 Macca- 
bees, 2 Maccabees. 

Regarding  these  two  lists  the  following  points  are  to  be 
noted : 

1.  The  first  list  has  five  divisions,  to  wit:  The  Law  (5 
books);  6 Historical  Books;  16  Prophetical  Books;  2 (or 
by  counting  3 for  Solomon,  4)  Poetical  Books;  and  lastly 
3 or  4 Historical  Books.  In  the  second  list  there  are  four 
divisions  counting  the  Apocrypha. 

2.  Neither  list  agrees  with  Baba  Bathra. 

3.  In  the  first  list  Job  heads  the  second  division:  in  the 
second  list  it  heads  the  third. 

4.  In  both  lists  Ruth  follows  Judges. 

5.  In  the  first  list  the  order  of  Prophets  is:  The  Twelve, 
Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel,  Daniel.  In  the  second  list  it  is: 
Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel,  the  Twelve. 

6.  The  fact  that  Daniel  follows  Ezekiel  in  the  first  list 
indicates  that  it  is  classed  with  the  Prophets.  Otherwise  it 
must  be  regarded  as  standing  by  itself  or  grouped  with  the 
Poetical  Books  (David  and  Solomon).  In  the  second  list 
Daniel  follows  the  Poetical  Books. 

7.  Ecclesiastes  and  the  Song  are  both  ascribed  to  Solomon. 

8.  In  both  lists,  Jerome  evidently  included  Lamentations 
under  Jeremiah. 


442 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


The  testimony  of  the  four  great  Greek  Uncials — Vaticanus 
(B),  Alexandrinus  (A),  Sinaiticus  (S)  and  Basiliano- 
Venetus  (B-V) — of  the  fourth  and  fifth  centuries  a.d.  is 
noteworthy : 

1.  All  place  Joshua  immediately  after  Deuteronomy. 

2.  Judges  and  Ruth  follow,  but  the  Basiliano-Venetus  re- 
verses the  order. 

3.  Next  come  Kings  followed  by  Chronicles,  but  S re- 
verses the  order. 

4.  B,  S and  B-V  put  Esdras  a & b next ; but  A puts  them 
between  Judith  and  Maccabees. 

5.  In  S and  B-V,  Esdras  b is  followed  by  Esther;  but  in 
B and  A,  it  is  put  after  the  Prophetical  and  before  the 
Poetical  Books. 

6.  The  order  of  the  Poetical  Books  may  be  represented  in 
a table  as  follows : 

B.  Psalms,  Proverbs,  Ecclesiastes,  Song,  Job. 

S.  Psalms,  Proverbs,  Ecclesiastes,  Song,  Sirach,  Job. 

A.  Psalms,  Job,  Proverbs,  Ecclesiastes,  Song. 

B-V.  Psalms  (?),  Job,  Proverbs,  Ecclesiastes,  Song, 
Sirach. 

7.  In  all  the  MSS.,  the  order  of  the  Minor  Prophets  is 
the  same,  except  that  in  B-V,  Micah  is  placed  after  Jonah. 

8.  In  all  the  MSS.,  Isaiah  is  put  at  the  beginning  of  the 
list  of  Prophets  and  is  always  followed  by  Jeremiah. 

9.  Baruch  is  omitted  from  S,  but  occurs  in  the  others 
immediately  after  Jeremiah. 

10.  In  B,  A and  B-V,  the  list  of  Prophets  ends  with 
Ezekiel,  Daniel. 

When  we  recall  that  the  version  of  the  Law  and  the 
Prophets  was  certainly  made  before  the  Prologue  to  Ecclesi- 
asticus  was  written  (i.e.,  before  130  b.c.),  it  seems  clear  that 
the  translator  would  have  followed  the  divisions  and  order 
of  books  in  the  original,  if  these  had  already  been  fixed  by 
the  authorities  of  the  Jews.  For  the  sake  of  convenience  in 
the  services  of  the  temple  and  synagogues,  the  Jews  after- 
wards put  together  the  Prophets  from  which  selections  were 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


443 


read  every  Sabbath  day;  but  there  was  no  necessity  for  the 
Christians  to  make  a fixed  arrangement,  since  they  made  a 
like  use  of  all  the  Scriptures  in  their  services  and  esteemed 
them  all  alike.  The  Greek,  Aramaic,  Syriac  and  Latin  ver- 
sions from  the  Hebrew  were  all  made  by  scholars  who  knew 
thoroughly  the  Hebrew  language  and  laws ; and  yet,  in  none 
of  these  is  there  the  slightest  inkling  that  the  divisions 
of  the  Old  Testament  were  fixed  by  law  when  they  were 
made,  nor  that  the  books  were  to  be  placed  in  a certain  fixed 
order. 

The  testimony  of  the  lists  found  in  the  works  of  the  old 
Greek  and  Latin  Fathers  and  in  the  decrees  of  the  early 
Councils  corroborates  what  we  have  just  said  with  regard 
to  the  manuscripts  of  the  Septuagint.  From  these  lists  we 
conclude : 

1.  That  there  were  no  fixed  divisions  recognized  through- 
out the  Church  Universal,  nor  even  in  any  particular  Church. 
The  divisions  range  from  two  to  seven,  four  or  five  being 
the  most  common. 

2.  Melito  and  Leontius  give  the  order  for  the  Pentateuch 
as  Gen.,  Ex.,  Num.,  Lev.,  Deut. 

3.  In  the  order  for  the  other  divisions  no  two  MSS.  are 
exactly  alike. 

4.  They  all  place  Daniel  among  the  Prophets. 

5.  Job  is  found  in  13  different  places  in  32  lists,  ranging 
from  immediately  after  Joshua  to  the  last  but  one  of  all  the 
books.  It  is  put  among  the  Former  Prophets,  Latter  Proph- 
ets, the  Poetical  Books,  the  Historical  Books,  the  Apocryphal 
Books,  and  sometimes  apparently  in  a class  by  itself. 

6.  It  is  passing  strange  that  no  one  of  these  great  writers 
should  ever  apparently  have  heard  of  a fixed  order  and  of 
the  three  fixed  divisions  alleged  by  modern  critics  to  have 
been  fixed  among  the  Jews  two  centuries  before  the  time  of 
Christ. 

We  shall  next  consider  the  testimony  of  the  Syriac  manu- 
scripts. It  is  generally  held  that  the  Peshitto  Version  was 
made  about  a.d.  200.  The  evidence  presented  in  the  accounts 


444 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


of  the  early  bishops  of  the  Syrians  edited  by  Professor 
Sachau  of  Berlin  and  published  by  the  Prussian  Academy27 
would  favor  an  earlier  date  for  this  translation.  But  what- 
ever its  date,  there  is  no  doubt  that  it  was  made  directly  from 
the  Hebrew  text.  We  would  expect  it,  then,  to  give  the  order 
and  divisions  of  the  books  found  in  the  Hebrew  original 
from  which  it  was  translated,  if  the  order  and  divisions  had 
been  fixed  before  the  version  was  made.  That  this  was  not 
the  case  is  shown  conclusively  by  the  following  evidence 
which  I have  gleaned  from  the  catalogues  of  the  libraries  of 
Oxford,  Cambridge,  the  British  Museum,  and  elsewhere. 

1.  Ebed  Jesu:28  Law,  Josh.,  Jud.,  Sam.,  Kings,  Chr., 
Ruth,  Pss.,  Song,  Ecclus.,  Great  Wisdom,  Job,  Is.,  Hos., 
Joel,  Amos,  Obad.,  Jonah,  Mic.,  Na.,  Hab.,  Zeph.,  Hag., 
Zech.,  Mai.,  Jer.,  Ek.,  Dan.,  Judith,  Est.,  Sus.,  Ezra,  and 
Dan.  the  Less,  and  the  Letter  of  Baruch,  and  the  book  of 
the  Traditions  of  the  Elders  and  that  of  Josephus  the  Writer. 
The  Proverbs  and  Tales  of  the  Sons  of  Samona  and  the 
books  again  of  Macc.  (3)  and  the  Tale  of  Herod  the  King 
and  the  Book  of  the  Second  Destruction  of  Jerusalem 
through  Titus,  and  the  Book  of  Asyath  the  wife  of  the  up- 
right Joseph,  the  son  of  Jacob,  and  the  Book  of  Tobias  and 
Tobit  the  righteous  Israelites. 

2.  Bar  Hebraeus:  (Cambridge  Add.  2009)  Law,  Jos., 
Jud.,  Sam.,  Pss.,  Kings,  Ez.,  Prov.,  Ecclus,  Ecc.,  Song, 
Wisdom,  Ruth,  Sus.,  Job,  Is.,  XII,  Jer.,  Ek.,  Dan.,  Bel  and 
the  Dragon,  id.  Brit.  Mus.  XLV. 

3.  Brit.  Mus.  MSS.  V,  VI,  VII : Law,  Jos.,  Jud.,  Sam., 
Kings,  Wisdom,  Koh.,  Ru.,  Song,  Ecclus,  Job,  Is.,  XII,  Jer., 
Lam.,  Ek.,  Dan.,  Bel  and  the  Dragon. 

4.  Bodleian,  I (year  1627)  : Law,  Job,  Josh.,  Jud.,  Sam., 
Kings,  Chron.,  Prov.,  Ecc.,  Song,  Great  Wisdom,  Ru.,  Sus., 
Is.,  XII,  Jer.,  1 & 2 Bar.,  Ep.  Jer.,  Ek.,  Dan.,  Bel  and  the 
Dragon,  Est.,  Judith,  Ezra,  Ecclus,  4 books  of  Macc.,  Es- 
dras,  Tobith. 


2,7  Kgl.  Preuss.  Akad.  d.  Wiss.  for  1919. 
2S  According  to  Assemani  (Cat.  III.  5). 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


445 


5.  Bodleian,  II:  Same  as  last  as  far  as  Susanna;  then 
Little  book  of  Daniel,  Est.,  Judith,  Ezra,  Ecclus,  4 of  Macc., 
Esd.  and  Tobith,  Is.,  XII,  Jer.,  Lam.,  Ep.  of  Baruch,  Ep. 
Jer.,  Ek.,  Dan.,  Bel  and  the  Dragon. 

6.  British  Mus.,  I:  Same  as  Bodl.  I except  that  1st  and 
2nd  Baruch  are  put  at  the  end  of  all. 

7.  Brit.  Mus.,  XVI : has  the  order  Josh.,  Jud.,  Sam., 
Kings,  Prov.,  Ecclus,  Koh.,  Ru.,  Song,  the  righteous  Job. 

8.  Cambridge,  Oo  1.  7;  Is.,  XII,  Jer.,  Lam.,  Bar.,  Ek., 
Dan.,  Song  of  the  Three  Children,  Sus.,  Bel  and  Dragon. 

9.  Cambridge,  Oo  1.  10:  Same  as  No.  7 above  except  be- 
gins with  Judges. 

10.  Cambridge,  Add.  1963:  Same  as  No.  7 as  far  as 
Prov. ; then  Koh.,  Ru.,  Song,  Ecclus.,  Job. 

11.  Cambridge,  Add  1969 : Jos.,  Jud.,  Ruth,  Sam.,  Kings, 
Prov.,  Song,  Ecclus,  Job. 

12.  Cambridge,  Buchanan  MS : Pent.,  Job,  Jos.,  Jud., 
Sam.,  Pss.,  Kings,  Chron.,  Prov.,  Koh.,  Song,  Wisdom, 
Is.,  Jer.,  Lam.,  1 & 2 Bar.,  Ep.  Jer.,  Ek.,  XII,  Dan.,  Bel 
and  Dragon,  Ruth,  Sus.,  Est.,  Judith,  Ezra,  Ecclus.,  4 books 
of  Macc.,  1st  Esd.,  Tobit. 

13.  Wilson  MS.  A manuscript  in  my  possession  begins 
with  Is.  xliii.  10  and  continues  : XII,  (Hos.,  Joel,  Amos,  Ob., 
Jon.,  Mi.,  etc.),  Jer.,  Lam.,  Prayer  of  Jer.,  Ezek. 

14.  Codex  Florentinus  has  the  order  Lev.,  Num.,  Deut., 
Jos.,  Jud.,  Sam.,  Kings,  Chron.,  Psalms. 

15.  Cambridge  LI.  2.  4 has  the  order:  Is.,  XII,  Jer.,  Lam., 
Ek.,  Dan.,  Song  of  Three  Children,  Bel  and  Dragon. 

Codex  Ambrosianus  (at  Milan)  : Pent.,  Job,  Jos.,  Jud., 
Sam.,  Pss.,  Kings,  Prov.,  Wisdom,  Koh.,  Song,  Is.,  Jer., 
Lam.,  Ep.  Jer.,  1 & 2 Bar.,  Ek.,  XII,  Dan.,  Bel  and  Dragon, 
Ru.,  Sus.,  Est.,  Judith,  Ecclus,  Chr.,  Apoc.  of  Baruch,  1st 
Esd.  (=  4th  in  Latin),  Ezra,  5 books  of  Macc. 

1.  It  will  be  seen  that  all  of  these  documents  put  Daniel 
among  the  Prophets. 

2.  That  most  of  the  Jacobite  MSS.  put  Job  immediately 
after  the  Pentateuch. 


446  THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 

3.  That  three  of  the  most  important  witnesses — the  Cam- 
bridge Buchanan  MS.,  the  Ambrosian  Codex,  and  Bar 
Hebraeus — put  the  Psalms  between  Samuel  and  Kings. 

4.  That  Isaiah  is  always  placed  first  among  the  Prophets 
and  that  it  is  followed  commonly  by  the  XII. 

5.  That  Chronicles  is  placed  by  some  of  the  best  wit- 
nesses immediately  after  Kings. 

6.  That  the  Ambrosian  and  Buchanan  Manuscripts  put  all 
the  books  about  women  together  and  others  have  two  or 
more  together. 

7.  That  there  is  no  evidence  outside  the  Pentateuch  of 
any  fixed  division  or  order  of  books,  such  as  would  indicate 
that  the  version  was  made  from  a Hebrew  Bible  with  fixed 
divisions  and  a definite  order. 

The  next  item  of  evidence,  which  we  shall  consider,  is  the 
testimony  of  Baba  Bathra.29  This  tract  is  an  extra-canonical 
part  of  the  Mishna,  written  by  some  unknown  author  at  an  un- 
known date,  somewhere  between  a.d.  200  and  850. 30  It  con- 
tains among  other  matters  a list  of  the  Prophets  and  Hagio- 
grapha  and  a statement  as  to  who  wrote  the  books  of  the  Old 
Testament.  The  list  is  as  follows:  “The  Rabbis  have  taught 
the  order  of  succession  in  the  books  of  the  Prophets  runs 
thus:  Joshua,  Judges,  Samuel,  Kings,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel, 
Isaiah  and  the  Twelve.  The  order  of  succession  in  the  Hagio- 
grapha  is:  Ruth,  the  Book  of  Psalms,  Job  and  Proverbs, 
Ecclesiastes,  the  Song  of  Songs,  and  Lamentations,  Daniel 
and  the  Book  of  Esther,  Ezra  and  Chronicles.”  The  state- 
ment about  the  authors  is : “Moses  wrote  his  own  book  and 
the  chapter  of  Balaam  and  Job,  Joshua  wrote  his  own  book 
and  the  last  eight  verses  of  the  Pentateuch,  Samuel  wrote 
his  own  book  and  also  Judges  and  Ruth.  David  wrote  the 
Book  of  Psalms  through  the  ten  elders  Adam,  Melchisedek, 
Abraham,  Moses,  Heman,  Juduthun,  Asaph  and  the  three 
sons  of  Korah.  Jeremiah  wrote  his  own  book,  as  also  the 
Kings  and  the  Lamentations.  Hezekiah  and  his  company 


29  14  b. 

30  Margoliouth  puts  it  at  the  latter  date. 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


447 


wrote  the  books  of  Isaiah,  Proverbs,  Canticles  and  Ecclesi- 
astes. The  men  of  the  Great  Synagogue  wrote  Ezekiel,  the 
twelve  Minor  Prophets,  the  book  of  Daniel  and  the  book 
of  Esther,  Ezra  wrote  his  own  book  a genealogy  which 
belongs  to  the  Chronicles.” 

1.  It  will  be  remarked  that  these  two  citations  are  from 
the  same  section  of  Baba  Bathra.  They  are  presumably  by 
the  same  author  and  from  the  same  time.  But  the  author  is 
not  known  nor  the  time  specified. 

2.  The  critics  generally  deny  almost  every  statement  of 
the  second  citation,  thus  impeaching  the  reliability  of  their 
witness  as  to  the  veracity  of  the  first  citation.  Thus,  they 
deny  even  the  existence  of  the  Great  Synagogue.  They  deem 
absurd  the  authorship  of  Psalms  by  Adam,  Melchisedek, 
et  al.  They  reject  the  statement  that  Moses  wrote  Job,  and 
that  Hezekiah  and  his  companions  wrote  Canticles  and 
Ecclesiastes.  Why,  then,  should  they  accept  the  statement  as 
to  the  order  of  the  books  ? 

3.  Especially  noteworthy  is  it  that  there  is  no  evidence 
to  prove  that  the  Jews  in  general  followed  this  alleged  teach- 
ing of  the  Rabbins  with  regard  to  the  third  division  of  the 
Old  Testament;  and  it  was  certainly  not  considered  obli- 
gatory with  regard  even  to  the  second,  inasmuch  as  about 
half  of  the  manuscripts  of  Kennicott,  which  give  the  order 
of  the  Prophets,  differ  from  the  order  given  in  Baba  Bathra. 
If  this  section  of  Baba  Bathra  had  been  thought  by  the  Jew- 
ish scribes  to  be  genuine  and  binding,  they  would  probably 
all  have  followed  this  order.  The  order  of  the  books  in  the 
MSS.  of  Kennicott  will  bear  out  this  statement.  An  exami- 
nation of  the  lists  of  books  given  by  him  in  his  Vetns  Testa- 
mentum  Hebraicum  cum  variis  lectionibus,  Vol.  II,  shows, 
in  fact,  that  only  23  out  of  40  lists  which  give  all 
the  books  have  the  order  of  Baba  Bathra  both  for  the  Penta- 
teuch and  the  Prophets  and  that  only  two  (Nos.  228  and 
252)  agree  with  Baba  Bathra  in  the  order  of  the  books  of  the 
third  division.  Fourteen  of  the  MSS.  have  in  the  Prophets 
the  order  Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel.  The  orders  of  books  in 


44§ 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


the  Hagiographa  in  the  40  MSS.  are  almost  as  numerous 
as  the  MSS.,  making  for  the  whole  Old  Testament  39  dif- 
ferent orders  out  of  a possible  40. 

The  last  item  of  evidence  to  be  now  considered  is  the 
allegation  that  the  closing  of  the  second  part  of  the  present 
Old  Testament  Canon  about  200  b.c.  is  proved  by  the  fact 
that  all  of  the  Haftaroth,  or  lessons  from  the  Prophets  to 
be  read  on  the  Sabbath  days,  have  been  selected  from  the 
eight  books  now  constituting  the  Prophets.  The  critics  argue 
from  this  present  content  of  the  second  part,  as  if  it  were 
always  the  same  as  now;  and  hence  that  Daniel  was  never 
among  the  Prophets.  This  is  a stupendous  non  sequitur. 
For  first,  there  is  absolutely  no  evidence  to  show  that  the 
selections  of  the  Scriptures  outside  the  Law  to  be  read  every 
Sabbath  day  was  fixed  until  long  after  the  time  of  Christ. 
Wildeboer  affirms  that  “the  annual  cycle  was  not  adopted 
universally  till  the  fourteenth  century  a.d.”31  Zunz  and 
Konig  say  that  Haftaroth  were  read  from  the  time  of  the 
Maccabees  on;  and  certainly,  Luke  iv.  17  and  Acts  xiii.  15 
show  that  they  were  read  in  the  first  century  a.d.  But  the  pas- 
sage in  Acts  speaks  merely  of  “the  reading  of  the  Law  and 
the  Prophets”  on  the  Sabbath  day;  and  the  selection  which 
the  Lord  is  said  in  Luke  iv.  17  to  have  read  is  not  found 
among  the  selections  now  read  by  the  Jews.  Thus,  Bloch32 
finds  only  two  references  to  the  Haptaroth  in  the  Talmud.33 
No  copy  of  these  selections  is  certainly  of  earlier  date  than 
the  twelfth  or  thirteenth  century.  Biichler34  mentions  62 
Haptaroth  which  were  used  by  the  early  Jews  and  Karaites, 
but  are  not  among  the  ones  now  in  use.  No  one  knows  that 
the  early  Jews  did  not  have  selections  from  Daniel. 

2.  The  principles  upon  which  the  selections  now  in  use 
were  chosen  are  clearly  shown  in  the  prayers  which  precede 
the  reading  of  them  in  the  Synagogue.  These  prayers,  or 

31  Canon,  p.  8. 

32  Studien  sur  Geschichte  der  Sammlung  der  althcbrdischen  Literatur, 
P-  5 7- 

33  Megilla,  24a,  25a. 

34  Jewish  Quarterly  Review,  Vol.  VI. 


THE  RULE  OF  FAITH  AND  LIFE 


449 


blessings,  show  that  the  selections  were  meant  to  exalt  the 
glories  and  privileges  of  the  people  of  Israel.  They  turn 
about  the  words  “Jehovah  our  God,”  Law,  service,  temple, 
Sabbath,  Zion,  Israel,  Moses,  David,  Elijah,  etc.  They  are 
and  were  meant  to  be,  extremely  nationalistic  rather  than 
universalistic,  exclusive  of  the  rights  of  the  Gentiles  rather 
than  embracing  all  men  in  the  promises  to  Adam  and  Abra- 
ham. An  argument  can  be  made  from  them  as  to  the  narrow 
views  of  the  mediaeval  Jews  who  determined  the  present 
selection,  but  not  as  to  the  age  of  a Biblical  document  written 
more  than  a thousand  years  before  they  were  determined. 

General  Conclusions 

Summing  up  the  evidence  of  the  Jews  of  the  early  centuries 
up  to  a.d.  400,  we  conclude  that  the  Law  was  closed  as 
early  as  the  time  of  Ezra  at  the  latest,  but  that  the  other 
testimony  including  Ecclesiasticus,  Jesus  in  Matthew  and 
Luke,  Josephus,  Melito,  Origen  and  the  Greek  and  Syriac 
versions  and  lists  and  the  Haptaroth  is  all  in  favor  of  a 
varying  content  and  order  and  number  of  books  for  the 
other  divisions  of  the  Old  Testament;  that  in  the  complete 
Hebrew  MSS.  listed  by  Kennicott  the  order  and  number  of 
books  in  the  Law  is  always  the  same,  but  that  in  the  Proph- 
ets, while  the  number  is  the  same,  there  are  at  least  three 
orders;  that  in  these  same  MSS.,  the  order  is  the  same  as 
that  in  Baba  Bathra  in  only  two  cases,  making  39  orders  in 
all  out  of  a possible  40;  that  the  MSS.  in  Syriac  and  in  the 
Greek  and  its  versions  differ  not  merely  from  every  known 
Hebrew  original  but  also  differ  among  themselves,  so  that 
no  two  are  exactly  alike  in  order  or  division  and  many 
of  them  not  even  in  numbers;  that  Matthew  and  Josephus 
and  Melito  and  the  Syriac  and  Greek  versions  and  one  of 
the  lists  of  Jerome  all  put  Daniel  among  the  prophets; 
that  Ecclesiasticus  and  Josephus  and  many  of  the  best  of  the 
Syriac  MSS.  put  Job  and  Lamentations  among  the  prophets, 
immediately  after  the  Pentateuch;  that  the  order  of  books 
in  Melito,  the  oldest  of  the  witnesses  to  give  a list  of  the 


450 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


books  in  order,  puts  Numbers  before  Leviticus;  and  that 
Ecclesiasticus,  2 Maccabees,  the  New  Testament,  Melito 
and  Origen  give  from  two  to  four  different  divisions,  and 
the  Greek  and  Latin  sources  from  two  to  seven.  We  con- 
clude, then,  that  the  theory  of  the  critics  as  to  the  three-fold 
divisions  of  the  Old  Testament  and  all  the  conclusions  based 
upon  the  assumption  of  the  same  are  without  foundation  in 
fact  and  evidence.  The  prima  facie  evidence  of  the  books 
themselves  and  the  traditional  view  of  the  Jews  and  of  all 
the  Christian  Churches  stand  confirmed  by  the  evidence  in 
our  possession ; and  thus,  another  attack  upon  the  historicity 
of  the  Old  Testament  Scriptures  should  be  eliminated  from 
further  serious  consideration. 

Princeton.  R.  D.  Wilson. 


REVIEWS  OF 

RECENT  LITERATURE 


EXEGETICAL  THEOLOGY 

The  Old  Latin  Texts  of  the  Heptateuch.  By  Rev.  A.  V.  Billen,  M.A., 
D.D.,  (Oxon.),  Ph.D.  (London),  Headmaster  of  Ellesmere  Col- 
lege, Shropshire,  formerly  Scholar  of  University  College,  Oxford. 
Cambridge,  at  the  University  Press,  1927,  8vo,  pp.  234. 

Dr.  Billen  has  given  us  in  the  present  volume  the  results  of  his 
studies  of  three  well-known  texts  of  the  Old  Latin  Heptateuch : the 
Lyons  Manuscript,  the  Munich  Fragments  of  the  Pentateuch,  and  the 
Wurzburg  Palimpsest.  The  four  chapters  deal  with  the  following  sub- 
jects; The  Vocabulary  of  the  Old  Latin  Heptateuch;  The  Relations 
of  the  MSS  to  the  Quotations  in  the  Fathers ; The  Greek  Text  Under- 
lying the  Old  Latin  Version;  The  Style  of  the  MSS  and  their  Place 
in  the  Old  Latin  Version.  A rather  lengthy  List  of  Noteworthy  Words 
in  the  Old  Latin  Heptateuch  completes  the  volume. 

Dr.  Billen  believes  that  these  MSS  are  “apparently  all  of  the  fifth  or 
sixth  century,  but  of  course  represent  Latin  texts  which  were  current 
before  the  Vulgate  gained  general  acceptance  in  the  West,  that  is  to 
say  rather  in  the  fourth  or  (as  will  be  shown  in  the  case  of  one  of 
them)  in  the  third  century  a.d.”  (p.  1).  Since  this  study  is  essentially 
a study  of  vocabulary,  Dr.  Billen  has  made  extensive  use  of  “word 
lists,”  both  those  already  provided  by  Prof.  Sanday  and  Prof.  Burkitt, 
and  others  which  he  has  made  himself.  “Such  lists,”  he  tells  us,  “have 
been  made  for  use  in  the  present  work  for  each  of  the  Old  Latin  MSS, 
and  for  the  Heptateuch  quotations  of  some  of  the  Fathers;  and  on 
account  of  the  extreme  importance  of  Cyprian  the  list  of  words  in  his 
case  was  made  for  all  his  Biblical  quotations  and  not  for  those  from 
the  Heptateuch  only”  (p.  3).  The  terms  “African,”  “Cyprianic,”  and 
“primitive”  are  used  as  synonymous,  while  “late”  and  “European”  are 
treated  as  nearly  equivalent. 

It  is  to  be  regretted  that  the  problem  is  such  a complicated  one  that 
satisfactory  results  could  hardly  be  expected.  The  reader  will  be  im- 
pressed with  the  fact  that  the  text  of  the  Itala  early  fell  into  such 
“inextricable  confusion”  (Schaff)  that  as  Jerome  said  each  codex  was 
practically  a law  unto  itself  (tot  sunt  exemplaria  paene  quot  codices). 
Regarding  the  Lyons  MS,  we  are  told  by  Dr.  Billen  that  it  “is  far 
from  homogeneous  in  its  vocabulary  and  diction”  (p.  7),  that  “not  only 
the  MS  as  a whole,  but  even  two  of  the  separate  books  (Lev.  and 
Deut.)  cannot  be  regarded  as  homogeneous  throughout”  (p.  13),  and 
finally  that  “the  general  impression  received  in  passing  from  one  book 
of  the  MS  to  another  is  that  the  difference  in  the  texts  is  as  great  as 
that  which  exists  between  any  two  of  the  Old  Latin  authorities” 
(pp.  15  f.). 


452 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


Dr.  Billen  makes  no  claim  that  the  conclusions  which  he  reaches  will 
prove  final,  but  he  expresses  the  hope  that  they  will  be  found  “incom- 
plete rather  than  erroneous.”  His  method  seems  to  be  a thoroughly 
sound  one,  and  the  labor  expended  upon  the  preparation  of  this  volume 
must  have  been  very  great.  We  hope  that  Dr.  Billen  will  continue  his 
studies  in  this  intricate  but  interesting  field. 

Princeton.  Oswald  T.  Allis. 

The  Achievement  of  Israel.  By  Herbert  R.  Purinton,  Professor  of 
Biblical  Literature  and  Religion  in  Bates  College.  New  York: 
Charles  Scribner’s  Sons,  1927.  Pp.  viii,  218. 

Dr.  Purinton  belongs  to  that  considerable  group  of  teachers  in 
schools,  colleges  and  seminaries  who  have  undertaken  to  popularize 
the  conclusions  of  the  at  present  dominant  school  of  higher  criticism, 
by  preparing  textbooks  which  can  be  used  in  institutions  of  various 
grades.  To  the  orthodox  reader  who  has  some  acquaintance  with  the 
literature  of  Criticism  these  books  are  far  from  satisfactory,  indeed 
they  are  at  times  very  irritating,  reading.  There  are  two  reasons  for 
this.  The  first  is  that  the  authors  of  these  books  quite  generally  pro- 
ceed upon  the  assumption  that  the  conclusions  of  the  critics  have  been 
conclusively  proved  and  are  to  be  accepted  as  established  fact.  The  bibli- 
ographies which  they  furnish  the  reader  represent  only  the  critical  side, 
and  it  is  customary  to  state  that  the  J,  E,  D,  P analysis  of  the  Hexateuch, 
for  example,  is  accepted  by  all  scholars.  The  second  reason  is  that 
these  authors  very  often  make  positive  statements  which  are  not  gen- 
erally accepted  even  by  the  higher  critics  themselves.  The  author  may 
justify  his  dogmatic  presentation  of  matters  which  are  in  dispute  not 
merely  between  conservative  and  higher  critic  but  even  among  the 
critics  themselves  on  the  ground  that  these  popular  textbooks  are  no 
place  for  the  discussion  of  technical  matters.  But  all  the  same  the 
reader  who  knows  his  Bible  and  who  knows  something  of  the  pre- 
cariousness of  the  foundations  upon  which  the  whole  higher  critical 
reconstruction  of  the  Old  Testament  rests,  and  who  is  also  aware  of 
the  differences  of  opinion  which  exist  in  critical  circles,  is  constantly 
annoyed  at  the  positiveness  with  which  questionable  theories  are  stated 
in  the  place  of  the  plain  and  straightforward  statements  of  the  Scrip- 
tures themselves.  A couple  of  examples  will  serve  to  illustrate  what  is 
meant. 

Dr.  Purinton  like  most  of  the  critics  has,  to  say  the  least,  a low 
opinion  of  the  pre-prophetic  period  in  Israel.  Thus  he  tells  us : “It 
reminds  us  of  the  low  state  of  civilization  to  read  that  when  Elijah 
was  in  the  desert  at  the  time  of  his  flight  from  Jezebel,  Jehovah  is 
said  to  have  commanded  him  to  anoint  Jehu  and  Hazael  to  carry  out 
his  purposes  by  deeds  of  violence”  (p.  67).  This  statement  is  made  at 
the  conclusion  of  the  chapter  which  deals  with  Jeroboam  and  carries 
the  history  of  Northern  Israel  down  to  Ahab  and  Jezebel.  The  next 
chapter  is  entitled  “Revolution  and  Reform.”  The  first  section  bears 
the  title  “The  Folly  of  Violence.”  There  we  are  told  that  Elisha,  the 


RECENT  LITERATURE 


453 


successor  to  Elijah,  “adopted  strong  tactics  to  do  away  with  the  power- 
ful influence  of  Jezebel”  and  even  went  so  far  as  to  plan  for  a new 
king  not  only  over  Israel  but  also  for  the  throne  of  Damascus.  As  an 
illustration  of  the  ruthlessness  of  these  early  prophets  the  story  of  the 
murder  of  Benhadad  is  told  in  the  following  form : 

The  story  of  the  conspiracy  is  told  in  two  dramatic  scenes,  the  first 
contained  in  II  Kings  8:7-15.  Elisha  went  to  Damascus  and  took  lodg- 
ings there.  On  hearing  that  the  famous  man  of  God  was  in  the  city, 
Ben-Hadad,  the  king  of  Syria,  who  was  very  ill,  sent  to  him  forty 
camels  loaded  with  presents.  Hazael,  an  officer  of  the  king,  was  in 
charge  of  the  gifts.  When  in  the  presence  of  the  prophet,  Hazael  said: 
“My  master  wishes  to  know  if  he  will  recover  from  his  illness.”  Elisha 
replied,  “Tell  your  master  that  he  will  recover,”  and  then,  in  a low 
voice,  “but  I know  he  will  not,  but  you  will  be  king  in  his  stead.”  Then 
Elisha  looked  steadily  at  Hazael  for  a long  time  in  silence.  Hazael 
understood.  He  went  back  to  the  palace  and  put  a wet  cloth  over  the 
face  of  the  king  and  choked  him  to  death.  Thus  the  first  step  of  the 
programme  was  accomplished  (pp.  69-70). 

The  only  explanation,  we  do  not  say  justification,  of  such  an  outrageous 
misinterpretation  of  a Biblical  narrative  the  true  meaning  of  which 
would  seem  to  be  perfectly  obvious,  is  to  be  found  apparently  in  the 
attempt  of  Dr.  Purinton  to  paint  as  dark  a picture  as  he  can  of  the 
pre-prophetic  period.  This  is  intended  to  prepare  the  way  for  the  in- 
troduction of  Amos.  Amos,  we  are  told,  was  “the  first  of  a galaxy  of 
prophets  that  transformed  the  religion  of  the  world.  He  announced  two 
thoughts  that  have  become  the  basis  of  civilization : there  can  be  no  true 
religion  without  high  moral  standards,  and  there  is  a God  who  enforces 
these  standards”  (p.  75).  Now  we  cannot  help  wondering  how,  if  Dr. 
Purinton  is  so  ashamed  of  the  violent  measures  used  by  Elijah  and 
Elisha,  he  can  speak  in  such  enthusiastic  terms  of  Amos.  Certainly  the 
eight  denunciations  with  which  the  book  of  Amos  begins  are  far  from 
“pacifist”  in  their  content  and  the  woe  pronounced  upon  Damascus  by 
Amos  is  hardly  less  violent  than  that  which  was  decreed  through  Elijah 
and  Elisha.  We  are  almost  tempted  to  wonder  whether  Dr.  Purinton 
had  the  text  of  the  book  of  Kings  before  him  in  English,  not  to  say 
Hebrew,  when  he  wrote  his  account  of  Elisha’s  visit  to  Damascus,  or 
whether,  drawing  largely  on  his  imagination  for  his  facts  he  was  giving 
a free  adaptation  of  it  which  would  accord  more  fully  with  his  idea 
of  the  development  of  the  religious  history  of  Israel  than  the  one 
which  has  actually  come  down  to  us. 

As  an  example  of  a dogmatic  statement  as  to  which  the  critics 
would  differ  among  themselves  we  may  cite  the  following:  “One  officer 
in  David’s  court,  the  scribe  Sheva,  is  noteworthy  because  he  was  a 
Babylonian”  (p.  51).  Anyone  reading  this  statement  would  naturally 
suppose  that  the  Old  Testament  record  plainly  states  that  Sheva  was 
a Babylonian.  But  this  is  not  the  case.  The  nationality  of  Sheva  is 
quite  uncertain.  The  fact  that  his  father’s  name  is  not  given  and  that 
one  of  his  sons  has  a foreign  sounding  name  has  been  interpreted  to 
mean  that  he  was  of  foreign  extraction.  It  has  been  argued  that  he  may 
have  been  an  Aramaean  (cf.  article  “Shavsha”  in  the  Hastings  and  the 


454 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


New  Standard  dictionaries).  On  the  other  hand  it  has  been  conjectured 
that  the  name  Sheva,  which  is  assumed  to  be  identical  with  Shavsha, 
may  be  Babylonian  or  possibly  North  Arabian  (cf.  article  “Sihavsha” 
in  Encyc.  Bib.)  which  raises  the  interesting  question,  according  to 
Cheyne,  which  country  influenced  David  most — Babylonia  or  North 
Arabia.  It  is  clear  that  the  critics  are  agreed  only  in  this,  that  Sheva 
was  a foreigner.  That  he  was  a Babylonian  as  Dr.  Purinton  asserts 
would  seem  to  be,  to  say  the  least,  far  from  certain.  But  why  is  the 
nationality  of  Sheva  a matter  of  such  interest  to  the  critics  and  to 
Dr.  Purinton?  The  reason  has  just  been  hinted  at.  Dr.  Purinton  states 
it  as  follows : “His  business  was  to  keep  records  of  the  affairs  of  the 
state.  As  a Babylonian  he  would  be  familiar  with  writing.  Among  the 
Hebrews  writing  was  a new  art.  Until  the  tribes  had  united  in  support 
of  David  and  had  a central  capital  city,  there  was  no  Hebrew  national 
spirit  which  found  expression  to  any  large  extent  in  writing.  Poems 
like  Deborah’s  Song  and  David’s  Lament  did  not  reach  their  final  liter- 
ary form  before  the  time  of  Solomon.  They  were  kept  in  memory  or 
preserved  in  rough  notes  until  the  growth  of  the  Hebrew  language  had 
furnished  a finer  medium  of  expression.”  Here  we  have  the  explanation, 
the  real  explanation,  why  Sheva  must,  in  the  opinion  of  the  critics,  have 
been  a foreigner : the  Israelites,  even  the  royal  court  itself,  must  have 
been  illiterate,  as  late  as  the  time  of  David.  The  El  Amarna  letters 
prove  conclusively  that  several  centuries  before  the  time  of  David  the 
princelings  of  Palestine  wrote  letters  in  Babylonian  script  to  the  king 
of  Egypt.  Recently  a sarcophagus  has  been  discovered  at  Byblos  (that 
of  Achiram)  with  an  inscription  written  in  a well  developed  form  of 
the  old  alphabet  script  (this  inscription  is  dated  by  archaeologists  in 
the  thirteenth  century,  b.C.).  Yet  the  critics  are  still  holding  on  to  their 
theory  that  writing  was  practically  an  unknown  art  in  Israel  before  the 
first  millennium  b.c.  If  archaeology  has  proved  anything,  it  has  proved 
conclusively  that  the  literary  period  among  the  nations  of  antiquity 
goes  far  back  of  even  the  patriarchal  period  in  Israel.  The  critics  no  longer 
dare  to  deny  that  writing  was  known  in  the  days  of  Moses.  They  even  as- 
sert quite  positively  that  no  reputable  critic  ever  maintained  that  position. 
But  they  still  persist  in  asserting  that  Israel,  this  nation  whose  achieve- 
ments in  the  field  of  religious  literature  fill  them  with  admiration  and 
amazement,  could  not  even  have  adopted  from  their  neighbors,  Babylon 
or  Egypt,  by  whom  they  are  supposed  to  have  been  influenced  in  many 
ways,  the  art  of  writing  until  a date  so  late  that  a Babylonian  or  Ara- 
maean ancestry  for  Sheva  must  be  invented  in  order  that  King  David 
may  have  records  kept  of  the  affairs  of  his  kingdom. 

In  what  we  have  said  above  we  would  not  imply  that  Dr.  Purinton 
has  gone  farther  than  many  others  in  his  reconstruction  of  the  re- 
ligious history  of  Israel.  This  little  volume  may  be  regarded  as  we 
have  said  as  typical  of  the  attempts  which  are  being  constantly  made  to 
popularize  a theoretical  reconstruction  of  the  Old  Testament  along 
lines,  which,  however  widely  accepted  they  may  be  at  present,  are 
clearly  out  of  harmony  with  the  teachings  of  the  Bible  itself  and  are 


RECENT  LITERATURE 


455 


being  discredited  more  and  more  by  scientific  study  and  archaeological 
research. 

Princeton.  Oswald  T.  Allis. 

The  Bible  Unlocked:  A Study  of  the  History,  Literature  and  Religious 
Teachings  of  the  Bible.  By  Henry  Martin  Battenhouse.  New 
York  and  London:  The  Century  Co.  Pp.  xiv,  553. 

The  publishers  say  this  book  is  not  primarily  for  scholars,  but  for 
amateurs  and  laymen,  students,  teachers,  etc.  The  author  says  his  aim 
is  to  furnish  historical  background,  guide  analysis,  awaken  desire,  and 
lay  the  foundation  for  Bible  study  and  appreciation. 

The  book  claims  to  cover  the  entire  Bible.  It  is  very  general  and  not 
a Bible  study.  The  viewpoint  is  that  of  extreme  critical  conclusion.  The 
Bible  is  “the  product  of  the  creative  intelligence  of  religiously  inspired 
writers.”  The  oldest  fragments  of  the  Old  Testament  are  dated  from 
1200  b.c.  to  1000  b.c.  The  Hexateuch  is  a late  compilation,  presumably  by 
Ezra  (c.  400  b.c.),  of  J (850  b.c.),  E (750  b.c.),  D (shortly  before  621) 
and  P (about  450  b.c.).  Isaiah  is  from  several  hands  through  several 
centuries.  Daniel  is  placed  about  168  b.c.  The  Pauline  writings  are  from 
a.d.  50  to  64,  Mk.  c.  70,  Matt.  c.  80,  Luke  and  the  Acts  after  80,  and  John 
c.  95 ; 2 Peter  is  dated  c.  a.d.  115, — hence  not  by  Peter  at  all. 

The  book  is  not  controversial,  only  because  Dr.  Battenhouse  writes  as 
though  his  views  had  -been  fully  established.  He  writes  “about”  the 
Bible  but  fails  to  “unlock”  any  of  its  mysteries.  He  sees  no  difficulty  in 
placing  Abraham  after  1500  b.c.,  Joseph  c.  1350,  and  having  the  great 
people  of  Israel  by  1200  b.c.  When  he  deals  with  the  text  of  the  Bible, 
it  is  just  to  mention  the  narrative.  He  states  that  Israel  was  in  Egypt 
150  years.  In  a note  he  calls  attention  to  the  400  years,  as  given  in  Scrip- 
ture. The  study  of  Samuel-Kings  is  a setting  forth  of  the  leading 
events.  He  does  not  appreciate  the  relationship  of  Amos,  Hosea,  and 
Isaiah  to  the  two  kingdoms.  Nor  does  he  grasp  the  religious  significance 
of  the  writings  of  these  prophets.  He  seems  to  believe  that  Israel’s  reli- 
gion came  from  a later  time  and  was  credited  as  coming  fron  an  earlier. 
Even  the  Passover  seems  to  be  a late  retrojection.  1 Esdras  is  followed 
instead  of  the  Biblical  Ezra.  Ezra  is  placed  a half  century  later  than 
Nehemiah. 

The  author  investigates  everything  outside  of  the  Old  Testament, 
speculates  much,  and  yet  finds  little,  seemingly,  of  God  within  it.  In  his 
chapters  on  Prophecy  and  on  the  Rise  of  Judaism,  the  revelation  of  God 
is  submerged  in  the  historical. 

The  study  of  the  New  Testament  is  so  largely  hit  and  miss,  lacking 
in  definiteness  of  conclusion  and  the  fire  of  conviction  that  a review  is 
scarcely  possible.  As  in  the  Old  Testament  study,  the  author  writes 
“about”  the  Bible.  He  writes  on  subjects.  The  life  of  Christ  is  divided 
into  periods  such  as  are  usual.  Yet  the  great  events  in  His  life  do  not 
have  their  rightful  place.  The  study  of  the  early  life  of  Jesus  is  inade- 
quate in  every  way.  It  is  evident  that  Dr.  Battenhouse  does  not  believe  in 
the  Virgin  Birth.  The  disciples,  we  are  told,  came  to  believe  in  His 
“divinity,”  as  attested  by  “his  perfect  revelation  of  the  nature  and 


456 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


character  of  God.”  “Its  only  adequate  explanation  lay  in  the  field  of  the 
biological.”  The  author’s  interpretation  of  the  New  Testament  develops 
from  this  understanding.  He  speaks  of  the  ‘divinity’  but  not  of  the 
‘Deity’  of  Christ.  “God  had  chosen  him  for  a special  and  supreme  son- 
ship.”  He  misinterprets  Heb.  iv.  15  when  he  says,  “We  learn  that  the 
divine  character  of  Jesus  was  the  outcome  of  victory  over  temptation 
. . . ” instead  of  following  his  text  which  states  that  the  victory  was 
due  to  His  character  as  “the  Son  of  God”  (vs.  14). 

The  miracles  of  the  Old  Testament  play  little  part  in  this  book.  Moses, 
we  read,  saw  in  the  “terrifying  event”  (the  plagues)  “a  providential 
opportunity.”  Some  considered  the  parting  of  the  Red  Sea  as  a “provi- 
dential miracle,”  others  as  a “supernatural  intervention.”  “Both  interpre- 
tations are  correct.  The  choice  between  them  depends  upon  the  experience 
and  temperament  of  the  individual  reader.”  The  quail  and  the  wax 
of  trees  or  tender  lichens  on  stones  for  manna  are  described  as  provi- 
dential appearances.  Consequently  we  are  not  surprised  to  find  the 
miracles  in  the  New  Testament  practically  omitted.  Jesus,  in  the  sight 
of  the  people  is  a divine  healer,  wonder-worker  and  miracle  man.  The 
writer  seems  to  accept  miracles,  yet  his  descriptions  detract  from  the 
Gospel  narratives.  He  studiously  evades  such  miracles  as  the  raising  of 
Lazarus.  The  real  Messiah  is  lacking,  as  well  as  the  atonement.  The 
Synoptics,  we  are  told,  stress  “the  bodily  resurrection  of  Christ,”  but 
Paul  “committed  himself”  to  the  Platonic  theory  of  a “spiritual  resur- 
rection or  immortality.” 

The  title  of  the  book  is  a misnomer.  It  is  no  book  for  “amateurs  and 
laymen.”  The  reader  needs  to  be  well  acquainted  with  the  Bible  and  con- 
temporaneous history.  It  lacks  the  accuracy  of  first  hand  investigation 
in  the  original  languages.  Cross  references  are  insufficient  and  the  index 
inadequate.  It  lacks  definiteness  of  conclusion,  and  belongs  with  a class 
of  books  recently  written  that  deal  with  the  Bible  as  a human  book. 
It  neither  unlocks  the  Bible  nor  is  it  faithful  enough  in  dealing  with  the 
text  to  interpret  it. 

Geneseo,  III.  Willis  E.  Hogg. 


HISTORICAL  THEOLOGY 

An  Outline  of  the  History  of  Doctrines.  By  E.  H.  Klotsche,  A.M., 
Ph.D.,  D.D.  Professor  of  Exegesis  and  Symbolics  in  the  Western 
Theological  Seminary  at  Fremont,  Nebraska.  Burlington,  Iowa: 
The  Lutheran  Literary  Board,  1927.  Pp.  261. 

The  History  of  Doctrine  is  a branch  of  Historical  Theology.  Works 
upon  this  subject  are  of  a comparatively  late  date.  The  Ancient  Church 
was  productive  of  the  contents  of  the  doctrinal  system  but  had  a dog- 
matic rather  than  historical  interest  in  the  development  of  Christian 
doctrine.  The  Church  of  the  Middle  Ages  merely  received  the  trans- 
mitted doctrines  as  part  of  the  belief  of  the  Church  and  therefore  had 
no  real  interest  in  writing  the  history  of  the  development  of  religious 
thought. 


RECENT  LITERATURE 


457 


During  the  Reformation,  the  controversies  which  arose  tended  to 
settle  certain  beliefs  as  the  doctrines  of  the  Church,  but  it  was  not  till 
the  middle  of  the  seventeenth  century  that  the  first  genuine  attempt  was 
made  to  give  an  account  of  the  development  of  doctrine.  This  was  done 
by  the  Jesuit  scholar,  Dionysius  Petarius  in  his  work:  De  theologicis 
dogmatibus  (Paris,  1644-50).  The  Magdeburg  Centuries  attempted  to 
give  the  history  of  the  doctrines  in  dispute  during  the  Reformation 
period.  Since  that  time  there  have  been  many  histories  of  the  develop- 
ment of  doctrine;  some  being  confined  to  the  history  of  a certain  doc- 
trine and  others  more  general  in'  their  scope. 

In  the  historical  development  of  Christian  doctrine  there  may  be  dis- 
tinguished three  chief  periods  parallel  with  those  of  Church  History: 

(1)  The  origin  and  development  of  doctrine  in  the  Patristic  age; 

(2)  Development  of  doctrine  in  the  Scholastic  period;  (3)  Develop- 
ment of  doctrine  through  the  Reformation  and  completion  of  doctrine 
in  the  post-Reformation  period.  Dr.  Klotsche  has  given  us  a volume, 
brief  and  comprehensive  for  theological  students,  by  the  aid  of  which 
they  will  be  able  to  gain  a general  view  of  the  historical  development 
of  doctrine.  It  is  very  important  that  the  student  of  theology  and  the 
minister  in  active  service  should  be  acquainted  with  the  history  of  each 
doctrine  and  its  development.  The  guidance  of  the  Church  requires  a 
correct  understanding  of  the  state  of  doctrinal  beliefs  at  the  present 
time.  But  in  all  cases,  the  life  of  any  age  can  only  be  understood  by 
viewing  it  in  its  historical  relations  and  developments.  To  know  the 
errors  and  heresies  of  the  past  ages  will  enable  the  scholar  to  distin- 
guish truth  from  error  in  the  present  time.  The  history  of  Christian 
doctrine  thus  conceived  and  studied  will  constitute  one  of  the  strongest 
defences  of  Christianity.  A powerful  statement  is  a powerful  argu- 
ment. Butt  there  is  no  statement  of  Christian  truth  more  clear  and  con- 
vincing than  that  which  is  obtained  in  the  gradual  and  connected  be- 
lief of  a doctrine  by  the  Church,  from  century  to  century.  Every  his- 
tory of  doctrine  will  be  stronger  in  its  emphasis  upon  some  phase  of 
truth  than  any  other.  Thus  some  stress  Nicene  Trinitarianism,  some 
the  Augustinian. anthropology  and  some  the  Anselmic  soteriology,  but 
on  the  whole  the  student  of  this  branch  of  historical  theology  will  be 
well  repaid  by  a thorough  acquaintance  with  the  history  of  doctrines. 

Princeton.  Benjamin  McKee  Gemmill. 


SYSTEMATICAL  THEOLOGY 

Glaubenslehre.  Vol.  II,  3:  " Vom  Geist.”  Von  Martin  Rade.  Gotha; 
Leopold  Klotz  Verlag,  1927,  pp.  305. 

This  third  book  of  Martin  Rade  “On  the  Spirit,”  concludes  his  Dog- 
matics or  Glaubenslehre.  He  states  in  the  Preface  that  he  is  more  con- 
cerned with  the  subject  matter  ( Sache ) than  with  its  “proof.”  There 
is  a notable  increase  in  fulness  of  treatment  as  compared  with  modern 
dogmatics  since  Schleiermacher,  such  for  example  as  those  of  Kaftan, 


45§ 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


Wendt,  Luthardt,  and  Seeberg.  In  fact  Rade  repeats  practically  all  of 
his  theology  this  time  from  the  standpoint  of  the  Spirit. 

The  first  volume  treated  of  God;  the  second  of  Christ  and  His  sav- 
ing work  ( Wohltat ),  and  the  question  remains — “What  is  there  (i.e., 
for  Christian  faith)  since  God  and  Christ  are  (i.e.,  realities)  ?”  and 
the  answer  is  the  Holy  Spirit  is  here,  transcendence  becomes  imma- 
nence. 

With  a wide  outlook  Rade  expounds  the  doctrine  of  the  Holy  Spirit 
in  the  dogma  of  the  Church,  in  its  hymns  and  liturgies,  and  in  the 
Bible.  This  constitutes  the  first  chapter.  Rade  then  proceeds  to  treat 
of  the  Holy  Spirit  as  “Teacher  of  Doctrine”  (Glaubenslehrer) , as 
“Preacher  of  the  Word”  and  as  “Creator  of  the  Bible,”  as  Founder 
of  the  Christian  Church  (Gemeinde) , as  the  “Supporter  of  the  Christian 
Life  of  Prayer,”  as  the  Revealer  and  Judge  of  sin,  as  the  Cause  of 
Righteousness  (a  chapter  on  the  Ordo  Salutis),  as  the  Giver  of  a new 
world-view  (Christian  view  of  the  world),  and  as  the  Spirit  of  hope 
(Christian  Eschatology),  a separate  chapter  being  devoted  to  each  of 
these  topics. 

To  such  an  extent  does  Rade  carry  his  idea  of  divine  immanence 
that  faith  appears  no  longer  as  an  act  of  the  soul,  but  as  the  Holy 
Spirit  in  man.  He  says  (p.  51)  that  “the  theology  of  crisis”  (Barth 
and  his  group),  which  asserts  that  faith  is  a “vacuum,”  leaves  out  of 
account  its  positive  significance  as  the  “saving  and  fulfilling  power 
of  the  Holy  Spirit”  and  “the  wholly  other”  (gam  andere)  thus  be- 
comes man’s  possession. 

In  this  part  of  his  work  Rade  gives  no  adequate  exposition  or  criti- 
cism of  Barth’s  views,  and  on  his  own  part  fails  to  do  justice  to  the 
transcendent  character  of  the  Holy  Spirit  which  is  a chief  character- 
istic of  the  Biblical  doctrine  on  the  Spirit. 

The  chapters  on  the  Holy  Spirit  as  “the  Preacher  of  the  Word”  and 
“the  Creator  of  the  Bible,”  are  occupied  largely  with  Luther’s  views, 
but  for  a real  understanding  of  the  nature  of  the  Word  of  God,  we 
cannot  derive  much  knowledge  from  Rade’s  treatment. 

Much  theological  literature  of  recent  years  is  passed  over  without 
comment.  It  is  no  fault  of  this  book,  however,  that  philosophical  and 
non-theological  literature  is  not  dealt  with,  because  Rade  is  intention- 
ally writing  a Christian  Doctrine  of  Faith  (Glanbenslehre) . 

The  author’s  method  of  treatment  is  similar  to  that  in  his  two  former 
volumes.  He  is  influenced  strongly  by  Luther,  but  one  is  compelled  to 
raise  the  question  whether  he  does  not  look  at  Luther  through  spec- 
tacles prepared  by  Schleiermacher  and  Ritschl.  Rade,  though  one  of  the 
older  generation  of  Ritschlians,  shows  an  eclectic  tendency  and  an  in- 
creasing independence  of  view  over  against  an  out  and  out  “Ritschlian 
theology.” 

He  has  a wide  acquaintance  with  recent  and  current  theological 
opinion,  but  it  is  doubtful  whether  he  fully  comprehends  it  or  comes 
to  grips  with  it.  We  can  readily  imagine,  for  example,  that  Barth  and 


RECENT  LITERATURE  459 

his  friends  would  say  that  while  Rade  sometimes  adopts  their  termi- 
nology, he  does  not  fully  understand  what  they  mean. 

In  his  discussion  of  the  doctrine  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  Rade  includes 
a treatment  of  sin,  of  miracles,  and  of  eschatology,  from  the  point  of 
view  which  we  have  indicated. 

The  book  is  easy  and  pleasant  to  read,  abounds  in  quotations  from 
theological  literature,  but  is  not  compact  and  systematic  enough  to  con- 
stitute a satisfactory  dogmatic  treatise  on  the  Holy  Spirit. 

Its  fundamental  defect,  in  our  judgment,  is  its  failure  to  draw  the 
sharp  Biblical  distinction  between  the  transcendent  God  the  Holy  Spirit 
and  His  effects  in  the  human  soul.  Thus  (p.  30)  we  are  told  that  the 
Spirit  is  just  personal  fellowship  (i.e.,  of  man)  with  God,  but  later  on 
the  Spirit  is  identified  with  God.  This  is  not  the  doctrine  of  the  Bible 
nor  of  the  Reformers  who  based  their  theology  on  the  Bible  as  the 
Word  of  God.  It  shows  a fatal  deviation,  caused  apparently  by  Schleier- 
macher  and  Ritschl. 

Princeton.  C.  W.  Hodge. 

Die  Lehre  von  der  Siinde  dargestellt  an  dem  V crhdltnis  der  Lehre  Sdren 
Kierkegaards  zur  neuesten  Theologie.  Von  Lie.  Dr.  Walter  Kunneth. 
Giitersloh,  1927,  Druck  und  Verlag,  C.  Bertelsmann.  Pp.  274. 

This  monograph  on  the  doctrine  of  sin  is  not  an  attempt  to  give  the 
author’s  views  or  a constructive  statement  of  the  doctrine.  It  is  an  attempt 
to  prepare  the  way  for  such  a work  by  a critical  analysis  of  the  view  of 
sin  in  the  writings  of  Kierkegaard,  and  to  estimate  his  influence  on  “the 
most  recent”  theology,  i.e.,  the  dialectic  theology.  By  “dialectic  theology” 
Kunneth  quite  correctly  does  not  mean  exclusively  the  theology  of  Barth 
and  his  group,  but  includes  such  theologians  as  Karl  Heim  and  Althaus. 
He  sets  forth  clearly  the  protest  of  recent  theology  against  the  views  of 
Schleiermacher  and  Ritschl  on  the  questions  of  the  nature  and  origin  of 
sin,  of  the  Fall  and  original  sin,  and  the  general  problem  of  evil. 

Kunneth  dissents  from  Schleiermacher  and  Ritschl,  but  cannot  agree 
with  “the  newest  theology,”  and  in  a few  concluding  pages,  he  sets  forth 
very  briefly  the  general  lines  along  which  he  thinks  the  true  statement  of 
the  doctrine  should  be  made. 

Kunneth  limits  his  investigation  of  the  relation  of  Kierkegaard  to  the 
“newest  theology”  to  the  questions  concerning  sin.  Kierkegaard  had 
two  apparently  conflicting  views  of  the  nature  of  sin — “a  spiritual,  per- 
sonal, and  voluntaristic  view,”  and  a “metaphysical-cosmical”  view.  So 
also  “the  most  recent  theology”  shows  a similar  two-fold  view  of  sin,  a 
“spiritual”  and  a “metaphysical”  view.  In  Kierkegaard,  however,  the 
former  view  is  dominant,  whereas  in  “the  newest  theology,”  according  to 
Kunneth,  the  latter  view  predominates.  This  would  seem  to  have  as  its 
consequence  that  the  “dialectic”  of  Barth  is  logical  and  metaphysical, 
grounded  in  a cosmic  dualism,  whereas  it  seems  to  us  that  it  is  not 
theoretic,  but  practical  and  “existential,”  i.e.,  involved  in  the  relation  of 
faith  to  revelation.  Barth  expressly  says  that  revelation  is  not  “dia- 
lectic” but  rather  “our  seeing  it.”  So  also  Bultmann  strongly  emphasizes 


460 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


this  point  in  his  articles  in  Zwischen  den  Zeiten.  At  this  point  we  should 
also  note  that  the  term  “ existentiel”  is  used  by  Kiinneth  to  describe  the' 
metaphysical  point  of  view,  whereas  in  Bultmann  and  Brunner,  it  is  used 
in  the  sense  in  which  we  have  taken  it. 

Returning,  however,  to  the  doctrine  of  sin,  Kiinneth’s  criticism  is 
directed  against  the  mingling  of  these  two  contradictory  points  of  view 
in  Kierkegaard,  Barth,  Brunner,  Gogarten,  and  Heim.  In  this  critical 
exposition,  he  is  careful  to  discriminate  between  Barth  and  Gogarten  on 
the  one  hand,  and  Heim  on  the  other  hand,  and  also  to  indicate  the 
differences  between  Barth  and  Brunner,  though  the  latter  is  in  general 
assigned  to  the  group  with  Barth.  The  “dialectic”  or  contradiction  which 
Kiinneth  finds  in  these  theologians  between  sin  as  a voluntary  act  and 
sin  as  a racial  condition — original  sin,  and  which  these  theologians 
attribute  to  an  “ Urfall ” — outside  of  our  temporal  history,  Kiinneth  seeks 
to  solve.  He  rejects  Ritsahl’s  idea  of  a Kingdom  of  Sin,  as  essentially 
Pelagian.  He  rejects  the  idea  of  a timeless  “Urfall”  as  an  unreal  ab- 
straction. He  rejects  the  Biblical-Reformation,  and  Romish  doctrine  of 
the  historical  Fall  as  demanding  a “causal-mechanical”  philosophy.  He 
substitutes  the  view  of  a “universal  spirit”  of  mankind,  which  somehow 
fell  from  allegiance  to  God,  and  in  which  Fall  each  individual  somehow 
voluntarily  partakes.  Kiinneth’s  view  appears  to  us  to  suffer  from  the 
fundamental  difficulty  of  the  old  fashioned  Realism,  i.e.,  it  seeks  a 
ground  for  personal  responsibility  in  an  act  of  which  each  individual 
is  totally  unconscious,  and  in  which  he  had  no  voluntary  part.  Moreover 
the  idea  of  the  “universal  spirit”  of  mankind  (Gesammtgeist) , is  an 
abstraction  and  has  no  concrete  existence.  We  do  not,  however,  advocate 
the  view  of  an  Urfall  in  Barth’s  sense,  but  adhere  to  the  view  of  federal 
responsibility  which  we  believe  to  be  the  Biblical  view,  and  we  believe 
that  Charles  Hodge,  to  take  but  one  example,  in  his  Commentary  on 
Romans,  gives  Paul’s  thought  more  adequately  than  does  Barth  in 
his  Romerbrief. 

Any  adequate  criticism  of  Barth,  would  have  to  expound  clearly  his 
view  of  Urgeschichte,  which  Kiinneth  is  mistaken  in  calling  “super- 
history,” for  Barth  in  his  Dogmatik  expressly  says  that  “super-historical” 
does  not  express  his  view  of  Urgeschichte  which  he  took  over  from 
Blumhardt  and  modified. 

This  conception,  so  difficult  to  understand,  leads,  in  our  judgment, 
into  the  heart  of  the  problem  of  Barth’s  position  as  far  as  it  concerns 
the  all-important  question  of  the  relation  of  the  Christian  Revelation  to 
historical  facts.  We  do  not  pretend  fully  to  understand  Barth  on  this 
point,  but  we  think  that  Kiinneth  has  not  grasped  his  meaning. 

Finally,  to  return  to  the  problem  of  sin,  we  do  not  believe  that  there 
is  any  solution  of  its  three  main  problems.  The  ontological  problem  or 
the  problem  of  the  ultimate  cause  of  sin,  we  believe,  to  be  unsolvable. 
Dualism  and  Pantheism  explain  sin  away;  they  do  not  explain  it.  The 
psycho-genetic  problem,  how  the  first  man,  created  good,  ever  sinned, 
is  also  an  unsolvable  problem.  The  dispensational  or  “teleological”  prob- 


RECENT  LITERATURE 


461 


lem  as  to  why  the  good  God  decreed  sin,  we  also  regard  an  unsolvable 
problem.  These  problems  are  not  solved  for  us  by  the  Bible,  and  no 
“solutions”  of  human  philosophy  seem  to  us  satisfactory.  We  are 
ready  to  go  with  the  “newest  theology”  in  calling  sin  irrational,  but  so 
much  as  is  revealed  in  the  Bible  we  believe  is  best  expressed  in  the 
Biblical  Reformation  doctrine,  especially  as  that  doctrine  has  found 
expression  in  the  Confessions  of  the  Reformed  Church. 

Princeton.  C.  W.  Hodge. 

Current  Christian  Thinking.  By  Prof.  Gerald  B.  Smith,  Professor  of 
Theology  in  the  University  of  Chicago  Divinity  School.  Chicago : 
The  University  of  Chicago  Press,  1928.  Price  $2.00.  Pp.  205. 

This  little  volume  is  popularly,  clearly  and  compactly  written,  and 
affords  a very  direct  and  accessible  means  of  getting  quickly  and  easily 
to  the  heart — if  there  indeed  be  a heart — of  the  so-called  Chicago 
position  (which  is,  forsooth,  that  there  should  be  no  position,  at  least 
a stereotyped  position).  The  book  is  a worthy  representative  of  the 
pragmatizing  theology  and  the  religion  of  functional  psychology  and 
of  experience,  for  wdiich  this  school  stands. 

The  University  faculty  is  the  most  consistent  and  effective  force 
for  the  promotion  of  general  pragmatic  psychology,  ethics,  and  philoso- 
phy in  the  country.  Professor  Dewey  founded  the  pragmatic  school  there, 
and  Professors  Tufts,  Moore  and  others  have  continued  the  tradition 
with  effect.  It  is  natural  that  the  Divinity  School  should  carry  out  and 
champion  this  University  tradition.  And  it  has  for  years  conspicuously 
done  this  in  the  persons  of  Professors  George  Burman  Foster,  that 
radical  spirit  (the  author  of  The  Finality  of  the  Christian  Religion), 
who  was  later  expelled  from  the  Divinity  Faoulty  for  his  atheistical 
radicalism,  E.  S.  Ames  in  the  department  of  Psychology  of  Religion, 
Shirley  Jackson  Case,  J.  Merlin  Powis  Smith,  Shailer  Matthews,  and 
Gerald  Birney  Smith. 

Backed  by  a large  University  and  great  affluence,  this  faculty  has 
made  a definite  impact  upon  American  religious  life  and  thought  that 
has  not  diminished  with  time.  The  Journal  of  Religion  is  its  literary 
organ.  In  fact  it  is  greatly  due  to  these  external  considerations  of  afflu- 
ence, large  faculty,  effective  personnel,  and  literature-producing  power 
rather  than  inherent  depth  and  impressiveness  of  thought  that  this 
type  of  American  anti-philosophical  affection  has  had  its  measure  of 
recognition.  It  still  remains  to  be  seen  whether  this  type  of  religion  and 
theological  thought  is  permanent  and  representative  of  that  which  it 
most  moots  and  desires  itself  to  be,  modern  American  religious  think- 
ing, or  whether  it  is  not  merely  a moment  in  the  dialectic  of  changing 
American  religious  opinion  and  sentiment,  and  destined,  like  a rising 
and  ascendant  star,  to  have  its  apogee  and  decline.  Mere  floods  of  lit- 
erature and  imposing  external  power  are  not  adequate  to  prevent  a 
school  of  thought  from  becoming  effete,  especially  when  its  modes  of 
conception  are  radically  superficial.  That  which  so  assiduously  can- 
vasses “everyman,”  propagandizes  the  public,  purports  to  be  popular, 


462 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


seeks  the  favor  of  the  social  consciousness,  so  studiously  adapts  its 
message  to  the  same,  and  bends  the  towers  of  truth  to  human  egoistic 
ends  does  not  manifest  those  easily  discernible  earmarks  of  finality 
which  make  a man  or  movement  prophetic. 

This  constituting  the  background  and  setting  of  the  book,  it  is  of 
further  significance  that  the  present  volume  is,  as  the  preface  states, 
one  of  a “series  of  handbooks”  edited  by  Professors  Shailer  Matthews, 
T.  H.  Soares,  and  W.  W.  Charters,  under  the  caption,  The  University 
of  Chicago  Publications  in  Religious  Education,  with  the  sub-title, 
Handbooks  of  Ethics  and  Religion.  Cooperative  or  co-departmental 
literary  production  is  a highly  commendable  method.  Chicago  is  effec- 
tually employing  it  for  phalanxing  its  attack  upon  colleges,  semi- 
naries, and  the  general  reading  public,  to  all  of  which  the  series  is 
specifically  addressed.  The  method  employed  in  the  series  is  the  critical 
and  the  “historical,”  by  which  it  is  intended  to  avoid  and  discredit  the 
normative  traditionary  and  dogmatic  method.  “It  is  hoped,”  the  joint 
authors  conclude,  “that  the  series  will  help  to  show  that  the  method  of 
experiment  and  criticism  contributes  to  stronger  religious  faith  and 
moral  idealism.” 

The  specific  place  of  this  book  and  author  in  the  series  is  to  discuss 
“some  of  the  crucial  issues  presented  to  religious  thinkers  today.” 
These  issues  are  of  an  entirely  different  classification,  it  is  contended, 
from  those  of  the  past  several  centuries,  which  were  denominational  or 
sectarian  in  nature.  The  strife  between  Calvinism,  Arminianism  and 
Pelagianism  has  become  obsolete,  and  problems  which  cut  cross-section 
wise  across  Protestant  denominational  lines  have  totally  replaced, them. 
The  author  declares  these  to  be  the  problems  of  modern  empirical 
science,  of  society  and  the  social  consciousness,  the  problems  of  re- 
ligion and  its  psychological  analysis  as  opposed  to  doctrinal  problems, 
and  the  problems  of  historical  criticism.  Appealing  for  its  support  and 
following  to  the  American  populace,  as  Chicago  theology  character- 
istically does,  the  author  does  not  attempt  to  deal  with  the  theological 
movements  of  Europe. 

The  advantage  which  the  work  may  be  said  to  possess  consists  in 
(1)  its  exposition  in  lucid  terms  of  radical  modernism,  (2)  its  touch- 
ing in  a fairly  complete  way  on  all  of  the  very  most  important  cruces 
of  theology  in  their  bearing  upon  the  issue  between  conservatism  and 
radicalism,  and  (3)  the  useful  bibliographical  lists  at  the  end  of  each 
chapter  which  give  to  those  interested  a survey  of  the  recent  literature 
— practically  all  modernistic — on  the  subjects  discussed. 

The  following  subjects  are  treated,  I.  Roman  Catholicism,  II.  The 
Significance  of  the  Protestant  Revolt,  III.  Modernism.  In  this  chapter 
Modernism  is  made  virtually  coterminous  with  scientific  inquiry,  dis- 
covery and  method  which  arose  with  Galileo  nearly  a century  after  the 
Protestant  Reformation.  From  the  scientific  viewpoint  the  author  de- 
clares that  “Catholicism  and  Protestantism  alike  . . . embody  essentially 
medieval  ways  of  thinking.”  The  recollection  of  Celsus,  Marcion,  Arius, 
Pelagius  and  Julian  may  help  to  repulse  the  epithet  “medieval”  with 


RECENT  LITERATURE 


463 


which  Protestantism  is  so  strangely  execrated,  and  force  the  author  to 
stamp  Modernism  in  turn  as  />rcmedieval.  Modernism,  after  the  manner 
of  the  above  usus  loquendi,  may  be  said  to  “embody  essentially  ANCIENT 
ways  of  thinking.”  And  to  assert  that  Protestant  theology  was  de- 
stroyed by  scientific  inquiry  is  to  forget  that  scientific  inquiry  is  not  per  se 
inimical  to  theology.  It  is  the  agnostic  philosophical  constructions  put  upon 
the  laws  and  results  of  scientific  inquiry  by  biased  scientific  minds  which 
converts  Science  into  a foe  of  theology  instead  of  its  ally.  The  question 
begging  conception  that  Science  is  by  nature  irreconcilably  anti-theological 
runs  all  through  nearly  every  page  of  the  book,  and  gives  to  all  of  the 
author’s  very  trenchant  positions  their  effect. 

Again,  the  stock  and  favorite  non-sequitur  of  scientific  religious  writ- 
ers is  virtually  revamped  (p.  36),  that  the  Protestant  theologians  con- 
demned the  Copernican  theory  which  ultimately  became  established 
fact,  therefore  all  modern  Protestant  theologians  who  assume  to  con- 
trovert the  more  recent  scientific  theories  of  the  day  are  trespassing  on 
forbidden  ground,  and  their  statements  null  and  void.  The  outworn 
appeal  to  this  admitted  limitation  in  the  scientific  knowledge  of  Luther 
and  Calvin  never  seems  to  lose  its  place  among  liberal  writers.  “If  it 
proves  anything  it  proves  that  all  conservative  theological  dogmas  are 
invalid  simply  because  the  Bible  seemed  to  teach  that  the  sun  goes 
around  the  earth”  (which  the  Bible  does  not  teach) — so  the  reasoning 
usually  goes.  Prof.  Smith  sharply  excludes  the  Bible  from  the  preroga- 
tive of  having  anything  decisive  to  say  about  astronomy,  geology,  bi- 
ology, and  the  other  sciences : “The  fact  is  that  the  modern  world  has 
ceased  to  look  to  the  theologians  for  its  interpretation  of  nature.” 

The  critical  historical  method  has  likewise  “set  religious  thinking  to 
a considerable  extent  free  from  the  requirement  to  conform  to  biblical 
norms”  (p.  42).  Similarly,  Modernism  is  stated  to  conform  to  no 
authoritative  creed.  It  is  loyal  to  truth  only  in  the  reserved  form  of 
possessing  the  spirit  of  inquiry  rather  than  any  fixed  content  as  the 
result  of  that  inquiry,  and  of  a willingness  to  constantly  revise  think- 
ing. On  the  other  hand  it  is  distinguishable  from  radicalism  the  writer 
contends  in  that  it  positively  adheres  to  “historic  Christianity,”  an  ex- 
pression which  is  more  conservative  sounding  than  it  really  is.  Viewed 
from  the  standpoint  of  “historic  Christianity”  as  Luther  and  Calvin 
conceived  it  Prof.  Smith’s  position  is  none  less  than  that  from  which 
he  seeks  to  differentiate  himself  by  use  of  the  deceptive  term  “histori- 
cal Christianity,”  namely,  radicalism.  Radical  he  is  and  remains  to  all 
evangelical  Christians. 

Chapter  IV,  The  Catholic  Church  and  Modernism  follows. 

The  treatment  of  Fundamentalism,  Chapter  V,  is  characterized  by 
the  familiar  habit  of  such  writers  of  assimilating  Fundamentalism  to 
the  Roman  Catholic  Church  in  respect  to  one  point  which  is  rather 
unfairly  selected  out  and  made  too  much  of,  namely,  authoritarianism 
and  the  religious  duty  of  “accepting”  and  “submitting.”  To  the  Funda- 
mentalist “accepting’  ’and  “submitting”  to  authority  is  not  an  onus : to 
the  Modernist  it  is.  To  one  it  is  an  act  of  humiliation ; to  the  other  it 


464 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


is  not.  There  lies  the  real  difference.  For  the  Fundamentalist  Funda- 
mentalism is  much  more  than,  and  other  than  this  negatively  put 
psychological  attitude.  “Submission”  is  a corruption  for  “love  of  the 
truth.”  It  is  therefore  a constantly  irritating  injustice  to  have  Funda- 
mentalism so  inveterately  described  from  the  viewpoint  of  only  one, 
and  that  an  external  one,  of  its  characteristics.  The  very  terminology 
is  offensive  and  prejudicial.  Instead  of  “authoritarianism”  Biblicism 
would  better  describe  the  characteristic  of  Fundamentalism.  It  is  a 
further  injustice  to  so  invidiously  compare  this  authoritarianism  and 
“submission”  to  that  of  the  Romish  Church,  with  its  fides  implicita  and 
stifling  of  the  right  of  private  judgment,  without  delineating  with  equal 
care,  the  big  differences  involved. 

Chapter  VI,  on  The  Appeal  to  Christian  Experience,  brings  into 
strong  relief  the  pragmatic  and  subjectivistic  turn  of  the  author,  who 
rejects  all  doctrines,  from  the  Trinity  and  Angels  to  Miracles  because 
they  are  not  capable  of  being  experienced.  The  question  “whose  experi- 
ence is  true  and  authoritative?”  always  mutinously  raises  its  head  in 
such  theological  empiricism,  and  the  author  dares  to  face  it.  Suffice 
it  to  say  that  the  writer  fails  to  give  either  a clear  or  a satisfactory 
answer  to  this  question. 

The  remaining  Chapters  are  VII,  The  Appeal  to  Christ,  VIII,  The 
Theological  Interpretation  of  the  Natural  World,  IX,  The  Modern 
Quest  for  God,  X,  The  Controversy  Over  Evolution,  in  which  the  un- 
broken continuity  of  nature  is  set  forth  against  opposing  views  as  the 
only  adequate  theory  for  evolution,  and  XI,  The  Spirit  of  Evangelical 
Christianity. 

Princeton.  F.  D.  Jenkins. 

Faith  in  God  and  its  Christian  Consummation.  By  D.  M.  Baillie,  M.A. 

Edinburgh : T.  and  T.  Clarke.  1927.  Price  $3-25- 

The  critical  estimate  of  this  book  is  to  be  gauged,  in  all  fairness,  by 
the  self-stated  admissions  in  the  preface.  Also,  when  any  deep  theme 
is  approached  in  a spirit  of  modesty  and  humility  the  sharpness  of 
criticism  is  removed  if  the  development  should  fall  short  of  the  mark. 
“In  putting  forth  my  book  I cannot  but  feel  how  inadequate  it  is  to  the 
greatness  of  its  theme,  especially  in  the  second  part,  which  is  a little  more 
than  a groping  after  truth  in  the  face  of  acute  modern  problems.  But  I 
venture  to  hope  that  the  work  may  be  useful  to  students  as  a guide 
through  the  mazes  of  controversy,  and  that  it  may  be  found  to  make 
some  slight  contribution  at  one  or  two  points  which  are  among  the  grow- 
ing points  of  religious  thought  at  the  present  time.” 

Thus  the  method  is  heuristic  and  the  attitude  that  of  one  who  regards 
the  subject  as  a problem,  with  no  necessarily  certain  or  final  solution. 
Such  is  the  method  adopted  by  modern  science  and  philosophy  which 
is  divorced  from  Biblical  and  religious  authority.  But  when,  in  Biblical 
and  theological  research  this  modern  attitude  becomes  reduced  to  a 
“little  more  than  a groping  after  truth  in  the  face  of  modern  problems” 
the  attempt  does  not  seem  to  commend  itself  to  the  theologically  minded 


RECENT  LITERATURE 


465 


reader’s  confidence  at  the  very  outset.  To  the  systematic  theologian,  at 
least,  this  attitude  is  that  of  a theological  experimenter  or  beginner  still 
wrestling  with  the  inductive  method  which  constitutes  the  approach  to 
the  formulation  of  doctrines.  The  doctrine  itself  seems  never  to  be  defin- 
itely and  securely  arrived  at.  The  characteristic  of  Revelation  is  the  note 
of  certainty  in  all  of  its  teachings,  no  less  in  the  doctrine  of  faith  than  in 
its  other  doctrines.  But  we  do  not  here  find  this  characteristic.  The  work 
partakes  of  the  nature  of  a speculative  investigation  whose  final  con- 
clusions seem  colored  and  conditioned  by  the  opinions  of  the  many 
religio-philosophical  theorists  through  or  between  whom  the  author  in 
dialectic  fashion  steers  his  course.  So  it  may  justly  be  said  that  the 
method  is  inadequate,  for  it  is  patently  the  speculative  one.  It  suffers  the 
limitations  of  such. 

A further  criticism  appears  in  the  consideration  that  the  author  keeps 
the  discussion  confined  to  the  religio-philosophical  and  religio-psycholog- 
ical  spheres  to  the  marked  exclusion  of  Biblical  theology  and  exegesis. 
Christian  faith  appears  to  be  connected  primarily  with  suffering  and  evil 
in  their  antithesis  to  good.  While  the  author  is  quite  balanced  in  his 
rejection  of  the  contentions  of  modern  psychology  on  the  nature  of 
faith  (e.g.,  W.  James’  Will  to  Believe,  etc.),  he  does  not  on  the  other 
hand  fill  it  with  enough  objective  content  to  lift  it  out  of  the  realm  of 
psychological  analysis  and  religious  speculation.  Faith  is  rightly  defined 
and  qualified  much  more  by  the  nature  of  the  object  on  which  it  ter- 
minates than  by  the  introspection  of  the  believer’s  states  of  consciousness. 

Had  the  writer  discussed  the  Biblical  data  and  kept  subjeotive  analysis 
to  a greater  extent  out  of  consideration  his  constructive  views  would 
have  been  more  certain  and  objective.  But,  he  states  in  his  preface, 
“discussion  of  the  idea  of  revelation”  is  “excluded  by  the  whole  plan  of 
the  book.”  Both  the  idea  of  revelation  and  its  teaching  upon  this  high 
theme  are  irrespectfully  glossed  over.  Of  course,  in  Part  II  on  “Chris- 
tian Faith,”  where  the  self-alleged  “groping  after  the  truth”  is  enacted, 
particularly  in  its  two  chapters  “Faith  and  the  Historical  Jesus”  and 
“Faith  and  the  Gospel  of  Jesus,”  the  writer  goes  through  the  form  of 
citing  many  texts  (or  shall  we  say  pretexts).  But  neither  the  historical 
Jesus  nor  the  Gospel  of  Jesus  are  found  in  their  fulsomely  expressed 
divinity  and  purity.  Without  either  of  them  there  can  be  no  satisfactory 
conception  of  Christian  faith.  The  conception  of  fides  salvifica  involves 
the  elements  of  sin  as  guilt  and  power,  Christ  as  a divine  Mediator, 
justification  as  forensic,  the  testimony  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  and  the  doc- 
trine of  prevenient  grace.  None  of  these,  as  a matter  of  fact,  are  found 
depicted  in  their  integrity  and  purity.  Christ  Himself  is  not  made  the 
specific  object  of  faith  par  excellence.  The  somewhat  Ritschilianizing 
emphasis  of  God  in  Christ  as  opposed  to  Christ  as  God  is  made  in  speak- 
ing of  the  object  of  Christian  faith. 

The  best  part  of  the  work  is  not  therefore  the  constructive  one  (Part 
II  particularly)  where  the  writer  embarks  on  a voyage  of  discovery 
for  personal  originality,  but  Part  I where  the  various  religio-psycholog- 
ical  views  are  exploited  and  critically  analyzed. 


466 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


The  variety  of  modern  views  introduced  and  discussed  makes  the  work 
very  interesting  and  informing  and  up-to-date.  And  the  critique  of  the 
current  generic  theories  of  faith  is  at  most  points  very  balanced  and 
helpful  so  long  as  we  remember  that  it  is  merely  the  general  psycho- 
logical nature  of  faith  that  is  before  us  for  consideration  in  the  author’s 
treatment.  This  review  and  criticism  of  modern  viewpoints,  the  nega- 
tive rather  than  the  positive  treatment,  will  be  found  by  the  evangelical 
reader  to  be  the  most  valuable  part  of  the  book. 

The  style  is  free,  rather  conversational,  and  easy  to  follow  throughout. 

Princeton.  F.  D.  Jenkins. 

More  Than  Atonement,  A Study  in  Genetic  Theology.  By  John  B. 
Champion,  Professor  of  Christian  Doctrine,  Eastern  Baptist  Theo- 
logical Seminary.  Harrisburg:  The  Evangelical  Press.  $2.50  net. 

More  than  ordinary  interest  attaches  to  this  volume,  which  will  gen- 
erally be  regarded  as  setting  forth  the  doctrinal  platform  of  the 
institution  recently  founded  in  Philadelphia  to  offset  the  drift  to  Modern- 
ism in  the  Northern  Baptist  Church — a school,  it  ought  to  be  added, 
which  has  been  growing  by  leaps  and  bounds.  As  might  have  been 
expected,  the  general  presentation  is  profoundly  evangelical.  “To  seek 
the  origin  of  Christianity  in  modern  ideas  rather  than  in  historic  facts, 
would  not  be  scientific  procedure.  Manifestly,  the  original  facts  are  the 
originating  facts”  (p.  28).  Salvation  from  sin  is  of  course  the  central 
theme  of  the  book,  but  this  salvation  is  presented  not  so  much  as  devised 
and  offered  by  a sovereign  God  of  infinite  holiness  and  love,  as  flowing 
by  inevitable  necessity  from  the  sacrificial  nature  of  Jehovah,  Who 
thus  fulfils  the  highest  possibilities  of  His  being.  Thus  the  fulfilment 
of  the  nature  of  God  becomes  the  substance  of  Calvary’s  redemption. 

In  the  development  of  this  soteriological  conception  there  appears 
much  that  is  illuminating  and  instructive.  Professor  Champion’s  angle 
of  approach  has  unquestionably  been  too  much  neglected.  And  the  stress- 
ing of  sacrifice  in  the  Christian  life  as  the  outcome  of  the  dawning  and 
ever-deepening  apprehension  of  the  unutterable  cost  of  redemption 
deserves  the  profoundest  study.  The  treatment  of  sin,  a vital  point  in 
any  system,  is  decidedly  satisfactory.  And  again  and  again  the  reader 
is  surprised  by  flashes  of  deep  insight,  as  in  the  handling  of  the  sacrifice 
made  by  God  in  the  giving  of  His  only-begotten  Son.  Moreover,  what- 
ever value  may  be  attached  to  the  discussion  of  such  themes  as  Christian 
Personality  (growing,  as  they  do,  out  of  the  application  of  the  author’s 
special  presentation),  one  finds  at  least  a wide  acquaintance  with  phi- 
losophy and  modern  psychology. 

The  most  serious  defect  of  the  book  consists  in  the  treatment  of  the 
forensic  aspects  of  the  Redeemer’s  work.  His  effecting  of  a representative 
righteousness  is  freely  admitted,  indeed  almost  overstressed;  but  He 
would  seem  to  bear  the  sin  of  the  world  only  in  the  sense  that  on  Him,  as 
the  God-man,  the  murderous  power  of  sin  was  exhaustively  expended. 
Only  in  this  sense  was  He  identified  with  human  sin ; we  are  not  to 


RECENT  LITERATURE 


467 


think  of  Him  as  bearing  the  penalty  imposed  by  an  inexorable  Lawgiver. 
But  without  referring  to  such  special  passages  as  Isaiah  liii.  10  or 
2 Corinthians  v.  2,  a large  part  of  the  evangelical  family  will  feel  that  it 
is  quite  too  late  in  the  day  to  attempt  to  set  aside  the  exegetical  results 
of  a long  succession  of  the  ablest  scholars  in  Christendom  in  the  interest 
of  a real  but  subsidiary  truth.  One  feels,  too,  that  in  less  evangelical 
hands  the  side-stepping  of  our  Lord’s  actual,  if  forensic,  identifica- 
tion with  the  guilt  of  humanity  would  pretty  certainly  lend  itself  to  the 
idea  that  atonement  consists  in  the  implantation  of  a new,  sacrificial 
spirit — which  would  assuredly  eviscerate  and  nullify  the  Gospel  of 
Grace. 

Nor  can  we  follow  Professor  Champion  in  his  references  to  the  Keno- 
sis.  “Christ  was  living  within  the  limits  of  the  human  way  and  capacity 
of  apprehension.  For  this  reason,  He  was  no  more  omniscient  about 
the  infinite  meaning,  infinite  purpose,  infinite  process  going  on  and 
centering  in  His  Cross,  than  He  was  omniscient  about  the  program  of 
the  Parousia,”  etc.  (p.  181).  This  takes  us  back  to  the  old  problem  of  the 
ofSev  of  Matt.  xxiv.  36.  Certainly  if  the  Hiphil  force  of  this  verb,  main- 
tained by  some,  be  admitted,  the  generally-accepted  kenotic  ignorance 
will  have  to  be  surrendered.  At  least,  those  disposed  to  disparage  the 
idea  of  an  occasional  causative  shading  of  olSev  would  do  well  to  con- 
sider John  xix.  35.  Will  this  passage  with  its  Iva  interpret  at  all  without 
such  shading? 

In  discussing  the  meaning  of  the  name  Jehovah,  Professor  Champion 
follows  Davidson  in  translating  it  “I  will  be,”  and  hence  sees  in  it  not 
ontology,  but  the  promise  of  revelation.  Both  the  LXX  and  the  Vulgate, 
however,  render  “I  am  what  I am”  (the  LXX  6 iov).  The  American 
Revision,  with  its  ample  learning,  gives  this  rendering  the  preference, 
while  the  notable  Jewish  Version  of  1917  translates  in  the  present,  with- 
out offering  any  alternative.  Doubtless  eternity  is  the  real  thought  con- 
tained in  the  Ineffable  Name,  with  the  consequent  insuring  of  an  eternal 
covenant. 

Lincoln  University , Pa.  Edwin  J.  Reinke. 


PRACTICAL  THEOLOGY 

D.  L.  Moody,  A Worker  in  Souls.  By  Gamaliel  Bradford.  New  York: 
George  H.  Doran  Co.  Cloth.  8vo.  pp.  320.  Price  $3.50  net. 

This  is  a piece  of  brilliant  biographical  composition.  Its  fascination, 
its  pungency,  its  color,  its  vividness  have  been  widely  recognized  and 
justly  praised.  However,  it  is  the  product  of  one  who  had  no  personal 
acquaintance  with  the  great  evangelist,  who  does  not  accept  his  Gospel 
message,  and  who  does  not  know  the  real  secret  of  his  extraordinary 
power. 

The  author,  however,  has  worked  with  earnestness  and  patience. 
He  has  acquainted  himself  with  all  the  facts  to  which  he  had  access. 


468 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


He  has  carefully  read  the  printed  sermons  and  addresses  of  Mr.  Moody, 
and  has  studied  the  existing  reports  of  his  historic  evangelistic  cam- 
paigns. The  very  fact  that  he  has  so  little  sympathy  with  the  message 
enhances  the  value  of  his  frank  and  eloquent  tribute  to  its  appeal  and 
its  power.  There  is  too  something  wistful  in  his  attitude  toward  the 
mystery  of  the  hidden  sources  of  strength  which  alone  can  adequately 
explain  the  influence  which  Mr.  Moody  exerted  on  the  men  of  his 
generation  and  is  exerting  still. 

The  book  does  not  follow  the  usual  method  of  biographies,  and 
record  the  events  of  a life  in  the  order  of  time.  It  consists  of  a series 
of  sketches.  There  is  a picture  of  “The  Growth  of  a Soul,”  a state- 
ment of  Mr.  Moody’s  doctrinal  beliefs,  an  analysis  of  his  power  as  a 
preacher,  a description  of  his  singing  associate,  Mr.  Sankey,  and  an 
estimate  of  the  evangelist  as  a man,  as  a business  organizer  and  as  a 
“Molder  of  Souls.”  One  cannot  deny  that  there  are  passages  in  the 
book  which  appear  flippant,  irreverent,  even  offensive.  However,  the 
general  effect  upon  the  reader  is  an  impression  that  the  author  has 
pictured  a great  man,  whose  career  was  mighty  in  its  influence  for 
good,  as  he  addressed  himself  to  the  world’s  supreme  need  and  labored 
with  unparalleled  success  in  bringing  men  to  God. 

Princeton.  Charles  R.  Erdman. 

Qualifying  Men  for  Church  Work.  By  Gerrit  Verkuyl.  New  York: 
Fleming  H.  Revell  Co.  Cloth.  i2mo.  pp.  204.  Price  $1.50. 

As  in  his  volumes  previously  published  Dr.  Verkuyl  gives  in  this 
volume  a clear,  simple  and  Scriptural  treatment  of  the  problem  of  se- 
curing a sufficiently  well-equipped  body  of  men  who  can  serve  as  lead- 
ers in  the  work  of  the  Christian  Church.  He  deals  with  the  demands 
which  the  present  time  is  making  for  such  leaders.  He  shows  the  vast 
undeveloped  resources  of  the  Christian  Church.  He  specifies  the  quali- 
ties which  are  found  in  the  leaders  whose  lives  are  recorded  in  Scrip- 
ture. He  then  turns  to  the  discovery  and  the  instruction  of  Christian 
workers,  showing  that  all  real  leadership  must  be  turned  in  the  direc- 
tion of  bringing  men  into  a vital  fellowship  with  Christ.  Each  one  of 
the  ten  chapters  closes  with  suggestions  for  private  study  and  class 
work,  the  entire  book  being  designed  for  the  use  of  Sunday  and  week- 
day classes  in  local  churches,  and  also  for  training  schools  and  summer 
conferences. 

Princeton.  Charles  R.  Erdman. 

Our  Lord  and  Oms.  By  P.  E.  Burroughs.  Nashville,  Tenn. : Sunday 
School  Board  of  the  Southern  Baptist  Convention,  iamo.  pp.  148. 

This  volume  is  a study  in  Christian  stewardship.  Its  particular  pur- 
pose is  to  consider  the  principles  of  stewardship  in  relation  to  the 
evangelization  of  the  world.  As  a sub-title  the  author  employs  the 
phrase  “Stewardship  in  Missions.”  It  is  a book  which  is  especially  de- 
signed for  the  use  of  Sabbath  Schools.  The  writer  is  himself  Secre- 
tary of  the  Department  of  Church  Education  of  the  Baptist  Sunday 


RECENT  LITERATURE 


469 


School  Board.  He  deals  with  the  problems  of  proportionate  and  sys- 
tematic giving  and  with  the  questions  involved  in  church  finance.  It  is 
to  a very  large  extent  a book  designed  for  use  in  the  Southern  Baptist 
denomination  but  embodies  principles  applicable  to  all  Christians. 

Princeton.  Charles  R.  Erdman. 

Administering  the  Vacation  Church  School.  By  J.  S.  Armentrout. 
Philadelphia : The  Westminster  Press.  Cloth.  i2mo.  pp.  208.  Price 
$1.00  net. 

The  successful  career  of  the  Vacation  Church  School,  formerly 
known  as  the  Daily  Vacation  Bible  School,  makes  any  treatment  of 
the  subject  interesting  and  valuable  for  ministers  and  Christian  work- 
ers of  the  present  day.  The  volume  by  Mr.  Armentrout  is  of  particular 
interest  and  helpfulness  because  of  his  careful  study  and  exact  knowl- 
edge of  the  subject  which  he  treats.  His  position  as  Director  of  Lead- 
ership Training  and  formerly  Director  of  Vacation  Church  Schools  of 
the  Board  of  Christian  Education  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  in  the 
U.S.A.  has  equipped  him  fully  for  the  task  he  has  here  accomplished. 
He  deals  with  the  development  of  the  Vacation  Church  School  with 
its  relation  to  the  aims  of  religious  education,  with  the  place  of  wor- 
ship, of  knowledge  and  of  Christian  service  in  the  development  of  char- 
acter and  then  deals  with  the  more  practical  problems  of  the  organ- 
ization, conduct,  curriculum  and  equipment  of  the  Vacation  Church 
School.  This  volume  is  a text-book  in  the  Standard  Leadership  Train- 
ing Curriculum  outlined  and  approved  by  the  International  Council  of 
Religious  Education.  It  will  be  found  of  great  value  to  all  who  are 
concerned  with  this  important  phase  of  modern  church  work. 

Princeton.  Charles  R.  Erdman. 

Of  Them  He  Chose  Twelve.  By  Clarence  Edward  Macartney,  D.D. 
Philadelphia:  Dorrance  & Company.  1927.  Pp.  181. 

Dr.  Macartney  has  written  another  fine  book.  It  is  a study  of  the 
Twelve  Apostles,  including  also  chapters  on  Paul  and  John  the  Baptist. 
Basing  his  statement  on  the  sources,  the  author  gives  a brief  and  pene- 
trating characterization  of  each  of  these  men,  showing  their  psycho- 
logical characteristics,  their  historical  significance,  and  drawing  prac- 
tical lessons  from  each  of  his  studies. 

On  the  publishers’  paper  cover  we  read : “Those  to  whom  the  Apostles 
are  rather  vague  historical  characters  imprisoned  within  the  covers  of 
the  Good  Book  will  find  this  straightforward,  human  analysis  of  their 
different  temperaments  and  characters  both  stimulating  and  provoca- 
tive of  further  study.  Dr.  Macartney  has  the  gift  of  warming  his  material 
into  something  vital  and  appealing  and  as  we  read  of  the  lives  and 
manners  of  this  group  who  followed  the  Master  we  realize  that  human 
nature  changes  very  little.” 

This  statement  about  this  book  is  true  as  far  as  it  goes,  but  it  misses 
the  point  of  the  book.  It  is  not  the  fact  that  the  author  “has  the  gift  of 
warming  his  material  into  something  vital  and  appealing” — he  undoubt- 


470 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


edly  has  this — which  gives  the  book  its  value,  nor  do  these  words  express 
his  purpose.  The  value  of  the  book  lies  in  the  fact  that  the  author  does 
not  content  himself  with  historical  and  psychological  matters,  and  has 
apparently  little  concern  in  “warming  up  his  material  into  something 
vital,”  but  is  deeply  concerned  with  the  message  of  the  Apostles — the 

Divine  revelation  of  which  the  Apostles  were  the  organs  and  to  which 

they  bore  witness.  “If  we  know  the  Apostles  better  we  shall  be  rewarded 
by  knowing  better  Him,  whom  to  know  aright  is  Eternal  Life” — so 
writes  the  author,  stating  in  a sentence  the  purpose  and  main  content 
of  his  book:  Jesus  of  Nazareth  as  the  Christ,  Christ  the  Messiah  as  the 
eternal  Son  of  God,  the  redemptive  significance  of  the  Cross,  in  a word 
the  Gospel  of  salvation  from  sin,  revealed  by  God  to  man.  “God,  who  at 
sundry  times  and  in  divers  manners  spake  in  time  past  unto  the  fathers 
by  the  prophets,  hath  in  these  last  days  spoken  unto  us  by  His  Son,” 

— here  we  have  the  theme  of  this  book.  And  since  this  is  the  Word 

of  God,  no  human  mind  or  eloquence  can  make  it  “vital,”  but  only 
the  Spirit  of  the  living  God.  This  author  does,  however,  rise  at  times 
to  eloquence,  an  eloquence  born  not  only  of  conviction  but  of  insight 
into  the  essence  of  the  Gospel.  We  have  space  but  for  one  instance,  and 
with  it  we  close.  In  the  last  chapter,  the  one  on  John  the  Baptist,  after 
stating  several  of  the  sources  of  his  power,  Dr.  Macartney  adds  as 
the  last,  the  greatness  of  John’s  message: 

Shortly  before  His  passion,  Jesus  went  back  to  the  Jordan  country 
where  He  had  been  baptized  by  John  and  by  the  Holy  Spirit.  The  dis- 
ciples of  John,  now  dead,  gathered  about  Him  and  listened  to  Him  and 
saw  His  miracles.  This  was  their  verdict,  “John  did  no  miracles.”  He 
never  stilled  the  tempest,  nor  opened  the  blind  eyes,  nor  raised  the 
dead — “but  all  things  that  John  spake  of  this  man  were  true.”  What  was 
it  that  John  said  about  Jesus?  Did  he  say,  “Behold  the  man  who  did 
no  sin  and  whose  blameless  life  will  leave  the  world  a great  example 
of  how  to  live”?  Did  he  say,  “Behold  the  man,  the  carpenter’s  son  who 
never  wrote  a line  save  in  the  dust,  and  yet  the  man  whose  words  have 
done  more  to  temper  and  soften  and  regenerate  mankind  than  all  the 
sayings  of  the  philosophers  and  all  the  books  of  the  ages”?  Did  he  say, 
“Behold  the  man  whose  birth  will  be  the  watershed  of  history,  dividing 
it  into  two  parts,  Before  Christ  and  After  Christ”?  Did  he  say,  “Behold 
the  man  whose  life  shall  be  a fountain  of  compassion  whence  shall  flow 
has  brought  life  and  immortality  to  light”?  Did  he  say,  “Behold  the  man 
who  was  in  the  world  and  yet  not  of  it  and  who  more  than  any  other 
has  brought  life  and  immortality  to  life”  ? Did  he  say,  “Behold  the  man 
whose  death  on  the  Cross  will  be  the  supreme  example  of  that  vicarious 
suffering  which  runs  like  a scarlet  thread  through  all  creation”?  Was 
that  what  John  said  of  Jesus?  If  so,  oblivion’s  sea  had  long  ago  swept 
over  him.  No,  not  that,  but  this,  this  which  takes  all  that  in,  this  which 
left  out,  Christianity  is  left  out : “Behold,  the  Lamb  of  God  that  taketh 
away  the  sin  of  the  world!” 

It  is  that  witness  of  John  to  Jesus  that  men  today  are  trying  to 
muffle  and  silence.  The  world  will  let  you  talk  about  Jesus  as  beauti- 
fully as  you  please.  It  will  let  you  heap  high  the  flowers  of  your  eulogia, 
but  there  is  one  thing  that  the  world  cannot  tolerate,  and  this  is  that 
you  should  say  of  Jesus  what  John  said,  “Behold,  the  Lamb  of  God  that 
taketh  away  the  sin  of  the  world,”  God’s  eternal  sacrifice  for  sin.  Utter 
these  words  and  you  will  find  that  the  Cross  hath  still  its  ancient  offense. 


RECENT  LITERATURE 


471 


Leave  them  out  and  you  will  find  that  then  has  the  offense  of  the  Cross 
ceased.  This  is  the  question  before  the  Church  today : Shall  the  offense 
of  the  Cross  cease?  Shall  the  Gospel  cease  to  be  good  news  and  become 
only  good  advice?  Shall  the  Churches  which  have  been  entrusted  with 
the  Gospel  become  lighthouses  whose  light  has  been  quenched,  or,  stiff 
worse,  lighthouses  which  burn  and  flash  with  false  lights  which  allure  to 
destruction  voyagers  on  the  sea  of  life? 

“Behold,  the  Lamb  of  God  that  taketh  away  the  sin  of  the  world!” 
Wherever  that  is  left  out  Christianity  is  left  out.  Wherever  it  is  spoken 
and  honored  there  the  Gospd  is  preached,  whether  from  the  incense- 
laden altars  of  Greek  and  Roman  Churches  or  in  the  severe  dignity  of 
our  Reformed  Churches,  or  in  a Gospel  mission,  or  to  the  accompaniment 
of  a bass  drum  on  the  street,  or  when  at  eventide  a mother  tells  her 
little  child  of  the  love  of  God  in  Christ.  Man  is  still  a sinner,  and  still 
his  great  need  is  redemption  from  sin.  Calvary  has  no  successor,  the 
Lamb  of  God  has  no  substitute.  He  is  the  sinner’s  only  hope.  He  is  the 
power  and  glory  of  the  Church  here,  and  hereafter  it  is  the  Lamb  of 
God,  no  longer  upon  the  Cross  but  upon  the  throne  of  the  universe,  to 
whom  redeemed  sinners  will  pay  their  grateful  homage. 

These  are  not  only  eloquent  but  weighty  words.  Here  is  the  center  of 
the  Gospel.  Here  is  still  the  offense  of  the  Cross.  All  of  the  so-called 
modern  theories  of  the  Atonement  are  but  efforts  to  take  away  from  the 
Cross  its  offense.  The  offense  of  the  Cross  has  never  ceased,  and  the 
cause  of  its  offense  has  always  been  the  same.  The  Greeks  among 
modern  men  are  still  seeking  human  wisdom  and  the  Jews  among  modern 
men  are  still  seeking  a legal  righteousness,  no  matter  how  subtle  or 
refined  its  form.  But  unto  those  who  are  effectually  called,  the  preaching 
of  Christ  crucified  for  sin  is  still  the  power  of  God  unto  salvation. 

We  commend  this  book.  God  give  the  Church  more  preachers  like  this. 

Princeton.  C.  W.  Hodge. 

Paul  the  Man.  His  Life,  His  Message  and  His  Ministry.  By  Clarence 
Edward  Macartney,  D.D.  Author  of  “Putting  on  Immortality," 
“Twelve  Great  Questions  About  Christ,”  etc.  New  York,  Chicago, 
London  and  Edinburgh : Fleming  H.  Revell  Company.  1928. 

This  latest  book,  which  Dr.  Macartney  has  added  to  the  notable  series 
already  bearing  his  name,  deals  with  Paul  the  man,  rather  than  with 
Paul’s  message.  But  unlike  some  recent  books  on  the  same  subject  it  is 
written  by  one  who  not  only  admires  the  man  but  also  has  himself  under- 
stood the  message.  No  more  important  qualification  could  be  found  for 
a book  on  such  a subject.  Paulinism  is  greater  than  Paul.  So  Paul  thought 
himself,  and  so  they  must  think  who  would  understand  Paul. 

It  is  refreshing,  therefore,  to  read  this  simple  and  vivid  account  of 
Paul’s  life  by  a preacher  who  with  at  least  as  great  power  as  any  other 
man  of  our  day  is  proclaiming  to  a lost  and  needy  world  the  gospel  of 
salvation  that  Paul  was  the  chief  instrument  of  God  in  giving  to  the 
Church.  It  is  a noble  figure  of  a man  that  stands  out  for  us  again  in  the 
pages  of  Dr.  Macartney’s  book.  We  see  the  Apostle  to  the  Gentiles  in 
his  physical  weakness  but  also  in  his  true  greatness.  By  contrast  with 
Roman  governors  and  Jewish  mobs,  we  obtain  some  impression  of  the 
moral  grandeur  of  this  greatest  hero  of  the  Faith.  What  is  better  still, 


472 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


we  come  to  understand  anew  that  the  true  secret  of  Paul’s  life  was 
found  in  the  message  that  he  was  commissioned  to  proclaim. 

Dr.  Macartney  is  not  concerned  in  this  book  to  discuss  mooted  ques- 
tions about  the  order  of  events  in  Paul’s  life  or  about  the  time  and  place 
and  addresses  of  the  Epistles.  The  outline  that  is  here  given  is  not  alto- 
gether complete ; we  miss,  for  example,  any  mention,  in  the  regular  place 
in  the  narrative,  of  the  “famine  visit”  of  Paul  and  Barnabas  to  Jerusalem, 
though  that  visit  is  later  mentioned  in  the  enumeration  on  p.  127.  Some- 
times one  may  hold  a different  opinion  about  disputed  points.  We  are  not 
so  certain  as  Dr.  Macartney  is  about  the  correctness  of  the  South  Gala- 
tian theory  of  the  address  of  Galatians ; and  we  hardly  -think  that  on  that 
theory  the  date  of  the  Epistle  can  be  put  so  late  as  apparently  Dr. 
Macartney  puts  it.  We  think  that  it  would  have  been  well  to  make  a little 
plainer  the  sharp  separation  that  undoubtedly  existed  between  the 
Judaizers  on  tire  one  hand  and  both  Peter  and  James  on  the  other.  So 
the  term  “Judaic”  and  not  the  term  “Judaistic”  should  have  been  used 
on  p.  45,  where  the  “Judaistic  childhood”  of  the  gospel  is  spoken  of, 
though  it  is  plain  enough  from  the  rest  of  the  book  that  the  infelicity 
there  is  one  of  terminology  merely  and  not  of  thought.  It  might  have 
been  well  also  to  distinguish  a little  more  sharply  between  the  law  of 
Moses,  which  even  in  its  ceremonial  aspects  Paul  believed  (and  our 
author  also  unquestionably  believes)  was  the  law  of  God,  from  the 
misuse  of  that  law  in  the  new  dispensation  by  the  Judaizers. 

But  it  wTould  be  unreasonable  to  demand  completeness  of  discussion 
in  a book  such  as  this,  which  has  admirably  accomplished  its  true  pur- 
pose. Dr.  Macartney  has  here  unquestionably  helped  to  make  the 
Apostle  Paul  a living  figure  for  modern  readers ; the  wonderful  dramatic 
quality  of  the  life  of  Paul  is  well  brought  out.  We  have  exemplified  in 
this  book  the  noble  simplicity  of  style  which  helps  to  make  the  author 
so  powerful  as  a preacher.  Thus  when  the  account  of  the  conversion 
of  the  jailer  at  Philippi  is  closed  with  the  words:  “At  midnight  this 
jailer  was  a lost  pagan;  in  the  morning  he  was  in  the  Kingdom  of 
Heaven,”  we  feel  that  the  true  significance  of  the  incident  has  been 
presented  in  the  fewest  possible  words  and  with  the  greatest  possible 
vividness  and  power.  Or  when  we  read  on  p.  136  that  whereas  those 
disciples  at  Ephesus  “had  not  heard  of  the  Holy  Ghost,  the  disciples  of 
today  have  heard  of  Him,  and  that  is  about  all,”  we  can  well  understand 
that  under  the  preaching  of  Dr.  Macartney  men  are  “pricked  in  their 
hearts.”  Best  of  all,  such  writing  as  that  which  appears  in  this  book 
does  not  try  to  be  a substitute  for  the  Bible,  as  do  many  books  on 
Biblical  characters  today,  but  it  will  send  men  back  again,  with  new 
interest  and  understanding,  to  the  reading  of  the  Word  of  God. 

Princeton.  J.  Gresham  Machen. 

Protestant  Europe:  Its  Crisis  and  Outlook.  By  Adolf  Keller,  D.D., 
LL.D.,  and  George  Steward,  Ph.D.,  F.R.G.S.  New  York:  George 
H.  Doran  Company.  Pp.  371.  Price  $3.50 

This  book  consists  of  two  parts : Part  One  under  the  caption  of 


RECENT  LITERATURE 


473 


“Europe’s  Cultural  Maelstrom,”  treated  in  nineteen  chapters,  as  fol- 
lows : The  Path  of  the  Four  Horsemen ; The  Roots  of  Continental  Pro- 
testantism ; The  Antecedents  of  Present-Day  Movements ; Emerging 
Political  Ideals;  The  Backwash  of  Industrialism;  The  Contemporary 
Cultural  Turmoil;  Continental  Youth  Movements ; The  Problem  of  the 
Nature  of  Continental  Churches;  Church  versus  State;  The  Free 
Churches  of  Europe ; The  Church  and  the  People ; Continental  Mission- 
ary, Social  and  Temperance  Work;  The  Church  and  Education;  The 
Church  and  Labor ; the  Church  and  Peace  Movements ; The  Changing 
Theological  Front;  The  Relation  of  Protestant  and  Catholic  Churches; 
The  Problem  of  Minorities ; Federative,  Coordinating  and  Relief  Move- 
ments. 

Part  Two  under  the  caption  of  “The  Scope  of  European  Protes- 
testant  Churches,  treated  under  eight  chapters,  as  follows : The  Central 
Countries : Germany,  Switzerland,  Great  Britain  and  Ireland ; The 
Scandinavian  Countries:  Norway,  Sweden,  Denmark,  Iceland;  The 
Netherlands ; The  Latin  Countries  : France,  Belgium,  Spain,  Portugal, 
Italy;  The  Old  Hapsburg  Territories:  Czecho-Slovakia,  Austria,  Hun- 
gary ; The  Eastern  Countries : Poland,  The  Baltic  States,  Esthonia, 
Latvia,  Lithuania,  Finland,  Russia ; The  Balkan  Countries : Bulgaria, 
Greece,  Albania,  The  Kingdom  of  the  Serbs,  Croats  and  Slovenes,  Ru- 
mania, Turkey.  A valuable  Bibliography  and  Index  are  added. 

The  names  of  the  authors  of  this  volume  should  furnish  sufficient 
warrant  of  its  value.  Dr.  Keller  is  an  outstanding  figure  in  the  Protes- 
tant Churches  of  Europe.  He  was  trained  in  the  Universities  of  Basel, 
Geneva  and  Berlin.  For  three  years  he  was  Instructor  in  The  Interna- 
tional School  in  Cairo,  and  while  there  served  as  one  of  the  pastors  in  a 
Protestant  parish  in  that  city.  He  holds  a high  rank  as  a student  in 
Archaeology  and  was  connected  with  an  expedition  commissioned  to  visit 
the  Monastery  of  Ste.  Catherine  on  Mount  Sinai  to  study  the  Greek 
manuscripts  in  the  famous  Library  where  the  Codex  Sinaiticus  was  dis- 
covered in  1844  and  1859.  He  devoted  some  time  also  to  the  study  of 
Coptic  manuscripts  in  the  Monasteries  of  the  Western  Desert.  Dr. 
Keller  returned  to  Switzerland  in  1899  when  he  was  elected  Professor  of 
Religious  Education  in  the  State  College  of  Schaffhausen.  Afterwards 
he  was  pastor  of  a Reformed  Church  in  Geneva  from  which  position  he 
was  called  to  the  historic  parish  of  St.  Peter  in  Zurich.  Meantime  he 
had  been  recognized  as  the  leading  representative  of  the  church  unity 
movement  in  Europe.  He  is  now  the  European  Secretary  of  the  Federal 
Council  of  Churches,  and  also  directs  the  Social  and  Economic  Federation 
of  the  Continuation  Committee  of  the  Stockholm  Conference  on  Life  and 
Work.  In  this  capacity  he  edits  a Quarterly  Review  in  the  interests  of 
this  movement. 

Dr.  George  Stewart  is  the  associate  minister  of  the  Madison  Avenue 
Presbyterian  Church  of  New  York.  He  has  travelled  extensively  in 
Europe  and  he  has  made  a thorough  study  of  the  religious,  social  and 
economic  situation.  He  is  the  author  of  several  books.  In  this  volume  he 
embodies  the  results  of  his  long  study  of  the  European  Churches. 

Since  the  War  special  interest  has  been  developed  in  the  subjects  dis- 


474 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


cussed  in  this  volume.  It  is,  however,  the  first  book  that  has  penetrated 
so  deeply  into  the  acute  problems  that  European  Protestantism  is  facing. 
Hitherto  certain  aspects  of  the  situation  have  been  discussed,  but  gen- 
erally in  a fugitive  and  fragmentary  manner.  Here  is  presented  a treat- 
ment both  encylopaedic  and  thorough.  To  all  who  recognize  and 
appreciate  the  fact  that  the  historic  Churches  of  Europe  have  given  to 
America  our  Christianity  not  only  but  also  our  educational  and  civic 
institutions  a book  such  as  this  is  both  timely  and  stimulating.  It  will 
also  serve  to  direct  with  discrimination  and  effectiveness  the  missionary 
and  relief  movements  in  this  country  now  enlisted  in  behalf  of  European 
Protestantism. 

Special  interest  attaches  to  Chapter  VI  of  Part  One,  pp.  129-156,  on 
“The  Changing  Theological  Front.’’  The  tendencies  set  in  motion  by  the 
influence  of  Ritschlianism,  the  study  of  Comparative  Religion,  the 
Socio-Religious  movement  have  developed  what  the  writers  call  “The 
Theology  of  Crisis.”  “This  movement  of  thought  sprang  up  in  Switzer- 
land and  Germany  and  is  spreading  like  wildfire  throughout  the  Conti- 
nent. It  is  of  immense  importance  because  of  the  power  and  influence  it 
is  having  especially  over  large  sections  of  idealistic  youth  who  fell  frus- 
trated by  the  devastating  effects  of  the  War.  In  it,  the  aversion  of  the 
present  generation  from  the  spirit  which  led  to  war,  becomes  a genuine 
spiritual  revolution.  The  leaders  of  this  movement  are  a small  group  of 
Reformed  Swiss  theologians,  Professor  Barth,  now  in  Gottingen,  Ger- 
many, Professor  Brunner  in  Zurich,  and  Rev.  Thumeysen.  They  are 
seconded  on  the  German  Lutheran  side  by  Professors  Gogarten  of  Jena 
and  Bultmann  in  Marburg. 

This  so-called  “Theology  of  Crisis”  is  healthy  in  that  it  has  a theo- 
centric  influence  and  emphasizes  salvation  by  faith  alone.  The  effect  is 
to  focus  effort  on  the  preaching  of  the  Gospel,  to  stress  the  spiritual 
rather  than  the  ethical  side  of  Christianity.  It  has  marked  and  acceler- 
ated a swing  away  from  prevailing  rationalism. 

Let  it  not  be  regarded  as  a stricture  upon  the  value  of  the  book  that 
the  reviewer  feels  called  upon  to  direct  attention  to  the  fact  that  too 
little  emphasis  is  given  to  the  conservative  position  of  many  of  the 
leaders  in  the  Reformed  Churches  of  Europe.  There  prevails  in  many 
quarters  a consciousness  of  the  subtle  inroads  that  Modernism  is  making, 
and  a valiant  stand  has  been  taken  against  it  in  many  of  the  churches 
and  educational  institutions  in  Czechoslovakia,  Hungary,  Transylvania, 
and  Poland,  as  well  as  in  some  countries  in  western  Europe.  In  the 
influential  movements  for  union  now  under  way  there  are  not  wanting 
courageous  men  in  high  position  who  suspect  that  the  tendency  to  merge 
may  carry  with  it  also  a corresponding  tendency  to  minimize  the  place 
and  power  of  the  Reformed  Theology  throughout  Europe.  Should  this 
be  the  case  the  loss  resulting  to  Christianity  would  far  outweigh  what 
advantages  might  inhere  in  or  result  from  organic  union.  But  the  day 
of  such  a consummation  is  too  remote  to  justify  present  misgivings. 

Princeton.  Sylvester  Woodbridge  Beach. 


RECENT  LITERATURE 


475 


PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 

American  Church  Monthly,  New  York,  April:  William  H.  Dunphy, 
Regal  Power  of  the  Papacy;  Frederick  S.  Arnold,  Folk-lore  and 
Frazer;  Reginald  Tribe,  Ideals  of  the  Religious  Life;  Bessie  R. 
Burchett,  Need  of  Church  Schools;  C.  H.  Palmer,  Thomas  Hardy 
and  the  Church;  E.  Sinclair  Hertell,  A Little  about  William  Blake. 
The  Same,  May:  Clarence  A.  Manning,  Solovyev  and  Benson;  C.  H. 
Palmer,  The  Great  Defeat;  Mark  Brusstar,  Streeter — Prophet  of 
Youth;  Latta  Griswold,  Pius  II  at  Ancona.  The  Same,  June:  Clar- 
ence A.  Manning,  The  Religion  of  Leo  Tolstoy;  Walker  Gwynne, 
The  Exceptive  Clauses  in  St.  Matthew. 

American  Journal  of  Philology,  Baltimore,  April:  James  Hutton, 
First  Idyl  of  Moschus  in  Imitations  to  the  year  1800;  Kenneth  Scott, 
Deification  of  Demetrius  Poliorcetes ; Francis  A.  Woods,  Greek  Fish 
Names;  Albert  M.  Sturtevant,  The  suffix  -sc-  in  Old  Norse  Elska. 

Anglican  Theological  Review,  Lancaster,  April:  Luther  B.  Moore, 
Should  the  Present  Canon  on  Divorce  be  altered?;  Clifford  P.  More- 
house, English  Church  and  State  in  the  Feudal  Anarchy;  D.  A.  Mc- 
Gregor, Contemporary  Theories  of  Primitive  Religion;  Francis  J. 
Hall,  The  Study  of  Dogmatic  Theology. 

Biblical  Review,  New  York,  April:  John  McNicol,  The  Christianity 
of  Pascal;  A.  McCaig,  Christ’s  Teaching  concerning  his  own  Death; 
Edgar  Y.  Mullins,  Humanizing  our  Philosophy;  S.  D.  Chown,  The 
Springs  of  Evangelistic  Power;  E.  G.  Sihler,  Nero  and  the  Primitive 
Christians. 

Bibliotheca  Sacra,  St.  Louis,  April : A.  H.  Baldinger,  The  Para- 
mount Problem  of  Protestantism;  A.  S.  Badger,  Life  at  Eighty-five; 
J.  O.  Buswell,  Jr.,  Conditional  Immortality;  H.  J.  Flowers,  Christ’s 
Doctrine  of  the  Man  and  Sin ; J.  M.  Hantz,  Our  Lord’s  Divinity ; Her- 
bert Parzen,  A Chapter  of  Israelitish  History;  G.  H.  Estabrooks, 
Natural  and  Supernatural. 

Canadian  Journal  of  Religious  Thought,  Toronto,  March-April:  G.  S. 
Brett,  The  Modern  Mind  and  Modernism;  F.  G.  Vial,  Language  of 
the  Gospels ; E.  A.  Dale,  Religious  Purpose  of  the  Aeneid ; Kathleen 
Mackenzie,  Columba,  Saint  and  Statesman.  The  Same,  May-June: 
W.  T.  Brown,  The  Meaning  of  Worship;  Samuel  A.  B.  Mercer,  Ex- 
cavations in  Palestine  since  the  Great  War;  G.  S.  Brett,  Life  in  East- 
ern Lands ; H.  L.  MacNeill,  Paul,  the  first  Christian  Protestant ; S.  P. 
Rose,  Good  English  in  the  Pulpit;  H.  W.  Wright,  Experimentalism  in 
Religion. 

Catholic  Historical  Review,  Washington,  April : Clarence  E.  Mar- 
tin, The  American  Judiciary  and  Religious  Liberty;  Thomas  J.  Sha- 
han,  The  Higher  Education  of  the  Catholic  Clergy;  Edward  A.  Pace, 
The  Church  and  Scholasticism;  John  J.  Burke,  The  Historical  Attitude 
of  the  Church  towards  Nationalism;  John  A.  Ryan,  Attitude  of  the 
Church  toward  Free  Speech ; Moorhouse  F.  X.  Millar,  Origin  of 
Sound  Democratic  Principles  in  Catholic  Tradition. 


476 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


Church  Quarterly  Review,  London,  April : G.  K.  A.  Bell,  The  Ma- 
lines  Conversations ; H.  Maurice  Relton,  The  Incarnation  and  its  Ex- 
tension in  Church  and  Sacraments;  Claude  Jenkins,  John  Wyclif : the 
first  Phase;  W.  O.  E.  Oesterley,  Jewish  Marriage  in  Ancient  and 
Modern  Times;  Felix  Hope,  Asceticism. 

Congregational  Quarterly,  London,  April : Edward  Grubb,  The  Fact 
of  Christian  Unity;  Kenneth  A.  Saunders,  A Plea  for  New  Realism 
in  Christology;  Roderic  Dunkerley,  The  Earliest  Christian  Docu- 
ments; E.  Griffith -Jones,  God  and  Nature:  a Reply;  F.  C.  Spurr, 
Public  Reading  of  Scripture  Today. 

Crozer  Quarterly,  Philadelphia,  April : Frederick  Tracy,  Evolution 
and  the  Higher  Life  of  Man ; Oliver  W.  Elsbree,  From  West  to 
East ; Charles  M.  Bond,  Religion  and  Education ; Stewart  G.  Cole, 
Philosophical  Support  of  Mysticism ; R.  E.  E.  Harkness,  Story  of  the 
Christian  Church. 

Expository  Times,  Edinburgh,  April:  W.  M.  Macgregor,  Sermon  on 
Mount — The  Beatitudes ; Arthur  S.  Peake,  Commentaries  on  Old  and 
New  Testament;  R.  C.  Gillie,  Prophetic  Vocation:  a Comparison; 
J.  W.  Jack,  New  Light  on  Palestine.  The  Same,  May:  A.  J.  Gossip, 
Sermon  on  the  Mount — The  New  Righteousness;  F.  R.  Montgomery 
Hitchcock,  Latinity  of  the  Pastorals;  Arthur  S.  Peake,  Commentaries 
on  the  Old  and  New  Testaments,  iii;  R.  W.  Stewart,  Newer  Estimate 
of  Judaism.  The  Same,  June:  Arthur  S.  Peake,  Commentaries  on  the 
Old  and  New  Testaments,  iv;  S.  P.  T.  Prideaux,  A Plea  for  the  Study 
of  Theology;  F.  W.  Norwood,  Sermon  on  the  Mount,  iii;  John  E.  Mac- 
Fadyen,  A German  Estimate  of  Contemporary  British  Theology;  K.  L. 
Stevenson,  Origin  of  the  Hebrews. 

Harvard  Theological  Review,  Cambridge,  April : Benjamin  W. 
Bacon,  Some  “Western”  Variants  in  the  Text  of  Acts;  William  H.  P. 
Hatch,  The  Apostles  in  the  New  Testament  and  in  the  Ecclesiastical 
Tradition  of  Egypt. 

Homiletic  Review,  New  York,  March:  Do  Parents  Know  their  Chil- 
dren?; G.  Walter  Fiske,  Where  Abraham  went  to  Church;  D.  A. 
Harshaw,  Philosophy  of  the  Negro  Spiritual;  Thomas  F.  Opie,  The 
Preacher  to  the  Theologian.  The  Same,  April : Ward  Adair,  The  new 
Brand  of  Immortality;  Arthur  S.  Phelps,  Life  and  Art  of  Albrecht 
Diirer;  Do  Parents  Know  their  Children?  ii ; Rembert  G.  Smith,  Shall 
the  Preacher  regain  his  Power?;  H.  Norman  Sibley,  The  Terrible 
Meek.  The  Same,  May:  Wm.  E.  Bryce,  Can  we  believe  in  Miracles?; 
The  Minister  and  his  convictions;  Wm.  C.  Carl,  The  Organ  in  France 
and  America  today;  Clyde  F.  Vance,  Principles  in  the  use  of  Illustra- 
tions ; W.  E.  Griffith,  What  the  Church  may  learn  from  Masonry. 
The  Same,  June:  O.  F.  Davis,  The  pastor  and  the  child;  Fred  Smith, 
The  child  in  the  morning  worship ; R.  C.  Hallock,  The  minister’s  health 
and  how  to  edify  it;  Fred  Smith,  The  psychology  required  for  the  chil- 
dren’s sermonet. 

Jewish  Quarterly  Review,  Philadelphia,  April : Samuel  Schulman, 
Professor  Moore’s  “Judaism”;  Cecil  Roth,  Sumptuary  Laws  of  the 


RECENT  LITERATURE 


477 


Community  of  Carpentras;  Solomon  L.  Skoss,  The  Arabic  Commen- 
tary of  ’Ali  Ben  Suleiman  the  Karaite  of  the  book  of  Genesis. 

Journal  of  Religion,  Chicago,  April : Eugene  W.  Lyman,  Mysticism, 
Reason,  and  Social  Idealism ; E.  Boyd  Barrett,  Drama  of  Catholic  Con- 
fession; Clifford  Manshardt,  Converts  or  co-operation — a study  of 
modern  missions;  Herbert  W.  Hines,  Development  of  the  Psychology 
of  Prophecy;  Vincent  Taylor,  The  Synoptic  Gospels  and  some  recent 
British  criticism ; Shelby  V.  MoCasland,  The  Cult  story  of  the  Early 
Church. 

Journal  of  Theological  Studies,  London,  April : F.  C.  Burkitt,  The 
Mandaeans;  F.  C.  Burkitt,  Notes  on  Ginza  Rabba  174;  W.  Telfer, 
The  form  of  a dove;  W.  E.  Barnes,  Masoretic  reading  of  Isaiah  43:14; 
I.  W.  Slotki,  Stichometry  and  text  of  the  Great  Hallel ; F.  C.  Burkitt, 
The  MSS  of  "Narsai  of  the  Mysteries”;  C.  H.  Turner,  Marcan  Usage: 
notes  critical  and  exegetical  on  the  Second  Gospel,  ix. 

London  Quarterly  Review,  London,  April:  Marie  V.  Williams,  Re- 
ligious Basis  of  Plato’s  Philosophy;  S.  G.  Dimond,  Philosophy  of  Hen- 
rik Ibsen;  H.  Reinheimer,  World  of  colloids;  Leslie  D.  Weather- 
head,  Shelley’s  Hell  complex;  H.  P.  Palmer,  Benefit  of  Clergy;  Ar- 
thur B.  Bateman,  Rosetti,  the  Pre-Raphaelites,  and  a moral. 

Lutheran  Church  Quarterly,  Gettysburg  and  Philadelphia,  April: 
Paul  Scherer,  Ye  seek  Jesus  of  Nazareth;  John  Aberly,  Prayer; 
H.  C.  Alleman,  Prayer  in  the  Old  Testament;  Henry  Schaeffer, 
Pastor’s  devotional  study  of  the  Bible ; R.  C.  Horn,  Rambles  in  the 
Greek  New  Testament;  George  Drach,  A new  interpretation  of  types 
of  New  Testament  teaching;  C.  H.  Kraeling,  Reitzenstein  and  the 
Mystery  religions;  J.  A.  W.  Haas,  History  or  Revelation;  C.  M.  Jacobs, 
Sources  of  Lutheran  history;  P.  I.  Morentz,  Winning  your  Jewish 
neighbor. 

Missionary  Review  of  the  World,  New  York,  April:  J.  J.  Lucas, 
Fifty  years  of  missions  in  India;  Howard  E.  Anderson,  At  the  holiest 
Hindu  festival;  Robert  A.  Hume,  A missionary’s  motives  today;  Rob- 
ert E.  Speer,  Unclaimed  areas  for  Christ,  ii;  Jay  S.  Stowell,  The 
crossroads  church  at  the  crossroads ; Webster  E.  Browning,  Evangeli- 
cal missions  in  Latin  America.  The  Same,  May : W.  F.  Kraushaar, 
New  Guinea  Savages  for  Christ;  The  “One  sheep”  association  of 
Japan;  Robert  H.  Glover,  What  is  the  message  of  the  Church?;  India, 
the  rudder  of  Asia;  Wm.  Moyser,  Pandita  Ramabai’s  Mukti  Mission; 
N.  W.  Taylor,  Religious  freedom  in  Mexico.  The  Same,  June : Robert 
E.  Speer,  Christians  of  many  nations  at  Jerusalem ; Davidson  D.  T. 
Jabavu,  A South  African  view  of  the  Council;  Augustine  Rallia 
Ram,  Voices  from  Jerusalem  calling  India;  John  A.  Mackay,  The 
meaning  to  Latin  America;  Call  to  prayer  from  Jerusalem;  The  Chris- 
tian message  to  all  men;  John  M.  Springer,  Wealth  in  Central  Africa; 
Alton  B.  Jacobs,  Carey’s  influence  continues. 

Monist,  Chicago,  April:  John  Dewey,  Social  as  a category;  J.  E. 
Turner,  Charaoter  of  Reality;  F.  S.  C.  Northrop,  Internal  Inconsis- 


478 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


tency  in  Aristotelian  Logic;  Charner  M.  Perry,  Language  and 
Thought;  L.  L.  Bernard,  Development  of  Methods  in  Sociology. 

Moslem  World,  New  York,  April : Sonia  Howe,  Charles  de  Foucauld 
explorer  and  knight-errant;  D.  A.  Chowdhury,  Islam  in  Bengal;  Paul 
W.  Harrison,  Heart  of  our  message;  J.  Christy  Wilson,  The  all- 
Persia  church  conference;  Pierre  Crabites,  Islam,  Personal  Law  and 
the  Capitulations;  Charles  R.  Watson,  Launching  the  Council  for 
Western  Asia  and  Northern  Africa. 

New  Church  Life,  Lancaster,  April : L.  W.  T.  David,  The  Word  and 
the  human  Form ; Donald  F.  Rose,  Why  I am  a Swedenborgian ; 
Theodore  Pitcairn,  Ultimate  source  of  philosophic  ideas.  The  Same, 
May:  The  Origin  of  Man — Four  addresses.  The  Same,  June:  G.  A. 
Sexton,  Divine  Authority;  F.  W.  Elphick,  What  constitutes  heresy  in 
the  New  Church? 

Open  Court,  Chicago,  April : Lewis  Spence,  Papyri  of  Central  Amer- 
ica; M.  Whitcomb  Hess,  More  about  Space  and  Time  in  music;  Axel 
Lundeberg,  System  of  Occidental  Occultism;  Robert  S.  Walker,  My 
environment.  The  Same,  May:  Carlyle  Summerbell,  Jesus  and  Go- 
tama;  Thomas  D.  Eliot,  Insanity,  Relativity,  and  Group-formation; 
Daljit  Singh  Sadharia,  Future  of  Religion  in  Asia.  The  Same,  June: 
Wilfrid  D.  Hamely,  Psychology  of  the  Medicine  Man;  Royal  G. 
Hall,  Significance  of  John  Dewey  for  Religious  Interpretation ; Joseph 
Ratner,  Fundamentalism  and  the  Doctrine  of  Evolution ; Robert  P. 
Richardson,  Faith  of  an  Atheist;  H.  S.  Darlington,  Was  the  Biblical 
manna  an  animal  product? 

Review  and  Expositor,  Louisville,  April : Charles  S.  Farriss,  The 
place  of  a Theological  Seminary  in  a modern  world  of  culture ; W.  J. 
McGlothlin,  Reasons  for  courses  in  Bible  and  religious  education  in 
colleges;  H.  J.  Flowers,  The  grace  of  God  given  to  Paul — Ephesians 
3:1-13;  A.  T.  Robertson,  Dr.  Broadus  beginning  Greek;  A.  L.  Vail, 
Meaning  of  the  “Single  eye”  in  the  Gospels. 

Union  Seminary  Review,  Richmond,  April:  Best  Books  on  Life  and 
Letters  of  Paul ; G.  F.  Bell,  Reconstructing  our  belief ; W.  J.  Young, 
Message  of  Micah ; A.  L.  Lathem,  The  Summer  Bible  school;  Thorn- 
ton Whaling,  Religious  character  of  Stonewall  Jackson;  Marshall 
B.  Wyatt,  The  Seminary  and  extension ; C.  O’N.  Martindale,  Is  Chris- 
tianity supernatural? 

Yale  Review,  New  Haven,  April:  Willard  L.  Sperry,  Modern  re- 
ligion and  American  citizenship;  T.  H.  Morgan,  What  is  Darwinism?; 
J.  A.  Spender,  The  Press  and  international  affairs;  John  Spargo,  Ad- 
vance in  the  American  labor  movement ; Frederick  B.  Luquiens,  Span- 
ish-American  Literature;  Tucker  Brooke,  Shakespeare’s  Study  in  cul- 
ture and  anarchy. 

Biblica,  Roma,  Aprili : K.  Prumm,  Herrscherkult  und  Neues  Testa- 
ment, (con.);  L.  G.  de  Fonesca,  AmO^kt] — Foedus  an  testamentum? 
(con.)  ; P.  Jouon,  Notes  philologiques  sur  le  texte  hebreu  de  Josue;  E. 
Power,  Church  of  St.  Peter  in  Jerusalem  in  relation  to  House  of  Caiaphas 
and  Sancta  Sion;  B.  Alfrink,  Der  letzle  Konig  von  Babylon. 


RECENT  LITERATURE 


479 


Bilychnis,  Roma,  Aprile:  M.  de  Rubris,  La  preparazione  degli  opus- 
coli  azegliani : “programma  per  l’opinione  nazionale’  ed  “emancipazione 
degl’Israeliti” ; L.  Luzatto,  Un  filosofo  del  nazionalismo ; G.  Pioli,  II 
congresso  dei  modernist!  della  Chiesa  inglese ; M.  Vinciguerra,  La 
elezioni  in  France  e in  Germania  e le  condizione  dei  cattolici.  The  Same, 
Maggio : G.  Pioli,  William  Blake  arista  dell’invisibile ; P.  Chiminelli, 
G.  Savonaroia  nella  coscienza  dei  posteria;  E.  Ohlsen,  Nuovi  orienta- 
menti  del  protestantesimo. 

Bulletin  de  Litterature  Ecclesiastique,  Toulouse,  Mars-Avril : Henri 
Bremond,  Le  Vigneron  de  Montmorency  et  l’ficole  de  l’oraison  cordiale ; 
Louis  Desnoyers,  L’Etablissement  de  la  Royaute  en  Israel. 

Ciencia  Tomista,  Salamanca,  Mayo-Junio : Vicente  Beltran  de  He- 
redia,  El  maestro  Fray  Domingo  Banez  y la  Inquisicion  espanola;  M. 
Cuervo,  El  desco  natural  de  ver  a Dios  y los  fundamentos  de  la  Apolo- 
getica  inmanentista ; Sabino  Alonso,  Delegacion  “ab  homine”  y dele- 
gacion  “a  jure”  para  oir  confesiones  de  religiosas. 

Estudis  Franciscians,  Barcelona,  Abril-Juny:  Miquel  d’Esplugues,  El 
problema  de  l’ateisme;  Romauld  Bizzarri,  Della  falsa  originalita:  ossia 
Arte,  Religione  e Filosofia;  Michael  a Neukirsch,  Harmonia  ac  Con- 
cordia quinque  Systematum  de  concursu  gratiae  actualis  cum  libero 
arbitrio. 

Etudes  Theologiques  et  Religieuses,  Montpellier,  Mai-Juin:  L.  Per- 
rier, La  prehistoire  de  la  Palestine  et  la  Bible;  L.  Maury,  Tommy 
Fallot  (fin.)  ; Edouard  Bruston,  La  litterature  sapientale  dans  de  livre 
de  Job;  Franz  J.  Leenhardt,  Remarques  exegetique  sur  I Samuel 
21:6;  Leon  James,  Essai  sur  la  Tradition. 

Foi  et  Vie,  Paris,  Avril : Paul  Doumergue,  Succedanes  ou  adjuvants 
du  Christianisme ; E.  Huguenin,  La  Fraternite  entre  les  sexes;  La  crise 
des  elites  et  les  catholiques  franqais;  Rene  Jullian,  Tradition  et  mod- 
ernite  dans  l’art;  G.  Liengme,  Les  lois  psychologiques  appliquees  dans 
l’enseignment  religieux,  la  priere,  la  predication.  The  Same,  Mai:  Emil 
Doumergue,  Le  Vatican  conitre  l’Action  franqaise  et  le  facisme.  The 
Same,  Juin:  L’Allemagne  et  la  propagande  de  culture  allemande;  M. 
Arbousse-Bastide,  La  Conference  oecumenique  de  Lausanne ; Pierre 
Mirabaud,  La  Conference  de  Jerusalem;  G.  Debu,  Quelques  traits  de 
la  Conference. 

Gereformeerd  Theologisch  Tijdschrift,  Aalten,  April:  C.  Bouma, 
Formgeschichte ; A.  J.  Fanoy,  Het  onderteekingsformulier  van  de  Dien- 
aren  des  Woords.  The  Same,  Mei : C.  Bouma,  De  taal  van  Jezus  en  van 
de  Rabbijnen;  J.  S.  Post,  De  Christelijke  Doop;  H.  A.  Barker,  Non 
Tali  Auxilio.  The  Same,  Juni:  Verlags  van  de  I7e  Algemeene  Ver- 
gadering  der  Vereeniging  van  Predikanten  van  de  Gereformeerde  Ker- 
ken  in  Nederland;  H.  A.  Barker,  Non  Tali  Auxilio. 

Nieuwe  Theologische  Studien,  Wageningen,  April : W.  J.  Aalders, 
Brunner’s  Mittler;  J.  de  Zwaan,  Neotestamentica ; A.  van  Veldhuizen, 
De  Wurttembergische  Bibelanstalt  en  haar  uitgaven.  The  Same,  Mei: 
A.  van  Veldhuizen,  Vogelboeken;  G.  van  der  Leuuw,  Bericht  over 


480 


THE  PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  REVIEW 


de  Godsdienstgeschiedenis ; Th.  L.  W.  van  Ravesteijn,  Voor  onze 
Oudtestamentische  studie. 

Onder  Eigen  Vaandel,  Wageningen,  April : F.  W.  C.  L.  Schulte, 
Een  teeken  van’s  Heeren  nabijheid;  N.  G.  Veldhoen,  Simon  de  toove- 
naar;  Th.  L.  Haitjema,  De  theologie  van  Gustaf  Aulen;  J.  C.  Aal- 
ders,  Het  theologisch  belang  van  het  Assensch  leergeschil;  L.  W.  Bak- 
huizen  van  den  Brink,  De  groote  Synode;  A.  H.  de  Hartog,  Theolo- 
gie des  Woords? 

Revue  d’Ascetique  et  de  Mystique,  Toulouse,  Avril : Lettres  inedites 
du  P.  Jean-Baptiste  Saint-Jure;  M.  Viller,  Le  xviie  siecle  et  l’origine 
des  retraites  spirituelles ; F.  Cavallera,  Une  controverse  sur  les  graces 
mystiques. 

Revue  d’Histoire  Ecclesiatique,  Louvain,  Avril : J.  Duhr,  Le  De  Fide 
de  Bachiarius  (fin.)  ; L.  Van  der  Essen,  La  situation  religieuse  de 
Pays-Bas  en  1634. 

Revue  d’Histoire  et  de  Philosophic  religieuse,  Strasbourg,  Mars- 
Avril:  Maurice  Goguel,  Critique  et  Histoire:  a propos  de  la  vie  de 
Jesus;  G.  Van  der  Leeuw,  A propos  de  recentes  etudes  sur  la  structure 
de  la  mentalite  primitive;  Pierre  Janelle,  Le  voyage  de  Martin  Bucer 
et  Paul  Fagius  de  Strasbourg  en  Angleterre  en  1549. 

Revue  des  Sciences  Philo  so phiques  et  Theologiques,  Paris,  Avril: 

M.  D.  Roland-Gosselin,  Le  Sermon  sur  la  montagne  et  la  theologie 
thomiste;  A.  D.  Sertillanges,  Note  sur  la  nature  du  mouvement 
d’apres  S.  Thomas  d’Aquin ; P.  Amiable,  Les  harmonies  de  la  Cene  et 
de  la  Croix. 

Scholastik,  Freiburg  im  Breisgau,  3 :2 : Joseph  Stiglmayr,  Der  sog. 
Dionysius  Areopagita  und  Severus  von  Antiochen;  August  Deneffe, 
Gehort  die  Himmelfahrt  Maria  zum  Glaubensschatz  ? ; Joseph  Frobes, 
Dynamische  Psychologie. 

Zeitschrift  fur  katholische  Theologie,  Innsbruck,  52:2:  M.  Grab- 
mann,  Der  Einfluss  Alberts  des  Grossen  auf  das  mittelalterliche 
Geistesleben,  i ; J.  Santeler,  Die  Predestination  in  den  Romerbrief- 
kommentaren  des  13  Jahrhunderts ; C.  A.  Kneller,  Die  Bibelbulle  Six- 
tus’ V ; K.  Gf.  Preysing,  Echtheit  und  Bedeutung  der  dogmatitschen 
Erklarung  Zephyrrins ; C.  Bockl,  Wer  ist  der  Monch  von  Heilsbronn?; 

N.  Paulus,  Suarez  fiber  die  Definierbarkeit  der  leiblichen  Himmelfahrt 
Maria;  J.  B.  Schuster,  Das  Prinzip  der  doppelten  Kausalitat  und  seine 
Anwendung  auf  die  Norwehr. 

Zeitschrift  fiir  Theologie  und  Kirche,  Tfibingen,  9:2:  Friedrich 
Traub,  Philosophischer  und  religioser  Wirklichkeitsbegriff ; Karl 
Thieme,  Zur  Trinitatsfrage ; Kurt  Stavenhagen,  Die  Idee  des  re- 
ligiosen  Wunders;  R.  F.  Merkel,  Zum  Problem  eines  neuen  Sex- 
ualethos. 


D.  L.  MOODY:  HIS  MESSAGE  FOR  TODAY 

By  Charles  R.  Erdman,  D.D.,  LL.D.,  New  York:  Fleming  H. 
Revell  Company.  1928.  Pp.  156.  Price,  $1.50. 

“The  substance  of  this  volume  was  given  in  the  form  of 
lectures  delivered  on  the  Smyth  Foundation  at  Columbia  Theo- 
logical Seminary,  Decatur,  Georgia,  in  March,  1928.  It  is  a 
pleasure  to  acknowledge  the  honour  conferred  by  the  faculty 
of  the  seminary  in  their  appointment  to  this  lectureship ; and 
further,  it  is  desired  to  express  deep  appreciation  for  being 
permitted  to  present  these  lectures  in  this  more  permanent 
form.” — (Foreword.) 

THE  HOLY  SPIRIT  IN  THE  GOSPELS 

By  J.  Ritchie  Smith,  D.D.,  Professor  of  Flomiletics  in  Prince- 
ton Theological  Seminary.  Author  of  “The  Teaching  of 
the  Gospel  of  John”;  “The  Wall  and  the  Gates.”  New 
York:  The  Macmillan  Company,  1926. 

“Throughout  the  entire  volume  one  finds  unmistakable  evi- 
dences of  broad  and  accurate  scholarship,  a courageous  facing 
of  difficulties  and  objections  and  a determination  to  think  things 
through,  a catholicity  of  spirit  even  where  the  widest  differences 
of  convictions  enter,  and  a deep  and  vital  devotion  to  Jesus 
Christ.  It  is  with  an  inexpressible  satisfaction  one  rises  from 
the  reading  of  such  a work.” — The  Presbyterian. 

WHAT  IS  FAITH? 

By  J.  Gresham  Machen,  D.D.  New  York:  The  Macmillan 
Company,  Pp.  263.  London  : Hodder  & Stoughton. 

“If  we  had  the  resources  we  should  provide  a copy  to  every 
minister  and  lay  preacher  in  the  British  Isles.” — The  British 
Weekly. 

“Professor  Machen  has  written  a strong  and  courageous 
book  . . .” — Christian  World  (London). 


CHRISTIANITY  AND  LIBERALISM 

By  J.  Gresham  Machen,  D.D.  New  York:  The  Macmillan 
Company,  1923. 

“This  is  a book  that  should  be  read  by  every  thinking  man, 
whether  he  calls  himself  a conservative  or  a liberal.  While  evi- 
dently the  product  of  a thorough  scholar,  it  is  written  through- 
out in  simple,  non-technical  words.” — S.  G.  Craig  in  The  Pres- 
byterian. 


The  Selected  Writings 

BENJAMIN  BRECKINRIDGE 
WARFIELD 

Late  Professor  of  Theology  in  Princeton 
Theological  Seminary 

IN  TEN  VOLUMES 


At  the  time  of  his  death  in  1921,  the  late  Dr.  Benjamin  Breck- 
inridge Warfield  was  the  leading  Calvinistic  theologian  in  the 
English  speaking  world.  An  Editorial  Committee  proposes  to 
publish  through  the  Oxford  University  Press,  in  a series  of  vol- 
umes, Dr.  Warfield’s  contribution  to  theological  thought  by  re- 
printing the  important  articles  which  he  contributed  to  the  vari- 
ous Bible  Dictionaries  and  Encyclopedias  and  to  the  theological 
reviews,  especially  The  Princeton  Theological  Review. 

The  first  volume,  entitled  Revelation  and  Inspiration , contains 
two  articles  on  the  Idea  of  Revelation,  and  a number  of  exegeti- 
cal  and  critical  articles  on  the  Biblical  idea  of  Inspiration  and 
the  grounds  of  belief  in  the  plenary  inspiration  of  Scripture. 

The  second  volume  will  contain  Dr.  Warfield’s  major  articles 
on  several  Biblical  doctrines,  such  as  The  Trinity,  Predestina- 
tion, Faith,  The  Person  of  Christ,  etc. 

The  third  volume  will  comprise  the  historico-critical  articles 
on  the  Person  and  Work  of  Christ. 

Volumes  four,  five  and  six  will  contain  articles  on  Historical 
Theology.  They  will  include  the  articles  on  Augustine,  Calvin, 
and  The  Westminster  Confession.  These  articles  are  authori- 
tative on  their  respective  subjects. 

The  seventh  and  eighth  volumes  will  contain  the  articles  on 
Perfectionism. 

There  will  be  a ninth  volume  of  miscellaneous  articles  and  a 
tenth  volume  containing  the  most  important  of  Dr.  Warfield’s 
book  reviews. 

Volume  I,  now  ready,  may  be  ordered  through  your  book- 
seller, or  direct  from  the  publisher.  It  is  bound  in  cloth,  8vo 
(9P2 x6j4),  pp.  xiii+456,  price,  $3.00. 

OXFORD  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

AMERICAN  BRANCH  NEW  YORK